Yaskawa Motoman Paint Owner's Manual

NX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR PAINTING
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain
for future reference.
MOTOMAN INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOMAN- INSTRUCTIONS
NX100 INSTRUCTIONS
NX100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
NX100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The NX100 operator’s manuals above correspond to specific usage.
Be sure to use the appropriate manual.
155223-1CD
7
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A036 7
• This manual explains the various components of the NX100 system and
general operations. Read this manual carefully and be sure to understand its contents before handling the NX100.
• General items related to safety are listed in Section 1: Safety of the
NX100 Instructions. To ensure correct and safe operation, carefully
read the NX100 Instruction before reading this manual.
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers or
shields removed for clarity. Be sure all covers and shields are replaced
before operating this product.
• The drawings and photos in this manual are representative examples
and differences may exist between them and the delivered product.
• YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary due to
product improvements, modifications, or changes in specifications. If
such modification is made, the manual number will also be revised.
• If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA representative to order a new copy. The representatives are listed on the
back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the manual number listed
on the front cover.
• YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized
modification of its products. Unauthorized modification voids your product’s warranty.
ii
Notes for Safe Operation
Read this manual carefully before installation, operation, maintenance, or inspection of the
NX100.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “DANGER”, “WARNING,” “CAUTION,” “MANDATORY,” or “PROHIBITED.”
Indicates an imminent hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury to personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury to personnel
and damage to equipment. It may also be used to alert
against unsafe practices.
Always be sure to follow explicitly the items listed under this
heading.
Must never be performed.
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in some situations. At
any rate, be sure to follow these important items.
NOTE
To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure to follow all instructions, even if
not designated as “CAUTION”, “WARNING” AND “DANGER.”
iii
• Before operating the manipulator, check that servo power is turned OFF
when the emergency stop buttons on the front door of the NX100 and
programming pendant are pressed.
When the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON LED on the programming pendant is turned OFF.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the emergency stop circuit cannot stop the
manipulator during an emergency. The manipulator should not be used if the emergency
stop buttons do not function.
Emergency Stop Button
• Once the emergency stop button is released, clear the cell of all items
which could interfere with the operation of the manipulator. Then turn
the servo power ON.
Injury may result from unintentional or unexpected manipulator motion.
TURN
Release of Emergency Stop
• Observe the following precautions when performing teaching operations
within the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator:
- Be sure to use a lockout device to the safeguarding when going inside.
Also, display the sign that the operation is being performed inside the
safeguarding and make sure no one closes the safeguarding.
- View the manipulator from the front whenever possible.
- Always follow the predetermined operating procedure.
- Keep in mind the emergency response measures against the
manipulator’s unexpected motion toward you.
- Ensure that you have a safe place to retreat in case of emergency.
Improper or unintended manipulator operation may result in injury.
• Confirm that no persons are present in the P-point maximum envelope of
the manipulator and that you are in a safe location before:
- Turning ON the NX100 power
- Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant
- Running the system in the check mode
- Performing automatic operations
Injury may result if anyone enters the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator during operation. Always press an emergency stop button immediately if there are problems.The emergency stop buttons are located on the right of the front door of the NX100
and the programming pendant.
iv
• Perform the following inspection procedures prior to conducting manipulator teaching. If problems are found, repair them immediately, and be
sure that all other necessary processing has been performed.
-Check for problems in manipulator movement.
-Check for damage to insulation and sheathing of external wires.
• Always return the programming pendant to the hook on the NX100 cabinet after use.
The programming pendant can be damaged if it is left in the P-point maximum envelope
of the manipulator, on the floor, or near fixtures.
• Read and understand the Explanation of Warning Labels in the NX100
Instructions before operating the manipulator.
Definition of Terms Used Often in This Manual
The MOTOMAN is the YASKAWA industrial robot product.
The MOTOMAN usually consists of the manipulator, the controller, the programming pendant,
and manipulator cables.
In this manual, the equipment is designated as follows:
Equipment
Manual Designation
NX100 Controller
NX100
NX100 Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant
Cable between the manipulator and the controller
Manipulator cable
v
Descriptions of the programming pendant keys, buttons, and displays are shown as follows:
Equipment
Programming
Pendant
Manual Designation
Character Keys
The keys which have characters printed on them are
denoted with [ ].
ex. [ENTER]
Symbol Keys
The keys which have a symbol printed on them are
not denoted with [ ] but depicted with a small picture.
GO BACK
ex. page key
The cursor key is an exception, and a picture is not
shown.
PAGE
Axis Keys
Numeric Keys
“Axis Keys” and “Numeric Keys” are generic names
for the keys for axis operation and number input.
Keys pressed
simultaneously
When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously,
the keys are shown with a “+” sign between them,
ex. [SHIFT]+[COORD]
Displays
The menu displayed in the programming pendant is
denoted with { }.
ex. {JOB}
Description of the Operation Procedure
In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • " means that the
cursor is moved to the object item and the SELECT key is pressed, or that the item is directly
selected by touching the screen.
Registered Trademark
In this manual, names of companies, corporations, or products are trademarks, registered
trademarks, or brand names for each company or corporation. The indications of (R) and TM
are omitted.
vi
1
Introduction
1.1 NX100 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.2 Key Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
 Character Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
 Symbol Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
 Axis Keys and Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
 Keys Pressed Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
 The Five Display Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
 General-purpose Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
 Main Menu Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
 Status Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
 Human Interface Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
 Menu Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
 Denotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
1.2.6 Character Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
 Alphanumeric Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
 Symbol Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
1.3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.3.1 Teach Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.3.2 Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.3.3 Remote Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
1.4 About the Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
1.4.2 Switching Security Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
2
Manipulator Coordinate Systems
and Operations
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Control Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.1.2 Types of Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.2 General Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
 Check Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
 Select Teach Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
 Select Control Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
 Select Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
 Select Manual Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
vii
 Servo ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
 Axis Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
 HIGH SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.1 Joint Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2 Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.3.3 Cylindrical Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.4 Tool Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
 Selecting the Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3.5 User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
 Selecting User Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.6 External Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.3.7 Control Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.3.8 Control Point Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3
Teaching
3.1 Preparation for Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.3 Registering a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
 Registering Job Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
 Registering Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
 Registering Control Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
 Switching to the Teaching Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2 Teaching Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.1 The Teaching Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
 Joint Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
 Circular Interpolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
 Spline Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.3 Teaching Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
 Registering Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
 Registering Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
 Registering Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3 Checking Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
 Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations . . . . . . . 3-19
 Selecting Manual Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
 Moving to Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
 Test Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.4 Modifying Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing . . . . . . . . 3-27
 Currently Called Up Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
viii
 Calling Up Other Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
3.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
3.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
3.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
 Modifying Position Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
 Modifying Interpolation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
3.4.5 Undo Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
3.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
 Deleting Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
 Modifying Reference Point Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
3.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
 Deleting Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
 Modifying Timer Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
3.5 Modifying Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.5.1 Calling Up a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
3.5.2 Windows Related to Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
 JOB HEADER Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
 JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
 COMMAND POSITION Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
 JOB CAPACITY Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
3.6 Editing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.6.1 Instruction Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
3.6.2 Inserting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
3.6.3 Deleting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
3.6.4 Modifying Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
3.6.5 Modifying Additional Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
3.6.6 Modifying Additional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48
3.6.7 Inserting Additional Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
3.6.8 Deleting Additional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
3.7 Editing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.7.1 Selecting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
3.7.2 Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
3.7.3 Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
3.7.4 Pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
3.7.5 Reverse Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
3.8 Test Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.9.1 Editing Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
 Modification of Speed Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
 Relative Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
 Modification by TRT (Traverse Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
3.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62
3.9.3 Editing Condition Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
3.9.4 User Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-64
 Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer,
and Real Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
 Setting Character Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
 Registering Variable Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
ix
 Displaying Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
 Setting Position Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
 Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . 3-71
 Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys . . . . . . . . . 3-73
 Deleting Data Set of Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
 Checking Positions by Position Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
 Manipulator Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.9.5 Editing Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
 Setting the Number of Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3.9.6 Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
 Line Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
 Step Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
 Label Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
 Instruction Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
 Tag Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
4
Playback
4.1 Preparation for Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
 Calling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
 Registering the Master Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
 Calling the Master Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.2 The PLAYBACK Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
 Display of Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
 Operation Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.1 Playback Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
 Selecting the Start Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
 Servo On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
 Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.2 Special Playback Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
 Low Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
 Limited Speed Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
 Dry-run Speed Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
 Machine Lock Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
 Check Mode Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
 Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check
Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
 Cancel All Special Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.3 Stop and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.1 Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
 Using the Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
 Using an External Input Signal (System Input) . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.2 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
 Restart After Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3.3 Stop by Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
 Restart After Stop by Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
x
4.3.4 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
 Temporary Stop by Mode Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
 Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
4.4 Modifying Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.1 Speed Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
 Setting Speed Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
 Modifying Play Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
 Releasing Speed Override Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
 Enabling Reserved Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
 Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
 Registering Jobs to Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
 Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
4.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
 Start Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
 Checking Job Reservation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
 Resetting Job Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
4.5.3 Hold Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
 [HOLD] on the Programming Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
 Hold by External Input Signal (System Input) . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
 Hold at the Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
4.6 Displaying Job Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
5
Editing Jobs
5.1 Copying Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5.1.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5.2 Deleting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
5.2.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
5.3 Modifying Job Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window. . . . . . .5-8
5.3.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window. . . . . . . . . . .5-10
5.4 Editing Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only . . . 5-13
6
Convenient Functions
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Parallel Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
xi
6.2.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Setting the Shift Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
 Registering Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
 Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
 Setting the Shift Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.3 Registering Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
 SFTON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
 SFTOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
 MSHIFT Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.2.5 Examples of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
 Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
 Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3.2 Coordinate Systems for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.3.3 Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
 Window Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.3.4 Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
 Window DIsplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
 Jobs Targeted for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
 Conversion of Coordinated Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
 Operation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.4 PAM Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.4.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
 Input Ranges for Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.4.2 Operating Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
 Setting Adjustment Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
 Executing the Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
 Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6.5 Mirror Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.5.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.5.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
 Parameter Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
 Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
 Group Axes Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
 Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.5.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
 Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
 Group Axes Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
 Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.5.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
 Object Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
 Group Axes Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
 Position Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.5.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.5.6 Operation Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
 Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
xii
 Mirror Shift Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
 Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
7
External Memory Devices
7.1 Memory Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Compact Flash (CF Cards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
 Recommended Compact Flash Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
 Notes on handling Compact Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
 Inserting a Compact Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
7.2 Handling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.1 Normal Mode Data Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
7.2.2 Collective Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
 CMOS.BIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
 CMOSBK.BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
 CMOSxx.HEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
 ALCMSxx.HEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
7.2.3 File Existence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
 Saving by Overwriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
7.3 Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
 Operating a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
 Saving Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
 Loading Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
 Verifying Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
 Deleting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
 Job Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
8
Parameter
8.1 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
 S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION









MAX. SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
S1CxG002 to S1CxG009:
JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR
REGISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED. . . . .8-3
S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE
VALUE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT . . . . .8-3
S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE . . . . . . . . .8-3
S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
S1CxG045 to S1CxG048:
JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
xiii
 S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED . . 8-5
 S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
 S2C153: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN










OPERATION OF JOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
S2C154: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM
(WHEN EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL
FUNCTION USED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
S2C238: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB
TEACHING POSITION CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
S2C324, S2C325: OPERATION AFTER RESET
FROM PATH DEVIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
S2C326: DEVIATED POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
S2C327: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL
POSITION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
S2C515: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE
CONTROL FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
S2C516: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR
ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION CONT
PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
S2C517: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION
COMPLETION DELAY TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
S2C560: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION
SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
S3C806 to S3C808: POSITION CORRECTING
FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
 S2C147: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER













SUPPLY IS TURNED ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
S2C148: SELECTION OF
CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
S2C149: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED . . . . 8-11
S2C150: EXECUTION UNITS AT
“FORWARD” OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
S2C151: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE)
EXECUTION AT “FORWARD” OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
S2C155: CHANGING STEP ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
S2C156: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH
COORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
S2C158: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
S2C159: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION . . . . . . 8-13
S2C160: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY
OPERATION IN PLAY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
S2C161: RESERVED WORK JOB
CHANGING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
S2C162: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL
OPERATION IN PLAY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
S2C163: LANGUAGE LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
S2C166: INSTRUCTION INPUT
LEARNING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
xiv
 S2C167: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL



























POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
S2C168: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB
SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
S2C169: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR . . . . .8-15
S2C170: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT
CYCLE MODE “1- STEP” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
S2C171: EXTERNAL START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
S2C172: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START. . . . . . . . . .8-16
S2C173: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
S2C174: RESERVED START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
S2C176: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION
(PLAY MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
S2C177: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
S2C179: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
S2C180: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE
SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
S2C181: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP
PROHIBITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
S2C182: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN
“IO” IS SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
S2C186: STEP REGISTRATION AT
TOOL NO. CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
S2C211: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
S2C212: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
S2C230: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
S2C231: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . .8-19
S2C232: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . .8-19
S2C297: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
S2C298: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . .8-21
S2C299: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION . . . . . .8-22
S2C317 to S2C321: TIME RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
S2C333: TOOL NO. SWITCHING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
S2C335: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
S2C336: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin
Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
S2C339: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area . . . . . . . 8-26
 S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT . . . . . . . . .8-26
 S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
 S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
 S2C003 to S2C050:






CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
S2C051 to S2C114: CUBE USING METHOD. . . . . . . . . . .8-30
S2C188 to S2C193: ROBOT INTERFERENCE
CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
S3C000 to S3C023: CUBE SOFT LIMIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
S3C024 to S3C031: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA . . . .8-33
S3C032 to S3C543: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA. . . . .8-33
S3C801 to S3C804: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA . . . .8-33
xv
 S3C805: A SIDE LENGTH OF
WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
 S2C187: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL






POWER IS ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
S4C000 to S4C007:
PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
S4C008 to S4C015:
PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
S4C016 to S4C023: DATA OF USER
INPUT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
S4C024 to S4C031: DATA OF USER
OUTPUT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
S4C032 to S4C039: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE
INITIALIZED AT SWITCHING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
S4C126: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR
DROP ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS . . . . . . . 8-38
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
 S2C164: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION
SPEED INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
 S2C165: +MOV INSTRUCTION









INTERPOLATION INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
S2C183: OPERATION METHOD AT
FWD/BWD OPERATION OR TEST RUN BY
INDEPENDENT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
S2C184: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF
SUBTASK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 BY INDEPENDENT
CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
S2C194: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
S2C195 to S2C206: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT . . 8-40
S2C322: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED
MANIPULATOR
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
S2C323: POSTURE CONTROL OF
MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
S2C549: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT
CONTROL GROUP SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
S2C550: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION . . . . . . . . 8-42
S3C809: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT
STATION POSITION
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications . . . 8-43
 S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING. . . . 8-43
 S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING

DIRECTION LIMIT VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING
OVERLAP VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
xvi
 S1CxG063, S1CxG064:




PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43
S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION . . . . . . . .8-43
S2C332: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD . . . . . . .8-44
S3C819 to S3C898: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT
(When analog output corresponding to speed function is used)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
S3C899: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE
(When form cutting function is used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
 S2C508: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
 S2C646 to S2C648:








COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
S4C181 to S4C212:
SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
S4C213 to S4C244:
OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
S2C649 to S2C651:
COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
S2C652 to S2C654:
COOLING FAN ALARM 2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
S2C655 to S2C657:
COOLING FAN ALARM 3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
S2C658 to S2C660:
FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
S2C661 to S2C663:
FAN ALARM 2 POWER SOURCE STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
S2C664 to S2C666:
FAN ALARM 3 POWER SOURCE STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
 RS000: COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
8.9.1 Basic Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
 RS030: NUMBER OF DATA BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
 RS031: NUMBER OF STOP BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
 RS032: PARITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
 RS033: TRANSMISSION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
 RS034: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A) . . . . . . .8-47
 RS035:
TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER (TIMER B). .8-47
 RS036:
NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES. . . . . .8-48
 RS037:
NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES . . . . .8-48
 RS038: BLOCK CHECK METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
8.9.2 FC1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
 RS050: NUMBER OF DATA BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
 RS051: NUMBER OF STOP BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
 RS052: PARITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
 RS053: TRANSMISSION SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
 RS054: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A) . . . . . . .8-48
xvii
 RS055: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER




(TIMER B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
RS056: NUMBER OF ENQ RETRANSMISSION RETRIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
RS057: NUMBER OF DATA RETRANSMISSION RETRIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
RS058: FC2 FORMAT SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
RS059: EXTERNAL MEMORY FILE OVERWRITE
SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.10 Application Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.10.1 Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
 AxP000: APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
 AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING
START CONDITION FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
 AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END
CONDITION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
 AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP009: WORK CONTINUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED . 8-50
 AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL . 8-50
 AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO.
(Jigless system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
8.10.2 Handling Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
 AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8.10.3 Spot Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
 AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF CONNECTED POWER
SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
 AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL . . 8-51
 AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT . . . . . 8-51
 AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING
CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
 AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
 AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME . . . . 8-52
 AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT
ALARM VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
8.10.4 General-purpose Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
 AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
9
Painting Application
9.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Outline of Operations and Painting Functions . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.1 Example of Painting System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.2.2 Settings for Panting System When Using a Spray Gun . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.3 Settings for Painting System When Using a Bell Gun . . . . . . . 9-4
xviii
9.3 Teaching for Painting Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.4 Anticipation Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4.1 Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
9.4.2 Notes on Anticipation Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
9.5 Registering Work Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5.1 SPYON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
 Registering the SPYON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
 Registering the SPYON Instruction in a
One-touch Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
9.5.2 Notes on the SPYON Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
9.5.3 SPYOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
 Registering the SPYOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
 Registering the SPYOF Instruction in a
One-touch Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
9.5.4 Notes on the SPYOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
9.5.5 PAINTSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
 Registering the PAINSET Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
9.5.6 CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
 What Is the Job Registration Table? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
 Registering the Job Registration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
 Registering the CALL Instruction (JET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
9.6 Painting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.7 Managing Painting Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
9.8 Editing Painting Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
9.8.1 Calling Up Painting Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
9.8.2 Registering Painting Condition Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
9.9 Painting System Setting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
9.9.1 Calling Up Painting System Setting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
9.9.2 Editing Painting System Setting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File . . . . . 9-47
9.10.1 Editing Painting System Characteristics Setting Files. . . . . .9-49
9.10.2 ON Timing of the Work Start Instruction for the SPYON
Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
9.10.3 OFF Timing of the Work Start Instruction for the
SPYOF Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
9.10.4 Notes on the ON/OFF Timing of the
Work Start Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
9.11 Work Instruction List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
10
Table of Basic Instructions
10.1 Move Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 I/O Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3 Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
xix
10.4 Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.5 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
11
Error
11.1 Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1.1 System and General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.1.2 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.1.3 Job Defined Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.1.4 External Memory Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.1.5 Concurrent I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.1.6 Maintenance Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
xx
1.1 NX100 Overview
1 Introduction
1.1
NX100 Overview
The main power switch and the door lock are located on the front of the NX100 controller. The
emergency stop button is installed in the upper right corner of the cabinet door and the programming pendant hangs from a hook below the button.
For information on setup, installation, and connection of the NX100 system, refer to the
“NX100 INSTRUCTIONS.”
Main power switch
Door lock
Door lock
NX100 Front View
1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2
Programming Pendant
1.2.1
Programming Pendant Overview
The programming pendant is equipped with the keys and buttons used to conduct manipulator
teaching operations and to edit jobs.
Start button
Hold button
Emergency
stop button
Mode switch
REMOTE
Menu area
General-purpose
display area
PLAY
TEACH
JOB
START
EDIT
DISPLAY
HOLD
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
0013 MOVL V=880.0
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
Insertion slot for
Compact Flash
Page key
Main Menu
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
Cursor key
LAYOUT
COORD
Multi
MAIN
MENU
Enable switch
Located on the back of
the programming pendant.
When you lightly squeeze it,
the power turns ON.
When you firmly squeeze it,
the power turns OFF.
SHORT
CUT
DIRECT
OPEN
SERVO
ON
READY
X+
S-
S+
Y-.
Y+
L-
L+
Z-
Z+
MANUAL SPEED
U-
U+
SLOW
INTER
LOCK
ROBOT
INFORM
LIST
EX.AXIS
BACK
SPACE
MOTION
TYPE
PAGE
AREA
!?
CANCEL
Select key
SELECT
ASSIST
SERVO ON
X-
SHIFT
GO BACK
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
.
Z-
Z+
R-
HIGH
SPEED
R+
B-
FAST
Manual speed keys
B+
T+
T-
Axis keys
7
8
9
TEST
START
SHIFT
4
5.
6
BWD
FWD
1
2
3
DELETE
INSERT
0
.
-
MODIFY ENTER
Enable switch (option)
Enter key
MOTOMAN
Numeric keys / Function keys
Motion
Type key Press to input numbers.
These keys are also used as function keys
to input instructions, etc. Key’s function is
automatically switched when function keys
are available.
1-2
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2.2

Key Description
Character Keys
The keys which have characters printed on them are denoted with [ ]. For example,
ENTER
is
shown as [ENTER].
The Numeric keys have additional functions along with their number values. Dual function
keys are used in the context of the operation being performed. For example:
1
TIM ER
may be
described in the text as [1] or [TIMER].

Symbol Keys
The keys which have a symbol printed on them are not denoted with [ ] but depicted with a
small picture, with the exception of the cursor key, which is not shown with a picture.
Cursor
Emergency Stop button
DIRECT
OPEN
GO BACK
PAGE

Direct Open key
Page key
Axis Keys and Numeric Keys
The keys pictured in the following are referred to as the axis keys and Numeric keys when
described.
ＸＳ+
Ｘ+
Ｓ+
･
Y+
L-
L+
Z-
Z+
Y-
U-
U+
Ｘ-
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
･
-
･
Y+
Y-
B+
B-
Z+
Z-
T+
T-
Numeric Keys
Axis Keys

7
Ｘ+
R+
R-
Keys Pressed Simultaneously
When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown with a “+” sign between
them, such as [SHIFT]+[COORD].
1-3
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2.3
Programming Pendant Keys
E.STOP Button
Turns OFF the servo power.
When the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON LED on the programing pendant will extinguish.
An emergency stop message is displayed on the screen.
Enable Switch
Turns ON the servo power.
When the Enable switch is lightly squeezed while the SERVO ON LED is
blinking and the Mode Switch is set to “TEACH”, the power is turned ON.
And when this switch is released or firmly squeezed while the power is
turned ON, the power turns OFF.
Cursor
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
The size of the cursor and the range/place where the cursor can move will
vary depending on the window.
If the UP cursor button is pressed when the cursor is on the first line, the
cursor will move to the last line of the job. Conversely, if the cursor is on
the last line of the job and the DOWN cursor button is pressed, the cursor
will jump to the first line of the job.
• [SHIFT] + UP
Scrolls the screen upward.
• [SHIFT] + DOWN
Scrolls the screen downward.
• [SHIFT] + RIGHT
Scrolls the screen to the right.
• [SHIFT] + LEFT
Scrolls the screen to the left.
[SELECT]
Selects menu items such as main menu, pull-down menu,
etc.
SELECT
[MAIN MENU]
MAIN
MENU
Displays the main menu.
When pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu disappears.
1-4
1.2 Programming Pendant
Moves the cursor between “Menu Area” and "General Purpose Display Area."
When [SHIFT] is pressed simultaneously:
[AREA]
• [SHIFT] + [AREA]
The language can be switched when the bilingual function is valid. (Bilingual function is optional.)
AREA
• DOWN cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the operation button on the screen if displayed.
• UP cursor button + [AREA]
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area when the cursor is
on the operation button.
Displays the next page.
[PAGE]
GO BACK
PAGE
[SHIFT] + [PAGE]
The previous page is displayed.
The page can be changed when
appears in the status area on the
screen.
Displays the content related to the current line.
[DIRECT OPEN]
DIRECT
OPEN
To display the content of a CALL job or condition file, move the cursor to
the next line and press [DIRECT OPEN]. The file will be displayed for the
selected line. Display content will vary depending on the type of instruction used in the job.
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition will be displayed.
[COORD]
TOOL SEL
COORD
Select the operation coordinate system when the manipulator is operated manually.
Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian, cylindrical, tool and user) can be
used. Each time this key is pressed, the coordinate system is switched in
the following order: "JOINT""WLD/CYL""TOOL""USER"
The selected coordinate system is displayed on the status display area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the "TOOL" or "USER"
coordinate system is selected.
MANUAL SPEED
keys
FAST
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
[HIGH SPEED]
HIGH
SPEED
Sets the speed for manual operation.
This speed is also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast, and inching).
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
order: "INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST"
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes in the following
order: "FST"" MED""SLOW""INCH"
The selected speed is displayed on the status area.
Changes the speed of axis operation when the axis button
is pressed.
The speed of the manipulator will change to high regardless of the programmed speed while this key is pressed.
The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in advance.
1-5
1.2 Programming Pendant
Selects the interpolation type for playback operation.
The selected interpolation type is shown in the status display area on the
screen.
[MOTION TYPE]
MOTION
TYPE
Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation type changes in the following order:
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC""MOVS"
[SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]
The interpolation mode changes in the following order:
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT"*" CONVEYOR"*
Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.
*: These modes are purchased options.
[ROBOT]
Enables the robot axis operation.
ROBOT
[ROBOT] is active for the system where multiple manipulators are controlled by one NX100 or the system with external axes.
[EX.AXIS]
Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis) operation.
EX.AXIS
[EX.AXIS] is active for the system with external axes.
Axis Key
Moves specified axes on manipulator.
The manipulator axes only move while the key is held down.
Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by pressing two or more
keys at the same time.
The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate system at the
selected manual speed. Make sure that the selected coordinate system
and the manual speed are the desired ones before starting the axis operation.
[TEST START]
TEST
START
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a continuous
motion when [TEST START] and [INTERLOCK] are simultaneously pressed.
The manipulator can be moved to check the path of taught steps.
The manipulator operates according to the currently selected operation
cycle: "AUTO," "1CYCLE," or "STEP."
The manipulator operates at the taught speed. However, if the taught
speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the operation proceeds at
the maximum teaching speed.
Operation stops immediately when this key is released.
1-6
1.2 Programming Pendant
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps while this
key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (one instruction at a time, no welding
instructions).
[FWD]
FWD
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]
All instructions are executed.
[REFP] + [FWD]
Moves to the reference point of the cursor line. See “ Moving to Reference Point” in " 3.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations ".
The manipulator operates at the selected manual speed. Make sure that
the selected manual speed is the desired one before starting operation.
[BWD]
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in the
reverse direction while this key is pressed.
Only move instructions are executed (no weld commands).
BWD
[INFORM LIST]
Displays instruction lists of commands available for job editing.
INFORM
LIST
[CANCEL]
Cancels data input and resets errors.
CANCEL
[DELETE]
Deletes registered instructions and data.
Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
DELETE
[INSERT]
Inserts new instructions or data.
Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
INSERT
[MODIFY]
Modifies taught position data, instructions, and data.
Modification completes when [ENTER] is pressed while this key lamp is lit.
MODIFY
[ENTER]
ENTER
Registers instructions, data, current position of the manipulator, etc.
When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or data displayed in the input
buffer line moves to the cursor position to complete a registration, insertion, or modification.
1-7
1.2 Programming Pendant
[SHIFT]
Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.
Can be used with [MAIN MENU], [COORD], [MOTION TYPE], cursor key,
SHIFT
Numeric key, page key
to access alternate functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate [SHIFT] functions.
[INTERLOCK]
Changes the functions of other keys by pressing together.
Can be used with [TEST START], [FWD], Numeric key (Numeric key customize function).
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate [INTERLOCK] functions.
GO BACK
PAGE
INTER
LOCK
Numeric Key
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
･
-
[START]
START
Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt appears
on the input line.
“.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or hyphen.
The Numeric keys are also used as function keys. Refer to the explanation of each function for details.
Starts the manipulator motion in playback operation.
The lamp on this button is lit during the playback operation.
The lamp also lights when the playback operation is started by the system
input START signal.
The lamp turns OFF when the playback operation is stopped by alarm
occurrence, HOLD signal, or mode change.
Holds the manipulator motion.
[HOLD]
HOLD
This button is enabled in any mode.
The lamp on this button is lit only while the button is being pressed.
Although the lamp turns OFF when the button is released, the manipulator
stays stopped until a START command is input.
The HOLD lamp automatically lights in the following cases to indicate that
the system is in HOLD status. The start and axis operations are disabled
while the lamp is lit.
• The HOLD signal of system input is ON.
• The HOLD request is being sent from an external device in remote mode.
• In HOLD status caused by an error occurred in working process such as
wire sticking at arc welding
Selects the Play mode, Teach mode, or Remote mode.
Mode Switch
REMOTE
TEACH
PLAY
PLAY: Play Mode
The playback of taught job is enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
TEACH: Teach Mode
The axis operation and edition from the programming pendant are
enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
REMOTE: Remote Mode
The operation by external signals is enabled.
[START] is invalid during the remote mode.
1-8
1.2 Programming Pendant
Displays the main menu.
[MAIN MENU]
MAIN
MENU
If this button is pressed while the main menu is displayed, the main menu
disappears.
[SHIFT] + [MAIN MENU]
While a window opens, the window is switched in the following order:
Window → Sub-menu → Main menu
Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.
[SERVO ON READY]
SERVO
ON
READY
Press this button to enable the servo power supply to be turned ON if the
servo power supply is shut OFF by the emergency stop or overrun signal.
When this button is pressed:
• In the play mode, the servo power supply is turned ON if the safeguarding is securely closed.
• In the teach mode, the SERVO ON lamp flashes and the servo power
supply is turned ON when the Enable switch is ON.
• The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo power is ON.
Displays the menu to assist the operation for the currently displayed window.
[ASSIST]
!?
ASSIST
Pressing this button with [SHIFT] or [INTERLOCK] displays the help guidance for the operation.
• [SHIFT] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [SHIFT] appears.
• [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with [INTERLOCK] appears.
[BACK SPACE]
Deletes the last character while typing characters.
BACK
SPACE
1-9
1.2 Programming Pendant
1.2.4

Programming Pendant Display
The Five Display Areas
The programming pendant display is a 6.5 inch color display. Alphanumeric characters can
be used.
The general display area, menu area, human interface display area, and main menu area
among the following five areas can be moved by pressing [AREA], or can be selected by
directly touching the screen.
Menu area
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
Main menu area
CF
Status display area
UTILITY
T
POSITION DIAGNOSIS 3
CURR POS (PLS)
CURR POS (XYZ)
SEG. PLUSE
S
0X
0.000 S
0
L
0Y
0.000 L
0
U
0Z
0
R
B
0 Rx
0.000 U
0.00 R
0 Ry
0.00 B
0
IN/OUT
T
7
0.00 T
7
In
8
0 Rz
0
0
0
0
0
SPOT WELDING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
Out
8
0
Main menu area
AXIS 0000_0000 TYPE 0000_0000 TOOL 0
F/B PULSE MOTOR POS RESET
ROBOT
0S
S
01
0
SYSTEM INFO
Human interface
display area
Main Menu
Short CUt
Turn on servo power
Each window displayed during operations is provided with its name on the upper left of the
general display area.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME:TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
0013 MOVL V=880.0
Main Menu
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
1-10
1.2 Programming Pendant

General-purpose Display Area
On the general-purpose display area, various settings and contents such as jobs and characteristics files can be displayed and edited.
The operation buttons are also displayed at the bottom of the window according to the window
contents.
• To move the cursor to the operation button, press [AREA] + DOWN cursor key.
• To move the cursor to the general-purpose display area, press [AREA] + UP cursor key or
press [CANCEL].
• To move the cursor between the operation buttons, use the RIGHT or LEFT cursor key.
• To execute the operation button, move the cursor to the button and press [SELECT].
EXECUTE:
Continues operation with the displayed contents.
CANCEL:
Cancels the displayed contents and returns to the previous window.
COMPLETE:
Completes the setting operation displayed on the general-purpose display
area.
STOP:
Stops operation when loading, saving, or verifying with an external memory device.
RELEASE:
Releases the overrun and shock sensor function.
RESET:
Resets an alarm. (Cannot reset major alarms.)
DIRECT PAGE:
Jumps to the appropriate page if the page can be switched.
• When the page can be switched by specifying the page number, the following input box appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Directly
type the desired page number and press [ENTER].
General-purpose
display area
Operation buttons
JUMP TO:
PAGE
• When the page can be switched by selecting an item, the following selection list appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Select a desired item
using the UP and DOWN cursor key and press [ENTER].
PAGE
1-11
1.2 Programming Pendant

Main Menu Area
Each menu and submenu are displayed in the main menu area. Press [MAIN MENU] or touch
{Main Menu} on the left bottom of the window to display the main menu.
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
SPOT WELDING
PARAMETER
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu

Short Cut
Status Display Area
The Status Display area shows controller status. The displayed information will vary depending on the controller mode (Play/Teach).
T
(9)
Weak
battery
(8)
Page
(7)
Mode
(6)
State
under execution
(5)
Operation
cycle
(4)
Security
mode
(1)
Group operation axis
(2)
Operation coordinate system
(3)
Manual speed
(1)Control Group
Displays the active control group for systems equipped with station axes or several robot
axes.
to
: Robot Axes
to
: Base Axes
to
: Station Axes
(2)Operation Coordinate System
Displays the selected coordinate system. Switched by pressing [COORD].
: Joint Coordinates
: Cartesian Coordinates
: Cylindrical Coordinates
: Tool Coordinates
: User Coordinates
1-12
1.2 Programming Pendant
(3)Manual Speed
Displays the selected speed. For details, refer to “ Select Manual Speed.”
: Inching
: Low Speed
: Medium Speed
: High Speed
(4)Security Mode
: Operation Mode
: Edit Mode
: Management Mode
(5)Operation Cycle
Displays the present operation cycle.
: Step
: Cycle
: Continuous
(6)State Under Execution
Displays the present system status (STOP, HOLD, ESTOP, ALARM, or RUN).
: Stop Status
: Hold Status
: Emergency Stop Status
: Alarm Status
: Operating Status
(7)Mode (NS3.00 or later)
T
: Teach mode
P
: Play mode
(8)Page
: Displayed when the page can be switched.
(9)Weak Battery of Memory
: Displayed when the battery of memory is weak.
1-13
1.2 Programming Pendant

Human Interface Display Area
When two or more errors or messages are displayed,
play area.
appears in the human interface dis-
Turn on servo power
To view the list of current errors or messages, activate the human interface display area and
press [SELECT]. To close the error list, press [CANCEL].
When two or more errors occur,
appears in the message display area. Activate the message display area and press [SELECT] to view the list of current errors.
5/9
Cannot load macro job at current security mode
HELP
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group axis detachment
CLOSE
Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
To close the error list, select "CLOSE" or press [CANCEL].

Menu Area
The menu area is used to edit a job, manage jobs, and execute various utilities.
EDIT
DATA
1.2.5

DISPLAY
UTILITY
Screen Descriptions
Denotation
The menu displayed in the programming pendant is denoted with { }.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
The above menu items are denoted with {DATA}, {EDIT}, {DISPLAY}, AND {UTILITY}.
DATA
EDIT
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
UTILITY
JOB
CF
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY
SELECT JOB
CREATE NEW JOB
Aa
MASTER JOB
Out
ROBOT
JOB CAPACITY
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
The pull-down menu commands are denoted in the same manner.
1-14
1.2 Programming Pendant

Screen
The window can be displayed according to the view desired.
DATA
Main Menu
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
Short Cut
Full Window View
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
Upper Window View
Middle Window View
Main Menu
Short Cut
Lower Window View
1.2.6
Character Input
To input characters, display the software keypad on the programming pendant display.
Move the cursor to the data for which characters are to be input, and press [SELECT] to display the software keypad.
There are three types of software keypads: the alphanumeric keypads each for upper-case
and lower-case characters and the symbol keypad. To switch between the alphanumeric keypads and the symbol keypad, touch the button tab on the screen or press [PAGE]. To switch
the alphanumeric keypads between upper-case and lower-case characters, touch “CapsLock
OFF” or “CapsLock ON.”
1-15
1.2 Programming Pendant

Operation
Keypad
Button on the
Programming
Pendant
Explanation
Moves the cursor (focus).
Cursor
Selects a character.
[SELECT]
[CANCEL]
SELECT
CANCEL
Clears all the characters being typed.
Pressing this second time cancels the software keypad.
Deletes the last one character.
[BACK SPACE]
BACK
SPACE
Enters the input characters.
[ENTER]
ENTER
GO BACK
Button Tab
Switches the keypads displayed on the programming
pendant.
PAGE
Closes the software keypad.
MAIN
MENU
Enters numbers.
0
to
Numeric Keys
9
1-16
1.2 Programming Pendant
Alphanumeric Input

Number input is performed with the Numeric keys or on the following alphanumeric input window. Numbers include 0 to 9, the decimal point (.), and the minus sign/hyphen (-).
Note however, that the decimal point cannot be used in job names.
GO BACK
Press the page key
to display the alphanumeric input window. Move the cursor to the desired
PAGE
letter and press [SELECT] to enter the letter.
For Numbers and Upper-case Characters
JOB
EDIT
For Numbers and Lower-case Characters
UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
[RESULT]
[RESULT]
SYMBOL
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Back
Space
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
CapsLock
OFF
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
Space
2
3
4
q
a
z
5
w
e
r
s
d
f
x
c
v
b
8
9
0
Back
Space
u
i
o
p
Cancel
j
k
l
CapsLock
ON
m
Space
6
7
t
y
g
h
n
Cancel
Enter
Short Cut
Main Menu
SYMBOL
1
Main Menu
Short Cut
Symbol Input

GO BACK
Press the page key
to display the symbol input window.
Move the cursor to the desired symbol and press [SELECT] to enter the symbol.
Note that only some symbols are available for naming jobs.
PAGE
JOB
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
[RESULT]
SYMBOL
KEYBOARD
−
!
%
&
’
(
)
_
+
=
Back
Space
,
.
/
:
;
<
>
?
Cancel
"
$
@
SP
Caps
Lock
Enter
Main Menu
Short Cut
SP: Space
1-17
Enter
1.3 Modes
1.3
Modes
The following three modes are available for NX100.
• Teach Mode
• Play Mode
• Remote Mode
1.3.1
Teach Mode
In the teach mode, the following can be done.
• Preparation and teaching of a job
• Modification of a registered job
• Setting of various characteristic files and parameters
1.3.2
Play Mode
In the play mode, the following can be done.
• Playback of a taught job
• Setting, modification, or deletion of various condition files
1.3.3
Remote Mode
In the remote mode, the operations such as Servo ON Ready, Start, Cycle Change, Call Master Job can be commanded by external input signals.
The operations by external input signals become enabled in the remote mode, while [START]
on the programming pendant becomes disabled.
The data transmission function (optional function) is also available in the remote mode.
The following table shows how each operation is input in each mode.
Note: “PP” indicates the programming pendant.
Teach Mode
Play Mode
Remote Mode
Servo ON Ready
PP
PP
External input signal
Start
Invalid
PP
External input signal
Cycle Change
PP
PP
External input signal
Call Master Job
PP
PP
External input signal
1.3.4
Teach Mode Priority
In the teach mode, following operations are disabled:
1) Playback using [START].
2) Playback from external input signals.
1-18
1.4 About the Security Mode
1.4
About the Security Mode
1.4.1
Types of Security Modes
The following three types of security modes are available for NX100.
Any operations in the edit mode and the management mode require a password. The password must contain between 4 and 8 letters, numbers, or symbols.
• Operation Mode
The operator can monitor the line operation and start and stop the manipulator. Repairs,
etc. can be performed if any abnormalities are detected.
• Edit Mode
Teaching, robot jog operations, and editing of jobs and various condition files can be performed in addition to the operations enabled in the operation mode.
• Management Mode
The operator who performs setup and maintenance for the system can set the machine
control parameter, set the time, change the password, etc. in addition to the operations
enabled in the edit mode.
1-19
1.4 About the Security Mode
Menu & Security Mode
Main Menu
JOB
Sub Menu
DISPLAY
EDIT
JOB
Operation
Edit
SELECT JOB
Operation
Operation
CREATE NEW JOB*1
MASTER JOB
Edit
Edit
Operation
Edit
JOB CAPACITY
Operation
-
Edit
Edit
RES. START(JOB)*1
VARIABLE
IN/OUT
*1
*2
Security Mode
RES. STATUS*2
CYCLE
Operation
-
Operation
Operation
BYTE
Operation
Edit
INTEGER
Operation
Edit
DOUBLE
Operation
Edit
REAL
Operation
Edit
STRING
Operation
Edit
POSITION(ROBOT)
Operation
Edit
POSITION(BASE)
Operation
Edit
POSITION(ST)
Operation
Edit
LOCAL VARIABLE
Operation
-
EXTERNAL INPUT
Operation
-
EXTERNAL OUTPUT
Operation
-
UNIVERSAL INPUT
Operation
-
UNIVERSAL OUTPUT
Operation
Edit
SPECIFIC INPUT
Operation
-
SPECIFIC OUTPUT
Operation
-
RIN
Operation
-
CPRIN
Operation
-
REGISTER
Operation
-
AUXILIARY RELAY
Operation
-
CONTROL INPUT
Operation
-
PSEUDO INPUT SIG
Operation
Management
NETWORK INPUT
Operation
-
NETWORK OUTPUT
Operation
-
ANALOG OUTPUT
Operation
-
SV POWER STATUS
Operation
-
LADDER PROGRAM
Management
Management
I/O ALARM
Management
Management
I/O MESSAGE
Management
Management
Displayed in the teach mode only.
Displayed in the play mode only.
1-20
1.4 About the Security Mode
Menu & Security Mode
Main Menu
ROBOT
Sub Menu
DISPLAY
EDIT
CURRENT POSITION
Operation
-
COMMAND POSITION
Operation
-
SERVO MONITOR
Management
-
WORK HOME POS
Operation
Edit
SECOND HOME POS
Operation
Edit
Management
Management
Operation
-
Edit
Edit
Management
Management
SHOCK SENS LEVEL
Operation
Management
USER COORDINATE
Edit
Edit
HOME POSITION
Management
Management
MANIPULATOR TYPE
Management
-
Edit
Edit
Management
Management
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR*1
Edit
Edit
LIMIT RELEASE*1
Edit
Management
ARM CONTROL*1
SHIFT VALUE
Management
Management
Operation
-
VERSION
Operation
-
MONITORING TIME
Operation
Management
ALARM HISTORY
Operation
Management
I/O MSG HISTORY
Operation
Management
SECURITY
Operation
Operation
LOAD
Edit
-
SAVE
Operation
-
VERIFY
Operation
-
DELETE
Operation
-
DEVICE
Operation
Operation
FOLDER
Edit
Edit
FORMAT*5
Operation
Operation
DROP AMOUNT
POWER ON/OFF POS
TOOL
INTERFERENCE
ROBOT CALIB
ANALOG MONITOR
SYSTEM INFO
FD/CF
*1
*5
Security Mode
Displayed in the teach mode only.
For FC1/FC2 Floppy disk
1-21
1.4 About the Security Mode
Menu & Security Mode
Main Menu
PARAMETER
SETUP
Sub Menu
Security Mode
DISPLAY
EDIT
S1CxG
Management
Management
S2C
Management
Management
S3C
Management
Management
S4C
Management
Management
A1P
Management
Management
A2P
Management
Management
A3P
Management
Management
A4P
Management
Management
RS
Management
Management
S1E
Management
Management
S2E
Management
Management
S3E
Management
Management
S4E
Management
Management
TEACHING COND
Edit
Edit
OPERATE COND
Management
Management
DATE/TIME
Management
Management
GRP COMBINATION
Management
Management
RESERVE JOB NAME
Edit
Edit
USER ID
Edit
Edit
SET SPEED
Management
Management
KEY ALLOCATION*1
RES. START(CNCT)
Management
Management
Management
Management
Management
Management
AUTO BACKUP SET
*3
WRONG DATA LOG*4
ARC START COND.
Operation
Management
Operation
Edit
ARC END COND.
Operation
Edit
ARC AUX COND.
Operation
Edit
POWER SOURCE COND.
Operation
Edit
ARC WELD DIAG.
Operation
Edit
WEAVING
Operation
Edit
ARC MONITOR
Operation
-
HANDLING
HANDLING DIAG.
Operation
Edit
SPOT WELDING
WELD DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
I/O ALLOCATION
Management
Management
GUN CONDITION
Management
Management
SPOT POWER SOURCE COND.
Management
Management
ARC WELDING
*1
*3
*4
Displayed in the teach mode only.
From NS3.20
From NS3.21
1-22
1.4 About the Security Mode
Menu & Security Mode
Main Menu
SPOT WELDING
(MOTOR GUN)
Sub Menu
DISPLAY
EDIT
WELD DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
GUN PRESSURE
Edit
Edit
PRESSURE
Edit
Edit
I/O ALLOCATION
Management
Management
GUN CONDITION
Management
Management
Operation
Edit
Management
Management
WEAVING
Operation
Edit
GENERAL DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE
Operation
Operation
CLEARANCE SETTING
SPOT POWER SOURCE COND.
GENERAL
ALL COMMON
APPLICATION
Security Mode
1-23
1.4 About the Security Mode
1.4.2
Switching Security Modes
Operation
1
Select {SYSTEM INFO}
under the main menu.
Explanation
The sub menu appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
ARC WELDING
PARAMETER
VERSION
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
MONITORING TIME
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ALARM HISTORY
ROBOT
I/O MESSAGE HISTORY
SYSTEM INFO
SECURITY
Main Menu
2
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
Select {SECURITY}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
UTILITY
SECURITY MODE
CF
ARC WELDING
PARAMETER
SECURITY MODE
EDIT MODE
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
Turn on servo power
Short Cut
The security mode can be selected from operation mode, edit
mode, or management mode.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
UTILITY
SECURITY MODE
CF
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
SECURITY MODE
OPERATION MODE
EDIT MODE
MANAGEMENT MODE
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
Security Mode Selection Dialog Box
3
Select the desired security
mode.
When the selected security mode is higher than the currently set
mode, the user ID input status window appears.
1-24
1.4 About the Security Mode
Operation
4
Input user ID as required.
Explanation
At the factory, the user ID number is preset as follows:
• Edit Mode: [00000000]
• Management Mode: [99999999]
5
Press [ENTER].
The selected security mode’s input ID is checked. If the correct
user ID is input, the security mode is changed.
1-25
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems
and Operations
2.1
Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
2.1.1
Control Group
For the NX100, a group of axes to be controlled at a time is called “Control Group”, and the
group is classified into three units: “ROBOT” as a manipulator itself, “BASE” that moves the
manipulator in parallel, and “STATION” as jigs or tools other than “ROBOT” and “BASE”.
BASE and STATION are also called external axes.
Robot
This is the axis for the
manipulator itself.
Station
This is any axis other than the robot and base. It indicates the
tilt or rotating axis of the fixture.
Base
This is the axis that moves the entire manipulator.
It corresponds to the servo track.
It controls the path of traveling manipulators.
2-1
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
2.1.2
Types of Coordinate Systems
The following coordinate systems can be used to operate the manipulator:
• Joint Coordinates
Each axis of the manipulator moves independently.
• Cartesian Coordinates
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to any of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
• Cylindrical Coordinates
The θ axis moves around the S-axis. The R-axis moves parallel to the L-axis arm. For
vertical motion, the tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to the Z-axis.
• Tool Coordinates
The effective direction of the tool mounted in the wrist flange of the manipulator is defined
as the Z-axis. This axis controls the coordinates of the end point of the tool.
• User Coordinates
The XYZ-cartesian coordinates are defined at any point and angle.
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to the axes of them.
Z-axis
Z-axis
r-axis
Y- a x i s
θ-axis
r-axis
X-axis
Cartesian Coordinates
Cylindrical Coordinates
Z- a x i s
X- a x i s
Y-axis
X-axis
Y- a x i s
Z- a x i s
Tool Coordinates
User Coordinates
2-2
2.2 General Operations
2.2

General Operations
Check Safety
Before any operation of NX100, read Section 1 “Safety” of “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS” again
and keep safe around robot system or peripherals.

Select Teach Mode
Set the mode switch on the programming pendant to “teach”.

Select Control Group
If NX100 has several Control Groups or Coordinate Control Systems (optional function),
select control group first.
If two or more ROBOT, BASE, STATION are registered, switch control group by pressing
[SHIFT] + [ROBOT] or [SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS].
After selecting a job, a control group registered in the selected job is enabled. A control group
registered in the edit job can be switched by pressing [ROBOT] or [EX. AXIS].
Check selected control group at status display area on the programming pendant.

Select Coordinate System
Select coordinate system by pressing [COORD] button.
It switches; JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser in every pressing. Check the
selected coordinate on the status display area on the programming pendant.

Select Manual Speed
Select manual speed of operation by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW]. The selected speed is
effective not only for axis operation but [FWD] or [BWD] operation.
NOTE In operating the manipulator manually by the programming pendant, the maximum speed
of center point is limited at 250 mm/s.
• Every press of [FAST] switches; “INCH”“SLOW”“MED”“FAST”.
FAST
INCH
SLW
MED
FST
MANUAL SPEED
• Every press of [SLOW] switches; “FAST”“MED”“SLOW”“INCH”.
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
FST
MED
SLW
INCH
Check selected manual speed on the status area of Programming Pendant.
2-3
2.2 General Operations

Servo ON
Press [SERVO ON READY], then SERVO ON LED starts blinking.
Squeeze the Enable switch, then SERVO ON LED starts lighting.

Axis Operation
Make sure of safety around the manipulator. Press axis key, then axis moves according to the
selected control group, coordinates, and manual speed. See " 2.3 Coordinate Systems and
Axis Operation " for details.

HIGH SPEED
Pressing of [HIGH SPEED] with axis keys pressed allows the manipulator to move faster than
usual speed.
SUPPLE
-MENT
The [HIGH SPEED] key is disabled when “INCH” is selected for manual speed.
2-4
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.1
Joint Coordinates
When operating in joint coordinates mode, the S, L, U, R, B, and T-axes of the manipulator
move independently. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Axis Motion in Joint Coordinates
Axis Name
Major
Axes
Axis Operation Key
S-axis
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
L-axis
L-
U-axis
U-
Wrist
Axes
Motion
Main unit rotates right and left.
S+
Lower arm moves forward and backward.
L+
Upper arm moves up and down.
U+
R-axis
Wrist rolls right and left.
R-
R+
B-axis
Wrist moves up and down.
B-
B+
T-axis
Wrist turns right and left.
T-
SUPPLE
-MENT
T+
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform a
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [S-] + [S+]), none of the axes operate.
• When using a manipulator of 7 axes or 8 axes, the C-axis (7th axis) is moved by pressing
[SHIFT] + [S-] or [SHIFT] + [S+]; the W-axis (8th axis) by pressing [SHIFT] + [L-] or
[SHIFT] + [L+].
U-axis
Z+
R-axis
U+
X+
R+
B-axis
Y+
B+
T-axis
L-axis
ZU-
Z+
X-
T+
Y-
R-
B-
Y-
Z-
L-
T-
Y+
L+
S-axis
X-
X+
S-
S+
2-5
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.2
Cartesian Coordinates
In the cartesian coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-axes. The
motion of each axis is described in the following table:
Axis Motion in Cartesian Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Operation Key
X-axis
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
Y-axis
SUPPLE
-MENT
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L+
U-
Wrist Axes
Moves parallel to X-axis.
S+
L-
Z-axis
Motion
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See " 2.3.7 Control Point Operation " and "
2.3.8 Control Point Change. "
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [X-] + [X+]), none of the axes operate.
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Z+
XS-
U+
X+
S+
Y+
L+
Z-
X-axis
U-
YL-
Moves parallel to X- or Y-axis
Moves parallel to Z-axis
2-6
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.3
Cylindrical Coordinates
In the cylindrical coordinates, the manipulator moves as follows. The motion of each axis is
described in the following table.
Axis Motion in Cylindrical Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
θ-axis
Axis Operation Key
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
r-axis
SUPPLE
-MENT
Moves perpendicular to Z-axis.
L+
U-
Wrist Axes
Main unit rolls around S-axis.
S+
L-
Z-axis
Motion
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See " 2.3.7 Control Point Operation "
and " 2.3.8 Control Point Change ".
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [Z-] + [Z+]), none of the axes operate.
Z-axis
r-axis
θ-axis
r-axis
r-axis
X+
S+
Y+
L+
YL-
r-axis
Y-
X-
L-
S-
Rolls around θ-axis
Y+
L+
Moves perpendicular to r-axis
2-7
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.4
Tool Coordinates
In the tool coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, which are
defined at the tip of the tool. The motion of each axis is shown in the following table:
Axis Motion in Tool Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
X- axis
Axis Operation Key
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
Y- axis
L-
Z- axis
U-
Wrist Axes
SUPPLE
-MENT
Motion
Moves parallel to X-axis.
S+
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L+
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See " 2.3.7 Control Point Operation " and " 2.3.8 Control Point Change ".
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [X-] + [X+]), none of the axes operate.
X-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
Y- a x i s
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
Z-axis
X-axis
The tool coordinates are defined at the tip of the tool, assuming that the effective direction of
the tool mounted on the manipulator wrist flange is the Z-axis. Therefore, the tool coordinates
axis direction moves with the wrist.
In tool coordinates motion, the manipulator can be moved using the effective tool direction as
a reference regardless of the manipulator position or orientation. These motions are best
suited when the manipulator is required to move parallel while maintaining the tool orientation
with the workpieces.
2-8
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
ZU-
Z+
U+
X+
S+
XS-
For tool coordinates, the tool file should be registered in advance. For further details, refer
to “8.3 Tool Data Setting” ofcoordinates “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A211).
SUPPLE
-MENT
Selecting the Tool

Tool numbers are used to specify a tool when more than one tool is used on the system.
You may select from registered tool files when you switch tools on the manipulator.
SUPPLE
-MENT
1
Operation
Explanation
Press the [COORD] key
and select the tool coordi-
Every pressing of the [COORD] key changes coordinate system;
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser. Check the change
on the status display area.
nates
2
This operation can be performed only when numbers of the tool is more than one.
To use several tool files with one manipulator, set the following parameter.
S2C333: Tool number switch specifying parameter
1: Can be switched
0: Cannot be switched
.
Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
The TOOL NO. SELECT window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
TOOL NO. SELECT
0 : TORCH MT-3501
1 : TORCH MT-3502
2 : TOOL 02
3 : TOOL 03
4 :
5 :
6 :
7 :
8 :
9 :
10 :
11 :
Main Menu
Short Cut
3
Move the cursor to the tool
to use.
The TOOL NO. SELECT window above shows an example;
“TOOL NO. 0 TORCH MT-3501” is selected.
4
Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
The window goes back to the previous window.
2-9
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.5
User Coordinates
In the user coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to each axis of the coordinates which
are set by the user. Up to 24 coordinate types can be registered. Each coordinate has a user
number and is called a user coordinate file. The motion of each axis is described in the following table:
The figure and the table below describe the motion of each axis when the axis key is pressed.
Axis Motion in User Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
X- axis
Axis Key
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
Y- axis
L-
Z- axis
U-
Wrist Axes
SUPPLE
-MENT
Motion
Moves parallel to X-axis.
S+
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L+
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See " 2.3.7 Control Point Operation " and " 2.3.8 Control Point Change ".
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [X-] + [X+]), none of the axes operate.
2-10
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Y-axis
X-
X+
S-
S+
Y+
L+
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-
Z-axis
L-
Y-axis
Moves parallel to X or Y-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Z+
U+
X-axis
ZU-
Y-axis
Y-axis
Station
Moves parallel to Z-axis
2-11
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation

Selecting User Coordinates
Follow these procedures to select the desired coordinate system from among the registered
user coordinates.
1
Operation
Explanation
Press [COORD] to select the
Every pressing of the [COORD] key changes coordinate system;
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser. Check the change
on the status display area.
user coordinates
2
.
Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
The USER COORD SELECT window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
USER COORD SELECT
NO.
NAME
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu
SUPPLE
-MENT
3
Short Cut
For more information on registration of the user
coordinates, refer to “8.8 User Coordinate Setting”
of “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A211).
Select the desired user number.
2-12
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation

Examples of User Coordinate Utilization
The user coordinate settings allow easy teaching in various situations. For exapmle:
• When multiple positioners are used,
manual operation can be simplified by setting the user coordinates for each fixture.
User coordinates
Fixture
Fixture
Fixture
User coordinates
• When performing arranging or stacking operations,
the incremental value for shift can be easily programmed by setting user coordinates on a
pallet.
• When performing conveyor tracking operations,
the moving direction of the conveyor is specified.
Conveyor
2.3.6
External Axis
External axis is enabled to operate in selecting “BASE” or “STATION” for control group.
Axis Name
BASE or
STATION
1st axis
Axis Operation
Key
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
2nd axis
L-
3rd axis
U-
2-13
Motion
The 1st axis moves.
S+
The 2nd axis moves.
L+
U+
The 3rd axis moves.
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.7
Control Point Operation
Motion about TCP (Tool Center Point) can only change the wrist orientaion at a fixed TCP
position in all coordinate systems except the joint coordinates. The motion of each axis is
described in the following table.
Axis Motion in Motion about TCP
Axis
Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Key
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
L-
U-
Wrist
Axes
R-
B-
T-
SUPPLE
-MENT
S+
Motion
TCP moves. These movements differ
depending on cartesian, cylindrical,
tool and user coordinates.
L+
U+
R+
Wrist axes move with the TCP fixed.
These movements differ depending
on cartesian, cylindrical, tool and user
coordinates.
B+
T+
When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time, the manipulator will perform
compound movement. However, if two different directional keys for the same axis are
pressed at the same time (such as [X-] + [X+]), none of the axes operate.
TCP
Torch Welding
Gun Spot Welding
2-14
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Turning of each wrist axis differs in each coordinate system.
• In cartesian or cylindrical coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on the X-, Y-, or Zaxis.
Z-axis
−
+
Y- a x i s
−
+
−
X-axis
+
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
• In tool coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the tool coordinates.
X-axis
+
−
−
−
+
Z-axis
+
Y- a x i s
• In user coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the user coordinates.
Z-axis
+
−
Y- a x i s
−
−
+
X-axis
+
Z-axis
Y- a x i s
X-axis
2-15
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.8
Control Point Change
The tool tip position (TCP) is the target point of axis operations and is set as the distance from
the flange face. The control point change operation is an axis operation that involves selecting the tool from a list of registered tools (Refer to “ Selecting the Tool” in " 2.3.4 Tool Coordinates "), and then manipulating the axes while changing the TCP. This can be performed
with all coordinates except the joint coordinates. The axis operation is the same as that of the
motion about TCP.
<Example 1>TCP Change Operation with Multiple Tools
The TCPs for Tool 1 and Tool 2 are taken as P1 and P2, respectively. When Tool 1 is
selected to perform axis operation, P1 (Tool 1’s TCP) is the target point of the operation. Tool
2 follows Tool 1 and is not controlled by axis operation. On the other hand, Tool 2 is selected
to perform axis operation, P2 (Tool 2’s TCP) is the target point of axis operation. In this case,
Tool 1 follows Tool 2.
Tool 2
Tool 1
P1
P1
P2
P2
Workpiece
Workpiece
Selection of Tool 1 and axis operations with controlling P1
Selection of Tool 2 and axis operations with controlling P2
<Example 2>TCP Change Operation with a Single Tool
The two corners of the workpiece that the tool is holding are taken as TCPs P1 and P2
respectively. By selecting two TCPs alternately, the workpieces can be moved as shown
below:
Workpiece
Workpiece
P1
P1
P2
P2
Motion about TCP with P1 selected
SUPPLE
-MENT
Motion about TCP with P2 selected
For registration of the tool file, refer to “8.3 Tool Data Setting” of “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS”
(RE-CTO-A211).
2-16
3.1 Preparation for Teaching
3 Teaching
3.1
Preparation for Teaching
To ensure safety, the following operations should always be performed before teaching:
• Check the emergency stop buttons to be sure they function properly.
• Set the mode switch to “TEACH”.
Then,
• Register a job.
3.1.1
Checking Emergency Stop Buttons
The Servo ON button on the programming pendant should be lit while the power is ON for the
servo system. Perform the following operation to ensure that the emergency stop buttons on
both the NX100 and the programming pendant are functioning correctly before operating the
manipulator.
Operation
Explanation
1
Press E. STOP button.
Press the emergency stop button on the NX100 or the programming pendant.
2
Confirm the servo power is
turned OFF.
The SERVO ON button on the programming pendant lights while
servo supply is turned ON. When the emergency stop button is
pressed and the servo power is turned OFF, the SERVO ON lamp
will turn OFF.
3
Press [SERVO ON READY].
After confirming correct operation, press [SERVO ON READY].
The servo power will be ready to turn ON. The servo power can
be turned ON with the Enable switch while the SERVO ON button
lamp blinks.
3.1.2
Setting the Teach Lock
For safety purposes, always set the mode switch to “TEACH” before beginning to teach.
While the teach lock is set, the mode of operation is tied to the teach mode and the machines
cannot be played back using either [START] or external input.
3-1
3.1 Preparation for Teaching
3.1.3
Registering a Job
Specify the name, comments (as required), and control group to register a job.

Registering Job Names
Job names can use up to 8 alphanumeric and symbol characters. These different types of
characters can coexist within the same job name.
The following rules apply to the designation of names for reserved jobs:
A maximum of six characters can be used for a reserved job name.
When a reserved job name is used, additional characters are added by the system.
<Example>
001
JOB - 1
WORK - A
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
The sub-menu appears.
EDIT
JOB
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
CF
SETUP
ARC WELDING
SELECT JOB
CREATE
NEW JOB
DISPLAY
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
Aa
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY
Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
CYCLE
SYSTEM INFO
Short Cut
Main Menu
2
Select {CREATE NEW JOB}.
The NEW JOB CREATE window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
NEW JOB CREATE
JOB NAME
COMMENT
GROUP SET
EXECUTE
Main Menu
3
Input job name.
4
Press [ENTER].
R1
CANCEL
Short Cut
Move the cursor to JOB NAME, and press [SELECT]. Input job
names using the character input operation. For information on
character input operation, refer to "1.2.6 Character Input."
3-2
3.1 Preparation for Teaching

Registering Comments
Register a comment using up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters as required.
Operation
1
In the NEW JOB CREATE window, move the cursor to the
comment and press
[SELECT].
2
Enter the comment.
3
Press [ENTER].

Explanation
For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.6 Character Input."
Registering Control Groups
Select the control group that has been registered in advance. If external axes (BASE or STATION) or multiple robot systems are not used, the registration of control groups is not
required.

Switching to the Teaching Window
After the name, comments (can be omitted), and the control groups have been registered,
switch the window to the teaching window as follows:
Operation
1
Explanation
In the NEW JOB CREATE win- Job name, comments, and control groups are all registered.
dow, press [ENTER] or select Then, the JOB CONTENT window appears. NOP and END
“EXECUTE.”
instructions are automatically registered.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST 01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 END
Main Menu
3-3
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0000
TOOL : 00
Turn on servo power
3.2 Teaching Operation
3.2
Teaching Operation
3.2.1
The Teaching Window
Teaching is conducted in the JOB CONTENT window. The JOB CONTENT window contains
the following items:
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
(2) Cursor
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
DOUT OT#(41) ON
MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
DOUT OT#(44) ON
TIMER T=3.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
(3) Instruction, additional items,
comments, etc.
(1) Line numbers
(1)Line Numbers
The number of the job line is automatically displayed. Line numbers are automatically
regenerated if lines are inserted or deleted.
(2)Cursor
The cursor for manipulator control. For the FWD, BWD, and test operation, the manipulator
motion starts from the line this cursor points.
(3)Instructions, Additional Items, Comments, Etc.
MOVJ
VJ = 50.00
Tag Numerical Data
Instruction
Additional Item
Instructions:
These are instructions needed to process or perform an
operation. In the case of MOVE instructions, the instruction corresponding to the interpolation type is automatically displayed at the time position is taught.
Additional items:
Speed and time are set depending on the type of
instruction. Numerical or character data is added when
needed to the tags which set conditions.
3-4
3.2 Teaching Operation
3.2.2
Interpolation Type and Play Speed
Interpolation type determines the path along which the manipulator moves between playback
steps. Play speed is the rate at which the manipulator moves.
Normally the three elements of position data, Interpolation type, and play speed are registered
for the robot axes steps at one time. If the interpolation type or play speed settings are omitted
during teaching, the data used from the previously taught step is automatically used.

Joint Interpolation
The joint interpolation is used when the manipulator does not need to move in a specific path
toward the next step position. When the joint interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis,
the move instruction is MOVJ. For safety purposes, use the joint interpolation to teach the
first step.
When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the move instruction on the input buffer line changes.
Play Speed Setting Window
• Speeds are indicated as percentages of the maximum rate.
• Setting “0:Speed Omit” sets the same speed as the previous determination.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the play
speed.
2
Set the play speed by pressing The joint speed value increases or decreases.
[SHIFT] + the cursor key.
MOVJ VJ= 0.78
Fast 100.00
50.00
25.00
12.50
6.25
3.12
1.56
Slow
0.78 (%)
3-5
3.2 Teaching Operation

Linear Interpolation
The manipulator moves in a linear path from one taught step to the next. When the linear
interpolation is used to teach a robot axis, the move instruction is MOVL. Linear interpolation
is used for work such as welding. The manipulator moves automatically changing the wrist
position as shown in the figure below.
Play Speed Setting Window (same for circular and spline interpolation)
There are two types of displays, and they can be switched depending on the application.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the play
speed.
2
Set the play speed by pressing The play speed value increases or decreases.
[SHIFT] + the cursor key.
MOVL V= 660
Fast 1500.0
750.0
375.0
187.0
93.0
46.0
23.0
Slow
11 (mm/s)
3-6
Fast 9000
4500
2250
1122
558
276
138
Slow
66 (cm/min)
3.2 Teaching Operation

Circular Interpolation
The manipulator moves in an arc that passes through three points. When circular interpolation
is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction is MOVC.
Single Circular Arc
When a single circular movement is required, teach the circular interpolation for three points,
P1 to P3, as shown in the following figure. If joint or linear interpolation is taught at P0, the
point before starting the circular operation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight
line.
Interpolation Type for Single Circular Arc
P2
Automatically becomes
a straight line.
P0
P1
P3
P4
Interpolation Type
Instruction
P0
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Circular
MOVC
P4
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
Continuous Circular Arcs
When continuous circular movement is required, the two arcs must be separated from each
other by a joint or linear interpolation step. This step must be inserted between two steps at an
identical point. The step at the end point of the preceding circular move must coincide with the
beginning point of the following circular move.
Interpolation Type for Continuous Circular Arc
Joint or linear
motion type
P2
P0
P1
P7
P3
P4
P5
P8
Point
Interpolation Type
Instruction
P0
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Circular
MOVC
P4
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P5
P6
P7
Circular
MOVC
P8
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P6
3-7
3.2 Teaching Operation
Play Speed
The play speed set display is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
The speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2. The speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to
P3.
If a circular operation is taught at high speed, the actual arc path has a shorter radius than that
taught.

Spline Interpolation
When performing operations such as welding, cutting, and applying primer, using the spline
interpolation makes teaching for workpieces with irregular shapes easier. The path of motion
is a parabola passing through three points. When spline interpolation is used for teaching a
robot axis, the move instruction is MOVS.
Single Spline Curve
When a single spline curve movement is required, teach the spline interpolation for three
points, P1 to P3, as shown in the figure below. If joint or linear interpolation is taught at point
P0, the point before starting the spline interpolation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a
straight line.
Interpolation Type for a Single Spline Curve
P2
Point
Interpolation Type
Instruction
P0
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Spline
MOVS
P4
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
Automatically becomes
a straight line.
P0
P1
P3
P4
Continuous Spline Curves
The manipulator moves through a path created by combining parabolic curves. This differs
from the circular interpolation in that steps with identical points are not required at the junction
between two spline curves.
Interpolation Type for Continuous Spline Curves
P2
Identical-point
step not required
P5
P0
P1
P6
P3
Point
Interpolation Type
Instruction
P0
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
to
P5
Spline
MOVS
P6
Joint or Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P4
When the parabolas overlap, a composite motion path is created.
Start path
End path
3-8
3.2 Teaching Operation
Play Speed
The play speed setting window is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
As with the circular interpolation, the speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2, and the
speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
Teach points so that the distances between the three points are roughly equal. If there is
NOTE any significant difference, an error will occur on playback and the manipulator may operate
in an unexpected, dangerous manner. Ensure that the ratio of distances between steps
m:n is within the range of 0.25 to 0.75.
P2
P1
3.2.3

n
m
P3
Teaching Steps
Registering Move Instructions
Whenever one step is taught, one move instruction is registered. There are two ways to teach
a step. Steps can be taught in sequence as shown in the following left figure "Registering
Move Instructions" or they can be done by inserting steps between already registered steps,
as shown in the right figure "Inserting Move Instructions." This paragraph explains the teaching of "Registering Move Instructions," the operations involved in registering new steps.
Step Insertion
P1
Step 2
Step 1
Step 3
Step 1
Registering Move Instructions
Step 2
Step 3
Inserting Move Instructions
Teaching of "Inserting Move Instructions" is called “Inserting move instruction,” to distinguish it
from the method shown in "Registering Move Instructions." For more details on this operation,
see "3.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions." The basic operations for registration and insertion
are the same. The only difference is pressing [INSERT] in the case of insertion. For registration ("Registering Move Instructions"), the instruction is always registered before the END
instruction. Therefore, it is not necessary to press [INSERT]. For insertion
("Inserting Move Instructions"), [INSERT] must be pressed.
3-9
3.2 Teaching Operation
Setting the Position Data
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
The sub-menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
CF
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
B001
SETUP
SELECT JOB
CREATE
NEW JOB
DISPLAY
SETUP
Aa
MASTER JOB
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY
FD/CF
Out
JOB CAPACITY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu
2
Select {JOB}.
Short Cut
The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
NOP
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
ARCON ASF#(1)
MOVL V=66
END
3
Move the cursor on the line
immediately before the position where a move instruction
to be registered.
4
Grip the Enable switch.
5
Use the axis operation key to move the manipulator to the desired
Move the manipulator to the
desired position using the axis position.
key.
Grip the Enable switch to turn the servo power ON.
3-10
3.2 Teaching Operation
Selecting the Tool Number
Operation
1
Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
Explanation
When selecting the “JOINT,” “XYZ/CYLINDRICAL,” or “TOOL”
coordinates, press [SHIFT] + [COORD] and the TOOL NO.
SELECT window will be shown.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
TOOL NO. SELECT
NO.
NAME
TORCH MT-3501
00
TORCH MTY-3501
01
TORCH MT-3502
02
03
04
05
06
07
Main Menu
2
Select desired tool number.
The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
3
Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
SUPPLE
-MENT
Short Cut
NOP
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
ARCON ASF#(1)
MOVL V=66
END
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Using Multiple Tools with One Manipulator
When multiple tools are to be used with one manipulator, set parameter S2C333 to 1.
See " 2.3.4 Tool Coordinates " for details on this operation.
Setting the Interpolation Type
Operation
1
Press [MOTION TYPE].
2
Select the desired interpolation type.
Explanation
When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, MOVJ  MOVL  MOVC 
MOVS are displayed in order in the input buffer line.
3-11
3.2 Teaching Operation
Setting the Play Speed
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the instruction.
2
Press [SELECT].
Explanation
0001 MOVJ=50.00
The cursor moves to the input buffer line.
MOVJ VJ=50.00
3
Move the cursor to the play
speed to be set.
4
Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key The joint speed moves up and down.
[↑] or [↓] simultaneously.
MOVJ VJ=50.00
5
Press [ENTER].
The MOV instruction is registered.
Move instruction
is registered.
0000
0001
0002
NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
Follow the above instructions when conducting teaching. (Tool number, interpolation type, or
play speed does not need to be set if it is same as the previous step.)
SUPPLE
-MENT
• The position level can be set at the same time that the move instruction is registered.
• To make the setting so that the play speed tag is not displayed as a default, select {EDIT}
from the menu and then select “ENABLE PLAY SPEED TAG” to delete “∗.”
Setting Position Level
The position level is the degree of approximation of the manipulator to a taught position.
The position level can be added to move instructions MOVJ (joint interpolation) and MOVL
(linear interpolation). If the position level is not set, the precision depends on the operation
speed. Setting an appropriate level moves the manipulator in a path suitable to circumferential conditions and the workpiece. The relationship between path and accuracy for position
levels is as shown below.
SUPPLE
-MENT
To display the position level tag as a default, select {EDIT} from the menu and then select
“ENABLE POS LEVEL TAG.”
Position level 0
P2
P3
Positioning level 1
Positioning level 2
Positioning level 3
Positioning level 4
Positioning level 5
P1
3-12
Position Levels
Accuracy
0
Teaching position
1
to
10
Fine
|
Rough
3.2 Teaching Operation
Operation
1
Select move instruction.
Explanation
The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
JOINT SPEED
POS LEVEL
NWAIT
VJ= 50.00
UNUSED
UNUSED
Short Cut
Main Menu
2
Select the position level
“UNUSED.”
The selection dialog box appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
3
Select “PL.”
JOINT SPEED
POS LEVEL
NWAIT
VJ=
PL 50.00
PL=
1
UNUSED
UNUSED
Main Menu
Short Cut
The position level is displayed. The position initial value is 1.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
MOVJ
JOINT SPEED
POS LEVEL
NWAIT
VJ= 50.00
PL= 1
UNUSED
Main Menu
Short Cut
3-13
UTILITY
3.2 Teaching Operation
Operation
4
Explanation
Press [ENTER].
To change the position level, select the level in the input buffer
line, type the value using the Numeric keys, and press [ENTER].
The position level’s move instruction is registered.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
0002 END
Move instruction
is registered.
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu
5
Short Cut
Press [ENTER].
To perform the movement steps shown below, set as follows:
P1
P2 P4
P5
P3
P6
Steps P2, P4, and P5 are simple passing points, and do not require accurate positioning.
Adding PL=1 to 8 to the move instructions of these steps moves the manipulator around the
inner corners, thereby reducing the cycle time.
If complete positioning is necessary as P3 or P6, add PL=0.
<EXAMPLE>
Passing points P2, P4, and P5:
MOVL V=138 PL=3
Positioning point P3 and P6:
MOVL V=138 PL=0
3-14
3.2 Teaching Operation

Registering Reference Point Instructions
Reference point instructions (REFP) set an auxiliary point such as a wall point for weaving.
Reference point Nos. 1 to 8 are assigned for each application. Follow these procedures to
register reference point instructions.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Move the cursor.
Explanation
Move the cursor to the line immediately before the position where
the reference point to be registered.
0003
0004
0005
Place immediately
before where
reference point is
to be registered.
MOVL V=558
CALL JOB: TEST
MOVL V=138
4
Grip the Enable switch.
The servo power is turned ON.
5
Press the axis operation key.
Move the manipulator to the position to be registered as the reference point.
6
Press [REFP] or select
“REFP” from the inform list.
The reference point instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
7
REFP 1
Change the reference point
number in one of the following
ways.
1: Move the cursor to the reference point number, and
press [SHIFT] + the cursor
key to change the reference
point number; or
2: Press [SELECT] when the
cursor is on the reference
point number. Then, the
data input buffer line
appears. Input the number
and press [ENTER].
REFP 2
Ref-point No.=
REFP
8
Press [INSERT].
The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT]
is not needed.
9
Press [ENTER].
The REFP instruction is registered.
Reference point
is registered.
SUPPLE
-MENT
0003
0004
0005
0006
MOVL V=558
CALL JOB: TEST
REFP 1
MOVL V=138
The programming pendant does not have the [REFP] key for the application of spot welding, general purposes (= material handling, assembling, cutting) or motor gun.
3-15
3.2 Teaching Operation

Registering Timer Instructions
The timer instruction stops the manipulator for a specified time. Follow these procedures to
register timer instructions.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Move the cursor.
Explanation
Move the cursor to one line before the position where the timer
instruction is to be registered.
One line before
where timer
instruction is
to be registered.
4
Press [TIMER].
0003
0004
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
The TIMER instruction is displayed on the input buffer line.
TIMER T=1.00
5
Change the timer value.
Move the cursor to the timer value and change it by pressing
[SHIFT] + the cursor key. The timer unit of adjustment is 0.01 seconds.
TIMER T=2.00
If you use the Numeric keys to input the timer value, press
[SELECT] when the cursor is on the timer value. The data input
line appears. Input the value and press [ENTER].
Time =
TIMER T=
6
Press [INSERT].
The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT]
is not needed.
7
Press [ENTER].
The TIMER instruction is registered.
Timer instruction
is registered.
0003
0004
0005
3-16
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=2.00
MOVL V=138
3.2 Teaching Operation
Changing Timer Value
Operation
1
Press [TIMER].
2
Press [SELECT].
Explanation
The DETAIL EDIT window for the TIMER instruction appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
TIMER
TIME
T= 1.00
Main Menu
3
Input the timer value on the
instruction DETAIL EDIT window.
Short Cut
When
is selected, the items available to be changed are displayed in the dialog box. Select the particular item to be changed.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
TIMER
TIME
T= 1.00
CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
Short Cut
Main Menu
When a number is to be changed, move the cursor to the number
and press [SELECT]. Input the desired value using the Numeric
keys, and press [ENTER].
I=
TIMER T=
4
Press [ENTER].
The DETAIL EDIT window is closed and the JOB CONTENT window appears again. Modified content is displayed in the input buffer line.
TIMER T=I003
5
Press [INSERT].
The [INSERT] key lamp lights. When registering before the END
instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not needed.
6
Press [ENTER].
The TIMER instruction is registered.
Timer instruction
is registered.
3-17
0003
0004
0005
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=I003
MOVL V=138
3.2 Teaching Operation
3.2.4
SUPPLE
-MENT
Overlapping the First and Last Steps
Why is overlapping the first and last step necessary?
Assume that the job shown below is to be repeated. The manipulator moves from the last
step (Step 6) to the first step (Step 1). If Step 6 and Step 1 are the same position, the
manipulator moves directly Step 5 to Step 1, thereby improving work efficiency.
Step 6
Step 6 after
change
Step 5
Step 1
The position of step 6 is changed
to overlap with step 1.
Step 2
Step 4
Step 3
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the first
step line.
2
Press [FWD].
The manipulator moves to the first step position.
3
Move the cursor to the last
step line.
The cursor starts blinking. When the cursor line position and the
manipulator position are different in the JOB CONTENT window,
the cursor blinks.
4
Press [MODIFY].
The key lamp lights.
5
Press [ENTER].
The position data for the first step is registered on the line of the
last step. At this time, only the position data can be changed in
the last step. Interpolation type and play speed do not change.
3-18
3.3 Checking Steps
3.3
Checking Steps
3.3.1
FWD/BWD Key Operations
Check whether the position of the taught steps is appropriate using [FWD] or [BWD] on the
programming pendant. Each time [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves by a
single step.
[FWD]:
Moves the manipulator ahead in step number sequence. Only the
move instruction is executed when [FWD] is pressed, but when
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD] are pressed, all instructions are executed.
[BWD]:
Moves the manipulator backward a step at a time in reverse step
number sequence. Only the move instruction is executed.
NOTE
For safety, set manual speed at
or below.
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the step to
be checked.
2
Press [FWD] or [BWD].

Explanation
The manipulator reaches the following / previous step and stops.
Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations
FWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in step number sequence. Only move instructions are executed
when [FWD] is pressed. To execute all instructions, press [INTERLOCK] + [FWD].
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move after the END instruction is reached, even if [FWD] is pressed. However, at the end of a called job, the manipulator moves the instruction next to the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
(RET instruction)
(END instruction)
Manipulator stops.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
(CALL instruction)
3-19
Step 6
Step 7
(END instruction)
3.3 Checking Steps
BWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in reverse step number sequence. Only move instructions are
executed.
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move after the first step is
reached, even if [BWD] is pressed. However, at the beginning of a called job, the manipulator moves to the instruction immediately before the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Manipulator stops.
Step 1
Step 3
Step 2
(CALL instruction)
Circular Movements with FWD/BWD Key Operations
• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of the circular interpolation.
• There must be three circular interpolation steps in a row to move the manipulator in an
arc.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the cursor or to perform search, the manipulator moves in a straight line to the next step.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the axis as shown in
the following, the manipulator moves in a straight line to P2, the next circular interpolation.
Circular motion is restored from P2 and P3.
Moves with linear interpolation.
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation
P2
: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
Spline Curve Movements with FWD/BWD Operations
• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of spline interpolation.
• There must be three spline curve motion steps in a row to perform a spline curve operation.
• Depending on the position where the [FWD] / [BWD] operation is performed, the alarm
“IRREGULAR DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” may occur. Note that FWD/
BWD inching operations change the path of the manipulator and caution is therefore
required. Performing these operations also increases the likelihood that the “IRREGULAR DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” will occur.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the cursor or
perform a search, the manipulator moves in a straight line to the next step.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move the axis as
shown in the following, the manipulator moves in a straight line to P2, the next spline
curve motion step. Spline curve motion is restored from P2 onward. However, the path
followed between P2 and P3 is somewhat different from the path followed at playback.
3-20
3.3 Checking Steps
Linear motion
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation
P2
: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
• If the manipulator is moved to P3 with [FWD], stopped, and then returned to P2 with
[BWD], the path followed between P2 and P3 is different for each of the following: the first
FWD operation, the BWD operation, and the consequent FWD operation.
P2
P4
P1
P3

Selecting Manual Speed
When [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves at the manual speed selected at
that time. Selected manual speed can be checked by the manual speed indication on the programming pendant.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
Manual speed is set with [FAST] and [SLOW]. FWD operation can be performed at a high
speed by pressing [HIGH SPEED]. Follow these procedures to select a manual speed.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed is changed to the next setting in the following
sequence: INCH, SLW, MED, and FST.
FAST
“INCH”
“SLOW”
“MED”
“FST”
MANUAL SPEED
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed is changed to the next setting in the following
sequence: FST, MED, SLW, and INCH.
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
“FST”
“MED”
“SLOW”
“INCH”
NOTE • FWD/BWD operation is performed with SLW speed even if INCH is selected.
• [HIGH SPEED] is available only for the FWD operation but not for BWD operation.
3-21
3.3 Checking Steps

Moving to Reference Point
To check the position of a taught reference point, follow these procedures to move the manipulator to the reference point.
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the reference point instruction line to
be checked.
2
Press [REFP] + [FWD].

Explanation
The manipulator moves to the reference point of the cursor line.
Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test operations. This function is
convenient for checking continuous paths and operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the play mode.
NOTE
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
• Only machine lock is available among special operations for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys are held down.
NOTE Always check safety conditions before pressing [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START] to start
the manipulator in motion.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Press {JOB}.
The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3
Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST
START].
The manipulator starts the test cycle operation. However, after
the operation starts, the motion continues even if [INTERLOCK] is
released. The manipulator moves only while these keys are held
down.
The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
3-22
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4
Modifying Steps
Begin move instruction
insertion.
Begin move instruction
deletion.
Move step cursor to
location where you want
to insert the instruction.
Move cursor to location of
instruction to be deleted.
Perform axis operations.
Press [DELETE].
Set interpolation type.
Press [ENTER].
Set play speed.
Deletion completed.
Set position level when
necessary.
Press [INSERT].
Press [ENTER].
Insertion completed.
3-23
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin Move instruction
modification.
Move step cursor to step
to be modified.
Modifying position data Modifying interpolation type
Move to position to be
modified using the
axis operation keys.
Perform axis
operations to position
to be modified.
Press [MODIFY].
Delete MOV
instruction.
Press [ENTER].
Press [MOTION TYPE]
and select motion
type.
Modification
completed.
Insert MOV
Instruction.
Modification
completed.
NOTE It is not possible to change a move instruction to a reference point instruction and vice
versa.
3-24
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin REFP instruction
modification.
Deletions
Modifications
Move step cursor to the
REFP instruction to be
deleted,and move the
manipulator to the
position.
Move step cursor to the
REFP instruction to be
modified.
Perform axis operations.
Press [DELETE].
Press [REFP].
Press [ENTER].
Press [MODIFY].
Deletion completed.
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-25
3.4 Modifying Steps
Begin TIMER Instruction
Modification.
Deletions
Modification
Move edit cursor to the
TIMER instruction to be
deleted.
Move edit cursor to the
TIMER instruction to be
modified.
Press [DELETE].
Press [TIMER].
Press [ENTER].
Enter timer value.
Deletion completed.
Press [MODIFY].
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-26
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.1

Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing
Currently Called Up Job
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.

Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Calling Up Other Jobs
NOTE In any other than the teach mode, set the mode switch to “TEACH.”
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
Main Menu
3
Select the job name to be
called.
3-27
TEST03
TEST
Short Cut
TEST3A
TEST01
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.2
Inserting Move Instructions
NOTE Move instructions cannot be inserted when the servo power is OFF.
Step where move instruction is to be inserted
Path after insertion
Path before insertion
Operation
1
2
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before the insert
position.
Press the axis operation key.
Explanation
The line immediately
before where the
move instruction
is to be added.
0006
0007
0008
0009
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to
move the manipulator to the position to be inserted.
NOTE Confirm the move instruction on the input buffer line
and set desired interpolation type and play speed.
3
Press [INSERT].
The key lamp will light.
When the inserting position is immediately before
NOTE the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not
needed.
4
Press [ENTER].
The move instruction is inserted after the cursor line.
The move instruction
is added.
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=100.0
<Examples of Inserting a Move Instruction>
When a move instruction is inserted in the following job, it is
placed on different lines according to the setting in the
TEACHING CONDITION window.
Before inserting the move instruction
Cursor line
0006
0007
0008
0009
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
After the insertion: when inserting before the next step
Added
instruction
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=100.0
3-28
After the insertion: when inserting after the cursor line
Added
instruction
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
MOVL V=558
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
3.4 Modifying Steps
NOTE
Positions where the move instructions are inserted.
The default location for insertions is for “before the next step,” but it is also possible to
insert “after the cursor line.” This setting is made in the “Move Instruction Register Method”
in the TEACHING CONDITION window.
3.4.3
Deleting Move Instructions
Step where move instruction is to be deleted
Path before deletion
Path after deletion
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the move
instruction to be deleted.
Explanation
0003
0004
0005
Move instruction
to be deleted
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=50.00
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor
NOTE position on the window, the cursor blinks. Stop the
blinking by either of the following procedures.
• Press [FWD] and move the manipulator to the
position where the move instruction is to be
deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] [ENTER] to change the position data of the blinking cursor position to the current manipulator position.
2
Press [DELETE].
The key lamp will blink.
3
Press [ENTER].
The step indicated by cursor line is deleted.
0003
0004
3-29
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.4

Modifying Move Instructions
Modifying Position Data
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the MOV
instruction to be modified.
Display the JOB CONTENT window and move the cursor to the
move instruction to be changed.
2
Press the axis operation key.
Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to
move the manipulator to the desired position.
3
Press [MODIFY].
The key lamp will blink.
4
Press [ENTER].
The position data in the present position is registered.
SUPPLE
-MENT

For MOV instructions for which position variables
have been set, the position variables will not be
changed.
Modifying Interpolation Type
NOTE Modifying only interpolation type is impossible. The interpolation type can be modified as a
choice for modifying the position data.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the move
instruction to be modified.
Display the JOB CONTENT window, and move the cursor to the
move instruction for which interpolation type is to be changed.
2
Press [FWD].
Turn ON the servo power and press [FWD] to move the manipulator to the position of the move instruction.
3
Press [DELETE].
The key lamp will blink.
4
Press [ENTER].
The cursor line step is deleted.
5
Press [MOTION TYPE].
Press [MOTION TYPE] to change the interpolation type. Each
time [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the input buffer line instruction
alternates.
6
Press [INSERT].
7
Press [ENTER].
The interpolation type and position data are changed at the same
time.
3-30
3.4 Modifying Steps
3.4.5
Undo Operation
After inserting, deleting, or modifying an instruction, the operation can be undone.
The UNDO operation becomes enabled by selecting {EDIT}{ENABLE UNDO}, and
becomes disabled by selecting {EDIT}{∗ENABLE UNDO} while editing a job.
The undo operation can be performed even after the manipulator is moved by the FWD or
NOTE BWD operation or test operation after inserting, deleting, or modifying a move instruction.
However, the undo operation cannot be performed if other instructions are edited or a job is
executed in the play mode after editing the move instruction.
The undo operation works only for the last five edited instructions only.
Operation
1
Press [ASSIST].
Explanation
The assist menu appears.
UNDO
REDO
2
Select {UNDO}.
The last operation is undone.
3
Select {REDO}.
The last UNDO operation is undone.
3.4.6

Modifying Reference Point Instructions
Deleting Reference Point Instructions
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position, an error message is displayed.
NOTE If this occurs, follow either of the procedures below.
• Press [REFP] + [FWD] to move the manipulator to the position to be deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] then [ENTER] to change the reference point position data to the current
position of the manipulator.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be
deleted.
2
Press [DELETE].
The key lamp will blink.
3
Press [ENTER].
The reference point instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
3-31
3.4 Modifying Steps

Modifying Reference Point Instructions
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be
modified.
2
Move the manipulator with the Turn ON the servo power and use the axis operation keys to
axis operation keys.
move the manipulator to the desired position.
3
Press [REFP].
4
Press [MODIFY].
The key lamp will light.
5
Press [ENTER].
The reference point instruction at the cursor line is changed.
3.4.7

Modifying Timer Instructions
Deleting Timer Instructions
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the timer
instruction to be deleted.
Explanation
Timer instruction
to be deleted
0003
0004
0005
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=0.50
MOVL V=138
2
Press [DELETE].
The key lamp will light.
3
Press [ENTER].
The timer instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
0003
0004
3-32
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
3.4 Modifying Steps

Modifying Timer Instructions
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the timer
instruction to be modified.
2
Press [TIMER].
3
Move the cursor to the input
buffer line timer value.
Explanation
0003
0004
0005
0006
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=0.50
MOVL VJ=138
MOVL VJ=138
0003
0004
0005
0006
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=0.50
MOVL VJ=138
MOVL VJ=138
Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value and press
[SHIFT] + the cursor key to set the data. To use the Numeric
keys to input data, move the cursor to the input buffer line timer
value and press [SELECT].
TIMER T=0.50
4
Change the timer value.
5
Press [MODIFY].
This key lamp will light.
6
Press [ENTER].
The timer instruction at the cursor line is changed.
0003
0004
0005
0006
3-33
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL VJ=138
MOVL VJ=138
3.5 Modifying Jobs
3.5
Modifying Jobs
3.5.1
Calling Up a Job
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
3
TEST3A-!
TEST02
TEST03
TEST
Main Menu
Short Cut
TEST3A
TEST01
Turn on servo power
Select the desired job.
3.5.2
Windows Related to Job
There are five types of job windows. Jobs can be checked and edited in these windows.
• JOB HEADER Window
Comments, data and time of registration, edit prohibit status, and so on are displayed and
edited.
• JOB CONTENT Window
The content of the registered job can be displayed and edited.
• COMMAND POSITION Window
The taught data is displayed.
• JOB LIST Window
The registered job is sorted alphabetically, then displayed, and the job is selected.
• JOB CAPACITY Window
The number of registered jobs, amount of memory, number of steps used, etc. is shown.

JOB HEADER Window
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
3-34
3.5 Modifying Jobs
Operation
3
Select {DISPLAY} under the
menu.
4
Select {JOB HEADER}.
Explanation
The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
JOB
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME :TEST01
: This is test job
COMMENT
: 2003/05/20 12:00
DATE
:
1024 BYTE
CAPACITY
:
30 LINE
LINES
:
20 STEP
STEPS
:
OFF
EDIT LOCK
:
NOT DONE
TO SAVE TO FD
:
R1
CONTROL GROUP
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1)JOB NAME
Displays the name of the current job.
(2)COMMENT
Displays the comments attached to the current job. This
can be edited in this window.
(3)DATE
Displays the date and time of the last editing of the job.
(4)CAPACITY
Displays the amount of memory that is being used to register this job.
(5)LINES
Displays the total number of instructions registered in this
job.
(6)STEPS
Displays the total number of move instructions registered
in this job.
(7)EDIT LOCK
Displays whether the edit prohibit setting for this job is at
ON or OFF. This can be changed in this window.
(8)TO SAVE TO FD
Displays “DONE” if the contents of the job are saved to a
floppy disk since the date and time of the last editing operation, and displays “NOT DONE” if they are not saved.
The job is marked as “DONE” only if it is saved as an
independent job or as a related job. If it is saved in a
CMOS batch operation, it is not marked as “DONE.”
(9)CONTROL GROUP
Displays the control group that this job controls. If the master
axis is specified, the master axis is highlighted.
SUPPLE
-MENT
To return to the JOB CONTENT window from the
JOB HEADER window, select {DISPLAY} from the
menu and then select {JOB CONTENT}.
3-35
3.5 Modifying Jobs

JOB CONTENT Window
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the
main menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
 (Left) : The cursor is moved to the address area.
 (Right): The cursor is moved to the instruction area.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME :TEST01
CONTROL GROUP :R1
(1)
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
DOUT OT#(41) ON
MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
DOUT OT#(44) ON
TIMER T=3.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
(2)
MOVJ VJ=80.00
Main Menu
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
(1)Address Area
Displays line numbers.
(2)Instruction Area
Displays instructions, additional items, and comments. Line
editing is possible.
3-36
3.5 Modifying Jobs

COMMAND POSITION Window
Operation
1
Select {ROBOT} under the
main menu.
2
Select {COMMAND POSITION}.
Explanation
Edit operations cannot be conducted from this window, but the
taught play speed and position data can be viewed on this window.
DATA
(1)
(3)
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
COMMAND POSITION
INTR: ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ SPD: 558 cm/min
[CMD] TOOL : ∗∗ [CURR] TOOL : ∗∗
R1: S
R1: S
L
U
R
B
T
L
U
R
B
T
Main Menu
(2)
0
0
0
0
0
0
(4)
Short Cut
(1)Interpolation
Displays the interpolation type.
(2)Speed
Displays the play speed.
(3)Command Position
Displays the tool file number and position data that has
been taught for this job. Steps which have no position
data, such as move instructions which use position variables, are marked with an asterisk (*).
(4)Current Data
Displays the current tool file number and position of the manipulator.
3-37
3.5 Modifying Jobs

JOB CAPACITY Window
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the
main menu.
2
Select {JOB CAPACITY}.
Explanation
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CAPACITY
(1)
NUMBER OF JOBS
:
9
(2)
USED MEMORY
REST
:
:
2360 BYTES
841408 BYTES
(3)
STEPS
REMAIN STEPS
:
:
50
45611
(4)
EDITING BUFFER
: UNUSED
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1)NUMBER OF JOBS
Displays the total number of jobs currently registered in
the memory of NX100.
(2)USED MEMORY
Displays the total amount of memory used in the NX100.
(3)STEPS
Displays the total number of used steps.
(4)EDITING BUFFER
Displays editing buffer use.
3-38
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6
Editing Instructions
The content of editing differs depending on where the cursor is in the address area or instruction area.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME :TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
(1)
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : *
NOP
MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
ARCON ASF#(1)
END
(2)
MOVJ VJ=50
Short Cut
Main Menu
(1)When the cursor is in the address area
Instructions can be inserted, deleted, or modified.
(2)When the cursor is in the instruction area
Date of additional items of already-registered instructions can be modified, inserted, or
deleted.
Editing additional items only is called “line editing.”
When inserting or modifying instructions, input the instruction with the function keys such as
[TIMER], etc. or using the instruction list dialog box. The selected instruction is displayed on
the input buffer line with the same additional items as registered previously.
3.6.1
Instruction Group
The instructions are divided into eight groups by processing or each work.
By pressing [INFORM LIST] INFORM
, the instruction group list dialog box appears.
LIST
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
IN/OUT
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00 CONTROL
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
MOVJ VJ=50
Main Menu
Short Cut
3-39
3.6 Editing Instructions
Display
Instruction
Group
Contents
Example
IN/OUT
I/O Instructions
Controls input and output
DOUT, WAIT
CONTROL
Control
Instructions
Controls processing or each work
JUMP, TIMER
DEVICE
Work
Instructions
Operates arc welding, spot welding, handling,
painting, etc.
ARCON, WVON,
SVSPOT, SPYON
MOTION
Move
Instructions
Moves the manipulator
MOVJ, REFP
ARITH
Operating
Instructions
Performs arithmetic calculation
ADD, SET
SHIFT
Shift
Instructions
Shifts the teaching point
SFTON, SFTOF
SENS
(Option)
Sensor
Instructions
(Option)
Instructions related to the sensor
COMARCON
OTHER
Other
Instructions
Instructions for functions other than above
SHCKSET
SAME
PRIOR
-
Specifies the instruction where the cursor is.
-
Specifies the previously-registered instruction.
By selecting a group, the instruction list dialog box of the selected group appears.
IN/OUT
JUMP
CONTROL
CALL
DEVICE
TIMER
MOTION
LABEL
ARITH
COMMENT
RET
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
3-40
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.2
Inserting Instructions
Operation
1
Explanation
Move the cursor to the
Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the instrucaddress area in the JOB CON- tion is to be inserted, in the teach mode.
TENT window.
Line before
where instruction
is to be added.
2
Press [INFORM LIST].
0000
0001
0002
NOP
MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
MOVJ VJ=25.00
The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is displayed beneath the line number in the address area.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
IN/OUT
STEP NO. : 0003
CONTROL
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
=> MOVJ VJ=50
Short Cut
Main Menu
3
Select the instruction group.
The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items
as registered previously.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
0002 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 ARCON ASF#(1)
0005 END
IN/OUT
STEP NO.: 0003
CONTROL
:00
JUMP
CALL
DEVICE
TIMER
MOTION
LABEL
ARITH
COMMENT
RET
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
=> JUMP *LABEL
Main Menu
4
Select the instruction.
3-41
Short Cut
3.6 Editing Instructions
Operation
5
Explanation
Change the data of additional <When Nothing is to be Changed>
items or variables as required. Proceed to Step 6.
<When Additional Items are to be edited>
• Changing numeric data
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
PULSE OT#( 2 )
To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
OUTPUT NO.=
PULSE OT#( )
Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer line is changed.
• Adding, modifying, or deleting an item
To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to
the instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OT#( ) 2
UNUSED
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
Short Cut
To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press
[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
OT#( ) 2
T=
UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
3-42
Short Cut
UTILITY
3.6 Editing Instructions
Operation
5
(cont’d)
Explanation
• Changing the data type
To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor
to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list
appears. Select the desired data type.
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
PULSE OT#(2)
Short Cut
Main Menu
After additional items have been added, modified, or deleted as
required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6
Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]. The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is inserted.
When adding immediately before the END instruction, pressing
[INSERT] is not needed.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=25.00 PL=0 NWAIT ACC=20 DCC=20
0002 PULSE OT#(2)
0003 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0005 ARCON ASF#(1)
0006 END
IN/OUT
STEP NO.0003
:00
CONTROL
JUMP
CALL
DEVICE
TIMER
MOTION
LABEL
ARITH
COMMENT
RET
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
JUMP *LABEL
Main Menu
3-43
Short Cut
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.3
Deleting Instructions
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the
Move the cursor to the instruction line to be deleted, in the teach
address area in the JOB CON- mode.
TENT window.
2
Move the cursor to the deleting line in the address area.
0020
0021
0022
The line desired
to be deleted
3
Press [DELETE] and
[ENTER].
The instruction is deleted and the following lines move up.
The following
lines move up.
3.6.4
0021
0022
0023
Explanation
Move the cursor to the instruction line to be modified, in the teach
Move the cursor to the
address area in the JOB CON- mode.
TENT window.
Instruction line
to be changed
2
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
Modifying Instructions
Operation
1
MOVL V=138
PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Press [INFORM LIST].
0022
0023
0024
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=50.00
The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is displayed beneath the line number in the address area.
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
3
Select the instruction group.
The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items
as registered previously.
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
PULSE OT#(1)
DOUT
IN/OUT
DIN
CONTROL
WAIT
PULSE
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
4
Select the instruction to be
modified.
3-44
3.6 Editing Instructions
Operation
5
Explanation
Change the data of additional <Editing Additional Items>
items or variables as required. • Changing numeric data
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
PULSE OT#( 2 )
To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
OUTPUT NO.=
PULSE OT#( )
Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer line is changed.
• Adding, modifying, or deleting an item
To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to
the instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OT#( ) 2
UNUSED
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
Short Cut
To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press
[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OT#( ) 2
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
T=
UNUSED
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
3-45
Short Cut
UTILITY
3.6 Editing Instructions
Operation
5
(cont’d)
Explanation
• Changing the data type
To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor
to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list
appears. Select the desired data type.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OT#( ) 2
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
Short Cut
After additional items have been added, modified, or deleted as
required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6
Press [MODIFY] and
[ENTER].
The instruction is modified to the instruction displayed in the input
buffer line.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
PULSE
OUTPUT NO.
TIME
UTILITY
DOUT
IN/OUT
OT#( ) 2
DIN
CONTROL
CONSTANT
I
I[ ]
WAIT
DEVICE
PULSE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
PULSE OT#(2)
Main Menu
3-46
Short Cut
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.5
Modifying Additional Numeric Data
Operation
Explanation
1
Mote the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2
Select the line where the num- The selected line can now be edited.
ber data is to be modified.
Number data
to be modified
3
Move the cursor to the
numeric data to be modified.
4
Input the desired number.
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
PULSE OT#(2) T=I001
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
To directly input the number, press [SELECT]. The input buffer
line appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
PULSE OT#( 2 ) T=I001
5
Press [ENTER].
The numeric data is modified.
Instruction line
for which
numeric data
was changed.
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
3-47
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
PULSE OT#(1) T=I001
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.6
Modifying Additional Items
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2
Select the instruction line for
which the additional item is to
be modified.
The selected line can now be edited.
Select the instruction.
The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction line
0021
for which additional
0022
item is to be modified. 0023
JOB
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
4
JOB
Select the desired additional
item.
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
UNUSED
Select the additional item to be The selection dialog box appears.
modified.
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
5
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
UTILITY
IN#(
IN#() )1
OT#(
)
=
SIN#( )
ON
SOUT#( )
IG#( )
The modified additional item is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT
window.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OT#( ) 1
=
ON
UNUSED
6
Press [ENTER].
The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
7
Press [ENTER].
Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line
of the instruction area.
Instruction line
for which additional
item was modified.
3-48
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT OT#(1)=ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.7
Inserting Additional Items
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2
Select the instruction line for
which the additional item is to
be inserted.
Explanation
The selected line can now be edited.
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
Instruction line
for which additional
item is to be added.
3
Select the instruction.
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
4
UTILITY
OT#( ) 1
=
ON
UNUSED
Select the additional item to be The selection dialog box appears.
inserted.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
5
DISPLAY
Select inserting additional
item.
DISPLAY
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
T=
UNUSED
The additional item is inserted.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
DISPLAY
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
T= 0.01
When the additional item needs the numeric data, move the cursor to the number and press [SELECT]. The input buffer line
appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
Time =
WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=
6
Press [ENTER].
The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
7
Press [ENTER].
Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line
of the instruction area.
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction line
0021
for which additional 0022
item was added.
0023
3-49
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=0.50
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
3.6 Editing Instructions
3.6.8
Deleting Additional Items
NOTE This operation cannot be used for the additional item which is locked.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2
Select the line where the addi- The selected line can be now be edited.
tional item is to be deleted.
0017
0018
0019
0020
Instruction line
0021
for which additional 0022
item is to be deleted. 0023
3
Select the instruction.
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT IN#(1)=ON T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
4
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
T= 0.01
Select the additional item to be The selection dialog box appears.
deleted.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
5
DISPLAY
Select “UNUSED.”
DISPLAY
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
T=
UNUSED
T=
0.01
“UNUSED” is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT window.
JOB
EDIT
DETAIL EDIT
WAIT
WAIT TARGET
CONDITION
CONDITION
TIME
DISPLAY
UTILITY
IN#( ) 1
=
ON
UNUSED
6
Press [ENTER].
The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
7
Press [ENTER].
Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line
of the instruction area.
Instruction line for
which the additional
item was deleted.
3-50
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=12.50
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7
Editing Jobs
The following five operations are to edit jobs.
Copy
Cut
:Copies a specified range to the buffer.
:Copies a specified range from a job to the buffer, and deletes it in a
job.
Paste
:Inserts the contents of the buffer into a job.
Reverse Paste
:Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer, and inserts them
into a job. (Refer to the following figure.)
Base Reverse Paste :Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer and adjusts the toand-from speeds same, and inserts them into a job.
(Refer to the following figure.)
V=100
:
MOVL V=100
;Move to  at V=100
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=80
;Move to  at V= 50
;Move to  at V=80
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=70
;Move to  at V=30
;Move to  at V=30

V=50
V=80

V=30


:
V=70
Excute Reverse Paste

：
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=50
;Move to  at V=100
;Move to  at V= 50
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=30
;Move to  at V=80
;Move to  at V=30
MOVL V=70
MOVL V=30
;Move to  at V=70
;Move to  at V=30
;Move to  at V=80
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=100
V=100

V=50
V=??

V=50
V=100

V=80
V=30
V=80

The speed and interpolation are
different going and returning.
;Move to  at V= 50
;Move to  at V=100
V=30
:
Execute Base Reverse Paste
：
;Move to  at V=100
MOVL V=100
;Move to  at V= 50
MOVL V=50
;Move to   at V=80
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=30
V=70

V=100
V=50

V=80


V=50
V=80
V=30
;Move to  at V=30
MOVL V=70
;Move to  at V=70
MOVL V=70
MOVL V=30
;Move to  at V=70
;Move to  at V=30
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=50
;Move to  at V= 80
;Move to  at V=50
The speed and interpolation are
the same going and returning.
V=30

V=70
:
V=70

3-51
3.7 Editing Jobs
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
Copy
Cut
Paste
The buffer content is inserted.
Reverse paste
Buffer content order is reversed and inserted.
3-52
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
NOP
’TEST JOB
0005
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVL V=100
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=100
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.1
Selecting the Range
After setting the range, Copy and Delete can be performed.
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
Explanation
JOB
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME :TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
Main Menu
2
Move the cursor to the start
line and press [SHIFT] +
[SELECT].
Short Cut
Move the cursor to
instruction area.
Turn on servo power
The range specification begins, and the address is displayed in
reverse.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
Start line
End line
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 DOUT OT#(41) ON
0007 MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the end
line.
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
Short Cut
Turn on servo power
Moving the cursor effects to the range. Up to the line specified by
the cursor is the range.
3-53
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.2
Copying
Before copying, the range to be copied has to be specified.
Operation
1
Explanation
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONENT
COPY
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
CUT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
PASTE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
REVERSE PASTE
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.00
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Short Cut
Main Menu
2
Select {COPY}.
3.7.3
The specified range is copied to the buffer.
Cutting
Before cutting, the range to be cut has to be specified.
Operation
1
Explanation
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
COPY
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
CUT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
PASTE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
REVERSE PASTE
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.00
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu
2
Select {CUT}.
Short Cut
The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the specified range is deleted and copied to the buffer.
When “NO” is selected, the cutting operation is cancelled.
Delete?
YES
3-54
NO
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.4
Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before the
desired position in the JOB
CONTENT window.
2
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
COPY
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
CUT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
PASTE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
REVERSE PASTE
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu
3
Select {PASTE}.
Short Cut
The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the contents of the buffer are inserted to the job.
When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is cancelled.
Paste?
YES
3-55
NO
3.7 Editing Jobs
3.7.5
Reverse Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before the
desired position in the JOB
CONTENT window.
2
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
COPY
JOB NAME TEST01
CONTROL GROUP R1
STEP NO. 0003
TOOL : 00
CUT
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
PASTE
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
REVERSE PASTE
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 DOUT OT#(44) ON
0009 TIMER T=3.0
0010 MOVL V=880.0
0011 MOVL V=880.0
0012 MOVL V=880.0
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=1
Main Menu
3
Select {REVERSE PASTE}.
Short Cut
The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected,
the contents of the buffer are reverse pasted to the job.
When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is cancelled.
Paste?
YES
3-56
NO
3.8 Test Operations
3.8
Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test operations. This function is
convenient for checking continuous paths and operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the play mode.
NOTE
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
• Only machine lock is available among special operations for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys are held down.
NOTE Always check safety conditions before starting the manipulator in motion.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Press {JOB}.
The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3
Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST
START].
The manipulator starts the test cycle operation. The manipulator
moves only while these keys are held down. However, after the
operation starts, the motion continues even if [INTERLOCK] is
released.
The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
3-57
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.1
Editing Play Speed
There are two ways to modify play speed:
• Modification of Speed Type
• Relative Modification

Modification of Speed Type
This method is used to modify the speed type (such as VJ, V, VR, etc.).
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
Only VJ is changed to 100.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=100.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Type of
Play Speed

Explanation
VJ
Joint Speed
Normal robot axes
V
TCP Speed
VR
Posture Angle Speed
VE
Base Axis Speed
Relative Modification
All steps are selected regardless of the play speed type. This method is used to change all
steps by a specified percentage (1% to 200%). This is called relative modification.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
Speed is doubled.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=276
MOVJ VJ=100.00
The speed of the entire job or specified section can be changed.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3-58
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
Operation
Explanation
3
Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4
Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in
the speed modify start line.
If the section is not specified, the speed of the entire job will be
changed.
5
Move the cursor to the end
line.
The line numbers of the selected lines are highlighted.
6
Select {EDIT} under the menu.
7
Select {CHANGE SPEED}.
The SPEED MODIFICATION window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
START LINE NO.
END LINE NO.
MODIFICATION TYPE
SPEED KIND
SPEED
EXECUTE
Main Menu
8
Set desired items.
9
Select “EXECUTE.”
0001
0002
CONFIRM
VJ
50 %
CANCEL
Short Cut
(1)START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be modified.
(2)END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be modified.
(3)MODIFICATION TYPE
Selects the confirmation before changing: “CONFIRM” or
“NO CONFIRM.”
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, the setting alternates between “CONFIRM” and “NO
CONFIRM.”
(4)SPEED KIND
Selects the speed type.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, selection dialog box appears. Select the speed type
to be changed.
(5)SPEED
Specifies the speed value.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this
item, the mode changes to number input mode. Input the
speed value and press [ENTER].
The speed begins to change.
If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “CONFIRM,” the confirmation
dialog box “Modifying speed” is displayed. Press [ENTER] to
change the speed on the first line and search for the next speed.
Press the UP/DOWN cursor button to keep the speed on the first
line and search for the next speed. To cancel the speed modification, press [CANCEL].
If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “NOT CONFIRM,” all the
speeds of the specified section are changed.
3-59
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Modification by TRT (Traverse Time)
Modifications made by TRT have the following characteristics:
• By setting the time required to execute a move instruction (moving time) to a desired
value, the speeds can be modified.
• It is possible to measure the moving time without actually moving the manipulator.
For example, when the movement from lines 5 through 20 currently requires 34 seconds, and
you want to reduce it to 15 seconds or extend it to 50 seconds, this function is used.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4
Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in
the weaving time measure
start line.
5
Move the cursor to the end
line.
6
Select {EDIT} under the menu.
7
Select {TRT}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
The line numbers of the selected lines are highlighted.
The TRT window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
TRT
(1)
START LINE NO.
0001
(2)
END LINE NO.
0002
(3)
MOVING TIME
00010.00 sec
(4)
SETTING TIME
00007.00 sec
EXECUTE
Main Menu
3-60
CANCEL
Short Cut
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
Operation
8
Set the desired items.
Explanation
(1)START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be measured
and modified.
(2)END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be measured
and modified.
(3)MOVING TIME
The weaving time needed to move from the first number to last
number is measured and displayed.
(4)SETTING TIME
Set the desired weaving time.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the
input buffer line appears. Input the desired weaving time and
press [ENTER].
9
Select “EXECUTE.”
The speed is changed according to the setting.
NOTE
• If instructions that include specific speed data
such as SPEED or ARCON instructions (including
speed data of the welding condition file) exist in
the specified section, the speed data for those
steps are not changed. Therefore, in such cases,
the set time and the actual time required are not
same.
• If the speed data is limited by the maximum value,
the following message is displayed.
!Limited to maximum speed
3-61
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.2
Editing Interpolation Type
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4
Select the line to be modified.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
The instruction on the cursor is displayed in the input buffer line.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
TOOL : 00
0001 NOP
0002 ’CAR TYPE-A JOB
0003 JUMP JOB:JOB-01
0004 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.000
MOVJ VJ=50.00
Main Job
5
Short Cut
Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key The interpolation type in the input buffer line changes.
simultaneously.
The modification of the speed according to the modification of the
interpolation type is calculated by the ratio to maximum speed at
each speed.
Joint Speed: MAX=100.0%
Linear Speed: MAX=9000cm/min
(e.g.)
Joint Speed: 50% = Linear Speed: 4500cm/min
Linear Speed: 10% = Linear Speed: 900cm/min
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.000
MOVL V=4500
Short Cut
Main Menu
6
Press [ENTER].
The instruction on the cursor line is replaced with one on the input
buffer line.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
TOOL : 00
0001 NOP
0002 ’CAR TYPE-A JOB
0003 JUMP JOB:JOB-01
0004 MOVL V=4500
0005 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=50.000
MOVL V=4500
Main Menu
3-62
Short Cut
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.3
Editing Condition Files
Condition files are prepared in order to set the conditions for the manipulator to execute
instructions.
Multiple condition files are provided for each application. More than one pattern can be set up
in each condition file. The patterns are listed by “condition numbers.” This number is specified by the work instruction in a job.
NOTE Refer to NX100 Operator’s Manual of each application for information regarding the contents and editing methods of the condition file.
Condition Files
Application A
Application B
Application C
Condition
Condition
Condition
Number 1
Number 2
Number 3
Condition
Condition
Number 1
Number 2
Condition
Condition
Number 1 Condition
Condition
Number 2
Number 3
Number 4
3-63
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.4
User Variables
User variables are used for jobs to store counters, calculation results or input signals. Since
the same user variable can be used in multiple jobs, save the numerical values as common
references for the jobs and the user variables are maintained even when the power is turned
OFF.
User variables have the following applications:
• Controlling of the number of workpieces
• Controlling of the number of jobs
• Sending/receiving of information between jobs
The data formats for user variables are described in the following table:
User Variables
Data Format
Byte Type
Variable No.
(pcs)
B000 to B099
(100)
Functions
Range of storable values is from 0 to 255.
Can store I/O status.
Can perform logical operations (AND, OR, etc.).
Integer Type
I000 to I099
(100)
Range of storable values is from -32768 to 32767.
Double Precision
Integer Type
D000 to D099
(100)
Range of storable values is from -2147483648 to
2147483647.
Real Type
R000 to R099
(100)
Range of storable values is from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E38.
Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤ 3.4E38
Character Type
S000 to S099
(100)
Maximum storable number of characters is 16.
Position
Type
Robot
Axes
P000 to P127
(128)
Base
Axes
BP000 to BP127
(128)
Can store position data in pulse form or in XYZ form.
XYZ type variable can be used as target position data
for move instructions, and as incremental values for
parallel shift instructions.
Station
Axes
EX000 to EX127
(128)
3-64
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
NOTE
• Play Speed V:
MOVL V=I000
The variable I000 is used for speed V with this move instruction.
The unit for V is 0.1mm per second.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would be true:
I000=1000  unit for V is 0.1mm/s  V=100.0mm/s
Note that, depending on the unit being used, the value of the variable and the value of the
actual speed on occasion might not match.
• Play Speed VJ:
MOVL VJ=I000
The unit for VJ is 0.01%.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would be true:
I000=1000  unit for VJ is 0.01%  VJ=10.00%.
• Timer T:
TIMER T=I000
The unit for T is 0.01 seconds.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would be true:
I000=1000  unit for T is 0.01 seconds  T=10.00 seconds.
3-65
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type Variables
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
{BYTE}, {INTEGER}, {DOUBLE}, and {REAL} are displayed for
the sub menu.
2
Select desired variable type.
The BYTE VARIABLE window appears. (Following is a case that
{BYTE} is selected.)
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
BYTE VARIABLE
NO.
B000
B001
B002
B003
B004
B005
B006
B007
B008
B009
B010
CONTENT
2
0
255
0
0
10
1
1
1
1
1
Short Cut
Main Menu
3
NAME
WORK NUM
0000_0010
0000_0000
1111_1111
0000_0000
0000_0000
0000_1010
0000_0001
0000_0001
0000_0001
0000_0001
0000_0001
Move the cursor to the desired When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the curvariable No.
sor with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT} 
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
BYTE VARIABLE
NO.
Cursor is moved
to desired variable
number.
4
Move the cursor to the data of
the variable.
5
Press [SELECT].
6
Input the desired number.
7
Press [ENTER].
CONTENT
B055
B056
B057
B058
10
255
255
0
NAME
0000_1010
1111_1111
1111_1111
0000_0000
The number can be directly typed.
Input value is set to the variable on the cursor position.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
BYTE VARIABLE
NO.
B000
B001
B002
3-66
CONTENT
2
12
255
0000_0010
0000_0000
1111_1111
NAME
WORK NUM
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting Character Type Variables
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select {STRING}.
Explanation
The STRING VARIABLE window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
STRING VARIABLE
NO.
CONTENT
NAME
S000
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
S009
S010
Main Menu
3
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the desired When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the curvariable No.
sor with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT} 
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER].
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
STRING VARIABLE
The cursor is
moved to
desired variable
number.
NO.
CONTENT
NAME
S055
S056
S057
S058
S004
4
Move the cursor to the data of
the variable.
5
Press [SELECT].
The characters can be directly typed.
6
Input the desired characters.
For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.6 Character Input."
7
Press [ENTER].
The input characters are set to the variable on the cursor position.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
STRING VARIABLE
NO.
S000
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
S009
S010
3-67
CONTENT
WORK NUM
NAME
UTILITY
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Registering Variable Name
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired variable.
Select any variable type from among byte type, integer type, double precision integer type, real type, robot position type, base
position type, and station position type.
3
Move the cursor to desired
variable number.
If desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor by
either of following operations.
• Select the variable number, input desired variable number and
press [ENTER]
The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select
{EDIT}{SEARCH}. Input desired variable number and press
[ENTER].
The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
4
Select “NAME.”
The input buffer line appears.
SUPPLE
-MENT
5
Input name.
6
Press [ENTER].
Refer to " 1.2.6 Character Input " for the character
input operation.
The variable name is registered.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
BYTE VARIABLE
NO.
B000
B001
B002
B003
CONTENT
2
12
255
0
3-68
0000_0010
0000_0000
1111_1111
0000 0000
NAME
WORK NUM
WORK2 NUM
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Displaying Position Variables
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
The POSITION VARIABLE window of desired type among robot
type, base type, and station type appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
ROBOT
#P000
R1: X
330.000
Y
0.000
Z
-10.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
NAME SHIFT DATA
TOOL: 01
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S<180
R<180
T<180
PAGE
Main Menu
3
Short Cut
GO BACK
Press the page key
PAGE
GO BACK
or
GO BACK
[SHIFT] + page key
PAGE
.
Select the desired number by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
If [SHIFT] is pressed simultaneously, the window returns to previous page.
When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor with either of the following operations.
• Press [DIRECT PAGE]. Then input the variable No. using the
Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT} 
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER].
DATA
Move to desired
variable number
page.
3-69
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P025
PULSE
R1: S
28109
L
-136
U
0
R
0
B
0
T
0
NAME
TOOL: 01
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S<180
R<180
T<180
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting Position Variables
The following table shows the types of position variables and setting methods.
NOTE The setting of position variables is done in the teach mode.
Turn the servo power ON when setting the variables with the axis keys.
Types of Position Variables and Setting Methods
BPxxx
(Base)
Pxxx (Robot)
EXxxx
(Station)
Type
Pulse Type
Pulse
Type
XYZ Type
XYZ
Type
Pulse Type
Select coordinates from
base, robot, user, tool.
Z-axis
Using the numeric keys
45000
7
8
9
4
5.
6
1
2
3
0
.
-
Setting
Method
X-axis
Using the axis keys
XS-
X+
S+
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
Z-
Z+
L-
U-
L+
U+
3-70
B-
T-
B+
T+
Y- a x i s
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys
Pulse Type
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
Explanation
The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
(The POSITION VARIABLE window is used for this example.)
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000
**: S
L
U
R
B
T
NAME
TOOL: **
*
*
*
*
*
*
PAGE
Main Menu
3
Select the variable data type.
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
#P000
NAME
PULSE
BASE
ROBOT
USER
TOOL
MASTER TOOL
If the position variable was set before, confirmation dialog box
appears for data clear. If “YES” is selected, the data is cleared.
Clear data?
YES
4
Select {PULSE}.
5
Move the cursor to desired
data to be input and press
[SELECT].
6
Input the value.
7
Press [ENTER].
NO
The value is set in the cursor position.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000
**: S
L
U
PULSE
45000
0
0
3-71
NAME
TOOL: 00
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
XYZ Type
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
3
Select the variable data type.
Explanation
The selection dialog box appears.
NAME
#P000
PULSE
BASE
ROBOT
USER
TOOL
MASTER TOOL
4
Select desired coordinates
except PULSE.
5
Move the cursor to desired
data to be input and press
[SELECT].
6
Input the value.
7
Press [ENTER].
The value is set in the cursor position.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
ROBOT
#P000
R1: X
330.000
Y
0.000
Z
-10.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
NAME
TOOL: 00
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S<180
R<180
T<180
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
Setting of “<TYPE>”
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the setting
data in thePOSITION
inputVARIABLE
buffer line, the settings alternate.
ROBOT
#P000
R1: X
330.000
Y
0.000
Z
-10.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
NAME
TOOL: 00
<TYPE>
REAR
UP
FLIP
S<180
R<180
T<180
About “<TYPE>”
• It is not necessary to set a type if the position variable is to be used for parallel shift
operations.
• When the position variable is used with a move instruction such as “MOVJ P001,” it
is necessary to set a type. For details on types, refer to " Manipulator Types " on the
page 3-76.
Current Position Window (XYZ) shows the current setting of a type.
3-72
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys
Pulse Type
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
3
Press [SHIFT] + [ROBOT].
When you need an external axis position, press
[SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS].
When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
R1  R2  R3  R4.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
B1 B2  B3  B4  S1  S2  S3    S12
4
Move the manipulator with the Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position
axis keys.
to be set to position variable.
5
Press [MODIFY].
6
Press [ENTER].
XYZ Type
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
Explanation
When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
R1  R2  R3  R4.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
B1 B2  B3  B4  S1  S2  S3    S12
3
Move the manipulator with the Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position
axis keys.
to be set to position variable.
4
Press [MODIFY].
5
Press [ENTER].
3-73
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Deleting Data Set of Position Variables
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under
the main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
3
Select {DATA} under the
menu.
Explanation
The pull-down menu appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
CLEAR DATA
NAME
TOOL: 00
ROBOT
#P000
R1: X
330.000
Y
0.000
Z
-10.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
4
Select {CLEAR DATA}.
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S<180
R<180
T<180
The position variable data on the displayed page are deleted.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000
**: S
L
U
R
B
T
*
*
*
*
*
*
NAME
TOOL: **
PAGE
Main Menu
3-74
Short Cut
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Checking Positions by Position Variables
Operation
1
Select {VARIABLE} under the
main menu.
2
Select desired position variable type.
Explanation
When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
R1  R2  R3  R4.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on
the status line changes:
B1 B2  B3  B4  S1  S2  S3    S12
3
Press [FWD].
Selected axis moves to the position specified by the variable.
The selected axis (manipulator, base, or station)
NOTE moves directly to the set variable position. Before
pressing [FWD], check that the surrounding area is
safe.
3-75
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Manipulator Types
When robot axis position data is described in the XYZ format, a number of solutions are
obtained from the manipulator’s structure when moving it to the described position. In order to
select one appropriate solution, it is necessary to specify the manipulator type. This manipulator type is called “Type.” There are up to six types in NX100 system. These types also vary
according to the manipulator models.
• Flip/No Flip: R-axis Position
• R-axis Angle
• T-axis Angle
• Front/Back: Relationship Between the S-axis and TCP
• Upper Arm/Lower Arm: Type Comprised of the L- and U-axes
• S-axis Angle
These six types are described in the following:
• Flip/No Flip
This shows the R-axis position.
When the R-axis is in the position at A as shown in the following diagram, it is known as
“Flip;” when it is in the B position, it is called “No Flip.” However, in a manipulator in which
the R-axis can move more than ±180° even in position A, it is necessary to specify
whether the R-axis is from -90° to 90°, or from 270° to 360°, or from -360° to -270°. The
same is true for the B position. This is set at the following “R-axis Angle.”
Flip
No Flip
0°
0°
A
B
-90 < θ R ≤ 90
270 < θ R ≤ 360, -360 < θ R ≤ -270
90 < θ R ≤ 270
-270 < θ R ≤ -90
NOTE θ R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0°.
3-76
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
• R-axis Angle
This specifies whether the R-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
R < 180°
R ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < θ R ≤ 180
180 < θ R ≤ 360, -360 < θ R ≤ -180
NOTE θ R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0°.
• T-axis Angle
This specifies positions of the R-, B-, and T-axis.
For manipulators with wrist axes (three axes), this specifies whether the T-axis angle is
less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
T <180°
T ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180 < θ T ≤180
180 < θ T ≤ 360, -360 < θ T ≤ -180
NOTE θ T is the angle when the T-axis home position is 0°.
3-77
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
• Front/Back
This specifies where in the S-axis rotation center the B-axis rotation center locates when
viewing the L-axis and U-axis from the right-hand side. When viewed from the right-hand
side, the right of the S-axis rotation center is called the front, and the left is called the
back.
Right-hand side
(S-axis 0°)
S-axis 0°
Back
S-axis 180°
Front
Front
Back
The diagram above shows the S-axis at 0° and at 180°. This is the configuration when
the L-axis and the U-axis are viewed from the right-hand side.
3-78
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
• Upper Arm/Lower Arm
This specifies a type comprised of L-axis and U-axis when the L-axis and U-axis are
viewed from the right-hand side.
Right-hand side
Upper Arm
Lower Arm
• S-axis Angle
This designation is required for the manipulators which have working envelopes greater
than ±180°.
This specifies whether the S-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
S<180°
S ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360°
-180°
-360°
180°
-180° < θ S ≤ 180°
180° < θ S ≤ 360°
-360° < θ S ≤ -180°
NOTE θ S is the angle when the S-axis home position is 0°.
3-79
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.5
Editing Local Variables
User variables and local variables can be used in the storage of counters, calculations, and
input signals. The data format is the same as that of user variables. As shown in the following
table, the letter L is affixed to the variable number to indicate a local variable.
Local Variables
Data Format
Variable No.
Byte Type
LB000 to
LB
Functions
Range of storable values is from 0 to 255.
Can store I/O status.
Can perform logical operations (AND, OR, etc.).
Integer Type
Ll000 to
LI
Range of storable values is from -32768 to 32767.
Double Precision
Integer Type
LD000 to
LD
Range of storable values is from -2147483648 to
2147483647.
Real Type
LR000 to
LR
Range of storable values is from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E+38
Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤ 3.4E+38
Character Type
LS000 to
LS
Maximum storable number of characters is 16.
Position
Type
Robot
Axes
LP000 to
LP
Base
Axes
LBP000 to
LBP
Can store position data in pulse form or in XYZ form. XYZ
type variables can be used as target position data for
move instructions, and as incremental values for parallel
shift instructions.
Station
Axes
LEX000 to
LEX
Local variables differ from user variables in the following four ways:
• Used in One Job Only
With user variables it is possible to define and use one variable in multiple jobs, but local
variables are used only in the one job in which they are defined, and cannot be read from
other jobs. Accordingly, local variables do not affect other jobs, so it is possible to define a
variable number (such as LB001) separately in different jobs, and use it in different ways
in each of these jobs.
User Variable
B001
Job 1
Job 2
Job 3
Job 1
Job 2
Job 3
Local Variable
Local Variable
Local Variable
LB001
LB001
LB001
Local Variables
User Variables
• Able to Use Any Number of Variables
The number is set in the JOB HEADER window. When the number is set, the area for the
value is saved in memory.
3-80
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
• Not Able to Display the Variable Contents
To display the local variable contents, user variables are needed.
For example, to view the contents of local variable LP000, save it temporarily as user
variable P001. Then execute the instruction SET P001 LP000, and view the POSITION
VARIABLE window for P001.
• Enabled Only During the Execution of the Defined Job
The contents of the local variables are enabled only during the execution of the defined
job.
The local variable field is assured when the defined job is called (when the job is executed
by a CALL or JUMP instruction, or the job is selected by the menu). Once the job is completed by the execution of a RET, END, or JUMP instruction, the local variable data that
was set is disabled. However, if a job which uses local variables itself calls a separate job,
then is returned to by use of a RET instruction, the data that was present prior to the
CALL instruction remains in effect and can be used.
NOTE
Precautions for Variables and Units
As was the case with user variables, note that, depending on the value of the unit being
used, the value of the variable and the value of the actual speed or time an occasion might
not match. Refer to "3.9.4 User Variables."
3-81
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Setting the Number of Local Variables
How many local variables are to be used in a job is set in the JOB HEADER window. When
setting the number of variables, the memory area needed for those variables is saved.
NOTE
Only when expanding the “INSTRUCTION LEVEL,” it is possible to use local variables.
Refer to “8.12 Instruction Level Setting” of “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A211) for
details on setting the language level.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {DISPLAY} under the
menu.
4
Select {JOB HEADER}.
Explanation
The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
JOB
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME : TEST01
: This job is test job
COMMENT
: 2003/05/20 12:00
DATE
:
CAPACITY
24 BYTE
:
LINES
30 LINE
:
20 STEP
STEPS
:
EDIT LOCK
OFF
TO SAVE TO FD :
NOT DONE
:
GROUP SET
R1
ROBOT (LP)
BYTE (LB)
INT (LI)
DOUBLE (LD)
REAL (LR)
CHARACTER (LS)
Main Menu
5
Select the number of local
variables to be set.
6
Input the number of variables.
7
Press [ENTER].
Short Cut
The input buffer line appears.
The number of local variables are set.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME : TEST01
: This job is test job
COMMENT
: 2003/05/20 12:00
DATE
:
CAPACITY
24 BYTE
:
LINES
30 LINE
:
20 STEP
STEPS
:
EDIT LOCK
OFF
TO SAVE TO FD
NOT DONE
GROUP SET
R1
BYTE (LB)
INT (LI)
DOUBLE (LD)
REAL (LR)
CHARACTER (LS)
Main Menu
3-82
ROBOT (LP)
Short Cut
Reconstruct local variable from next start
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.6
Searching
When performing editing or confirmation, a search for the job or step can be done. The
search can be done when the cursor is in either the address or instruction area on the JOB
CONTENT window.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
TOP LINE
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
END LINE
0000 NOP
0001 ’TESTSEARCH
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
ENABEL SPEED TAG
0004 MOVL V=276
0005 TIMER T=1.00
ENABLE POS LVL TAG
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Main Menu
4
Select {SEARCH}.
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 ’This job is test job
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004
V=276
LINE MOVL
SEARCH
0005
TIMER T=1.00
STEP SEARCH
LABEL SEARCH
0006
DOUT OT#(1) ON
INSTRUCTION SEARCH
0007
MOVL V=138
Main Menu
5
Short Cut
Select the searching type.
Searching is an operation by which the cursor is moved to a specific step or instruction in the
edit job. A target point can be instantaneously searched out without using the cursor.
3-83
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Line Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired line number.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {EDIT], {SEARCH} and The input buffer line appears.
“LINE SEARCH.”
2
Input desired line number.
3
Press [ENTER].
The cursor is moved to the line number and the window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO.:0003
TOOL : 00
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0107 TIMER T=0.50
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Main Menu

Short Cut
Step Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired step number (move instruction).
Operation
1
Select “STEP SEARCH.”
2
Input desired step number.
3
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The input buffer line appears.
The cursor is moved to the input step and the window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0107 TIMER T=0.50
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Main Menu
3-84
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Label Search
This function searches for the desired label and the instruction using that label.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and The input buffer line appears.
“LABEL SEARCH.”
2
Input desired label name.
For information on character input operation, refer to "1.2.6 Character Input."
At this time, search can be conducted by entering any one character of the label. For example, to search for the “START” label,
enter only “S,” and the search can be done.
3
Press [ENTER].
The label is searched out and the cursor is on its line number.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0099 *START
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
*START
Main Menu
4
Use the cursor to continue
searching.
Short Cut
It is possible to continue searching by pressing the cursor key.
To end searching, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu
and press [SELECT].
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
TOP LINE
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
END LINE
0099 *START
0100 MOVJ VJ=100.00
END SEARCH
0101 TIMER T=1.00
0102 MOVL V=138
ENABLE SPEED TAG
0103 MOVL V=138
0104 MOVJ VJ=50.00
ENABLE POS LVL TAG
0105 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0106 DOUT OT#(1) ON
Main Menu
3-85
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Instruction Search
This function moves the cursor to a desired instruction.
Operation
1
Explanation
Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and The INFORM command list appears.
“INSTRUCTION SEARCH.”
DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB
EDIT
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
IN/OUT
STEP NO.: 0003
TOOL : 00 CONTROL
0000 NOP
0001 ’This job is test job
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=276
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0007 MOVL V=138
Main Menu
2
Select desired instruction
group.
3
Select desired instruction.
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
Short Cut
The instruction is searched out and the cursor is on its line number.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0010 ARCON ASF#(1)
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
ARCON ASF#(1)
Main Menu
4
Use the cursor to continue
searching.
Short Cut
It is possible to continue searching by pressing the cursor key.
To end searching, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu
and press [SELECT] or press [CANCEL].
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
TOP LINE
JOB NAME TEST01
CONTROL GROUP R1
END LINE
0010 ARCON ASF#(1)
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
END SEARCH
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
ENABLE SPEED TAG
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
ENABLE POS LVL TAG
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
Main Menu
3-86
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. 0003
TOOL : 00
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions

Tag Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired tag.
Operation
1
Explanation
Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and The instruction list dialog box appears.
“TAG SEARCH.”
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
IN/OUT
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
CONTROL
0000 NOP
0001 ’This job is test job
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=276
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0007 MOVL V=138
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
Main Menu
2
Select desired instruction
group.
3
Select desired instruction for
which the tag is to be
searched.
Short Cut
The tag list dialog box for selected instruction appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
B
IN/OUT
step no.0003
tool
CONTROL
B[] :00
0000 NOP
0001 This job is test job
0002 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=12.50
0004 MOVL V=276
0005 TIMER T=1.00
0006 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0007 MOVL V=138
D
I
OG#()
OGH#()
OT#()
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
Main Menu
4
Select the desired tag.
Short Cut
The cursor is moved to the selected tag and the window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0010 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
DOUT OT#(1) ON
Main Menu
3-87
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions
Operation
5
Use the cursor to continue
searching.
Explanation
It is possible to continue searching by pressing the cursor key.
To end searching, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu
and press [SELECT] or press [CANCEL].
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
TOP LINE
JOB NAMETEST01
CONTROL GROUPR1
END LINE
0010 DOUT OT#(1) ON
0011 MOVJEND
VJ=100.00
SEARCH
0012 TIMER T=1.00
0013 MOVL V=138
ENABLE SPEED TAG
0014 MOVL V=138
0015 MOVJ VJ=50.00
ENABLE POS LVL TAG
0016 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0017 DOUT OT#(1) ON
Main Menu
3-88
Short Cut
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
4.1 Preparation for Playback
4 Playback
4.1
Preparation for Playback
4.1.1
Selecting a Job
Playback is the act of executing a taught job. Before playback operation, first call the job to be
executed.

Calling a Job
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
Main Menu
3
Select the desired job.
4-1
TEST03
TEST
Short Cut
TEST3A
TEST01
4.1 Preparation for Playback

Registering the Master Job
If a particular job is played back frequently, it is convenient to register that job as a master job
(master registration). A job registered as the master job can be called more easily than the
method described on the preceding page.
NOTE Only one job can be registered as the master job. Registering a master job automatically
releases the previously registered master job.
Be sure to register a master job in the teach mode.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the
main menu.
2
Select {MASTER JOB}.
Explanation
The MASTER JOB window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB : *******
Main Menu
3
Press [SELECT].
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB*******
CALL MASTER JOB
SETTING MASTER JOB
CANCEL MASTER JOB
Main Menu
4-2
Short Cut
4.1 Preparation for Playback
Operation
4
Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
Main Menu
5
Select a job to be registered
as a master job.
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
Short Cut
The selected job is registered as the master job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB : TEST01

Calling the Master Job
This operation is to call a master job. The job can be called in the JOB CONTENT window,
PLAYBACK window, JOB SELECT window, or the MASTER JOB window.
Calling from the JOB CONTENT, PLAYBACK, JOB SELECT Window
Operation
1
Explanation
Select {JOB} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
EDIT
JOB
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENTJOB NAME : TEST01
STEP NO. : 0003
CONTROL GROUP : R1
SELECT JOB 0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002 MOVL V=138
CREATE NEW JOB
0003 MOVL V=138
0004 MOVL V=138
Aa
0005 MOVL V=138
MASTER JOB
0006 END
TOOL : 00
CF
Out
ROBOT
JOB CAPACITY
SYSTEM INFO
MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
2
Select {MASTER JOB}.
Short Cut
The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
4-3
4.1 Preparation for Playback
Calling from the MASTER JOB Window
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {MASTER JOB}.
Explanation
The MASTER JOB window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB : TEST01
Main Menu
3
Press [SELECT].
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MASTER JOB
MASTER JOB*******
CALL MASTER JOB
SETTING MASTER JOB
CANCEL MASTER JOB
Main Menu
4
Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.
Short Cut
The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window (during
the teach mode), or the PLAYBACK window (during the play
mode) appears.
4-4
4.1 Preparation for Playback
4.1.2
The PLAYBACK Window
When the mode switch on the programming pendant is switched to “PLAY” while displaying
the JOB CONTENT window, the PLAYBACK window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3) (5)
(6)
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 0
0002 SET B001 1
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006 WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007 MOVL V=880.0
0008 MOVL V=880.0
0009 MOVL V=880.0
SPEED ADJUSTMENT (MODIFY: OFF)
MEASURE START JOB
MOVING TIME
PLAYBACK TIME
Main Menu
100 %
J: TEST01 S: 000
24.00 sec
44.50 sec
Short Cut
(1) Job Content
The cursor moves according to the playback operation. The contents are automatically
scrolled as needed.
(2) Override Speed Settings
Displayed when override speed setting is performed.
(3) Cycle Time
Displays the operating time of the manipulator. Each time the manipulator is started, the
previous cycle time is reset, and a new measurement begins. The setting can be made for
display or no display.
(4) Start No.
First step in the measurement. Measurement starts when the start button lamp lights and
the playback starts.
(5) Motion Time
Displays the weaving time of the manipulator.
(6) Playback Time
Displays the time from beginning to the end of the measurement. Measurement ends when
the manipulator stops and the start button lamp goes off.
4-5
4.1 Preparation for Playback

Display of Cycle Time
Follow the procedure below to set whether or not to display the cycle time on the PLAYBACK
window.
Operation
1
Select {DISPLAY} under the
menu.
2
Select {CYCLE TIME}.

Explanation
The cycle time is displayed. Doing the same operation one more
time will delete the cycle time display.
Operation Cycle
There are three types of manipulator operation cycles:
• AUTO :
Repeats a job continuously.
• 1 CYCLE : Executes a job once. If there is a called job during execution, it is performed,
after which the manipulator returns to the original job.
• 1 STEP : Executes one step (instruction) at a time.
The operation cycle can be changed using the following:
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the
main menu, and then select
{CYCLE}.
2
Select the operation cycle
to be changed.
Explanation
The operation cycle is changed.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
CYCLE
MULTIPLE WINDOWS
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
Main Menu
4-6
Short Cut
WORK SELECT
STEP
1 CYCLE
CONTINUOUS
4.1 Preparation for Playback
Automatic Setting for Operation Cycle
Automatic setting of the operation cycle can be changed by the following operation.
This can be done in the management mode only.
Operation
1
Select {SETUP} under the
main menu.
2
Select {OPERATE COND}.
Explanation
The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. Use the cursor
to scroll the screen.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
MASTER JOB CHANGE
RESERVED START
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE
SPEED DATA INPUT FORM
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE
SET CYCLE ON POWER ON
Main Menu
3
Select desired operation.
PERMIT
PROHIBIT
PERMIT
cm/min
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
MASTER JOB CHANGE
RESERVED START
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE
SPEED DATA INPUT FORM
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE
SET CYCLE ON POWER ON
Main Menu
SUPPLE
-MENT
PERMIT
PROHIBIT
PERMIT
cm/min
1 CYCLE
STEP
11 CYCLE
CYCLE
CONTINUOUS
1 CYCLE
NONE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
Short Cut
“NONE” setting
The operation cycle is not changed when “NONE”
is set.
For example, if the setting is “CYCLE SWITCH IN
TEACH MODE = NONE,” the operation cycle after
selecting the teach mode is the same as the one
before.
4-7
4.2 Playback
Operation
4
Select a cycle.
Explanation
The operation cycle set automatically is changed.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
MASTER JOB CHANGE
RESERVED START
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE
SPEED DATA INPUT FORM
CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE
CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE
SET CYCLE ON POWER ON
Main Menu
4.2
4.2.1
PERMIT
PROHIBIT
PERMIT
cm/min
STEP
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
1 CYCLE
Short Cut
Playback
Playback Operation
NOTE After checking to be sure there is no one near the manipulator, start the playback operation
by following the procedures below.
Playback is the operation by which the taught job is played back. Follow the procedures
below to start the playback operation.
• Programming pendant (start button)
• Peripheral device (external start input)
Which is used to start playback is specified by the mode switch on the programming pendant.
Mode Switch on
Programming Pendant
Job is started up by peripheral device
[PLAY]
[START] button on programming pendant
[REMOTE]
Peripheral device
For playback using the programming pendant, follow the procedures below.
4-8
4.2 Playback

Selecting the Start Device
Operation
1

Explanation
Set the mode switch on the
programming pendant to
“PLAY.”
The remote mode is disabled and the play mode is enabled so
the machines are to be started up by the programming pendant.
Servo On
Operation
Explanation
1
Press [Servo ON Ready].

Start Operation
NX100 servo power is ON and the Servo ON lamp on the programming pendant lights.
Operation
1
Explanation
Press [START].
4.2.2
The start button lamp lights and the manipulator begins operation.
Special Playback Operations
The following special operations can be performed during playback:
• Low speed operation
• Limited speed operation
• Dry run speed operation
• Machine lock operation
• Check mode operation
Two or more special operations can be performed at the same time. If multiple operations are
selected, the speed during playback is limited to the speed of the slowest of the operations.
Settings for special operations are done in the SPECIAL PLAY window.
When displaying the PLAYBACK window, move the cursor to the menu area and select {UTILITY}  {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}. The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START
SPEED LIMIT
DRY-RUN SPEED
MACHINE LOCK
CHECK-RUN
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
INVALID
COMPLETE
Main Menu
Short Cut
4-9
4.2 Playback

Low Speed Operation
The manipulator moves at low speed during the first step after starting. After the operation of
this step, the manipulator stops regardless of the selection of the operation cycle and when
low speed operation is canceled. Even if the manipulator is manually stopped during low
speed operation, the low speed is cancelled.
After one step operation or any stop of manipulator during low speed operation, pressing
[START] allows the manipulator to move at the taught speed.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select “LOW SPEED START”
on the SPECIAL PLAY window.
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.

Limited Speed Operations
The manipulator operates within the limited speed for the teach mode. Usually, the limited
speed is set to 250mm/s. However, operation is performed at actual playback speeds for
steps in which the set speed is under this limit.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select “SPEED LIMIT” under
the SPECIAL PLAY window.
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4-10
4.2 Playback

Dry-run Speed Operations
The dry-run speed is a constant speed that is independent of the teaching speeds. The
manipulator executes all the steps at a constant speed, which is convenient for quick check of
a job consisting of slow operations. The dry-run speed is 10% of maximum speed.
NOTE Be careful of steps programmed at lower speeds than the dry-run speed, because they are
executed at greater speeds than programmed.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select the “DRY-RUN
SPEED” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
Speed
Play speed
Safety speed
Dry-run speed
Step
Safety Speed and Dry-run Speed

Machine Lock Operation
A job is played back without moving the manipulator to check the status of input and output.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select “MACHINE LOCK”
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4-11
4.2 Playback

Check Mode Operation
The machine runs without issuing work instructions, such as the ARCON instruction. It is
used primarily to check the path of the program.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select “CHECK-RUN” under
the SPECIAL PLAY window.
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.

Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation
The weaving operation is not executed in the weaving section of the job.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN
CHK-RUN” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID.”
2
Select “COMPLETE.”
The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.

Cancel All Special Operations
All special operations are disabled by the following operation
Operation
1
Select {EDIT} from the menu.
2
Select “CANCEL ALL
SELECT.”
Explanation
The message “All special functions canceled” appears.
NOTE Special operations are also automatically cancelled if the main power is shut OFF.
4-12
4.3 Stop and Restart
4.3
Stop and Restart
The manipulator stops in the following conditions:
• Hold
• Emergency stop
• Stop by alarm
• Others
• During each application
4.3.1
Hold
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion.
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time, [START] lamp goes
OFF.
SUPPLE
-MENT
Using the Programming Pendant

Hold
Operation
1
Explanation
Press [HOLD] on the program- The manipulator stops.
ming pendant.
The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD] button is held down.
Release
Operation
1
Press [START] on the programming pendant.
Explanation
The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it
was stopped.
Using an External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
Operation
1
Turn ON the hold signal from
an external input (system
input).
Explanation
The manipulator stops momentarily.
External holding
The output signal “HOLD” turns ON.
The programming pendant [HOLD] lamp lights.
4-13
4.3 Stop and Restart
Release
1
Operation
Explanation
Turn off the hold signal from
an external input (system
input).
Hold is released. To continue the operation, press [START] or turn
ON the external input signal (system input). The manipulator
restarts its operation, beginning from the position where it was
stopped.
4.3.2
Emergency Stop
At an emergency stop, the servo power supply that drives the manipulator is turned OFF and
the manipulator stops immediately. An emergency stop can be performed by using either of
the following:
• Programming pendant
• External input signal (system input)
Emergency Stop
1
Operation
Explanation
Press the emergency stop
The servo power turns OFF and the manipulator stops immediately.
button
.
EMERGENCY STOP
On the front door of the NX100:
On the programming pendant:
Using the Emergency Stop Button on the Programming Pendant
Robot stops by P.P. emergency stop
Using the External Input Signal (System Input)
Robot stops by external emergency stop
4-14
4.3 Stop and Restart
Release
Operation
1
Explanation
Turn the emergency stop
button
in the direction
of the arrows.
TURN
On the front door of the NX100:
TURN
On the programming pendant:
To turn ON the servo power supply again, press [SERVO ON
READY] and then grip the Enable switch of the programming
pendant.
SERVO
ON
READY

Restart After Emergency Stop
• Prior to restarting after an emergency stop, confirm the position for the
next operation and make sure there is no interference with the workpiece or fixture.
The application of an emergency stop during high speed operations on continuous steps
can result in the manipulator stopping two or three steps prior to the step that is being displayed. There is a risk of interference with the workpiece or fixture when the manipulator
is restarted under such conditions.
4-15
4.3 Stop and Restart
4.3.3
Stop by Alarm
If an alarm occurs during operation, the manipulator stops immediately and the ALARM window appears on the programming pendant indicating that the machine was stopped by an
alarm.
If more than one alarm occurs simultaneously, all alarms can be viewed on the window. Scroll
down the viewing area of the window when necessary.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ALARM
ALARM 4100 [1]
OVERRUN (ROBOT)
ALARM 4321
OVERLOAD [SLURBT]
ALARM 4315
COLLISION [SLURBT]
OCCUR TIMES : 3
RESET
Main Menu
Short Cut
The following operations are available in the alarm status: window change, mode change,
alarm reset, and emergency stop.
To display the ALARM window again when the window is changed during alarm occurrence,
select {SYSTEM INFO} and then {ALARM HISTORY}.
Releasing Alarms
• Minor Alarms
Operation
1
Press [SELECT].
Explanation
Select “RESET” under the ALARM window to release the alarm
status. When using an external input signal (system input), turn
ON the “ALARM RESET” setting.
• Major Alarms
Operation
1
Explanation
Turn OFF the main power sup- If a severe alarm, such as hardware failure occurs, servo power is
ply and remove the cause of
automatically shut off and the manipulator stops. If releasing
the alarm.
does not work, turn OFF the main power and correct the cause of
the alarm.
4-16
4.3 Stop and Restart

Restart After Stop by Alarm
• Prior to restarting the manipulator's operation after it has been stopped
by an alarm, confirm the position of the manipulator by using FWD, etc.,
and make sure that there is no interference between the manipulator
and the workpiece or fixture.
• When an alarm occurs and stops the manipulator during a high-speed
operation of consecutive steps, the manipulator may stop two or three
steps before the displayed step. If the manipulator's operation is
restarted under such conditions, the manipulator may interfere with the
workpiece or fixture.
4.3.4

Others
Temporary Stop by Mode Change
When the play mode is switched to the teach mode during playback, the manipulator stops
immediately.
!Stopped by switching mode
To restart the operation, return to the play mode and perform a start operation.

Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction
When the PAUSE instruction is executed, the manipulator stops operating.
!Robot stops by execution PAUSE command
To restart the operation, perform a start operation. The manipulator restarts from the next
instruction.
4-17
4.4 Modifying Play Speed
4.4
Modifying Play Speed
4.4.1
Speed Override
Speed modifications using the speed override have the following features:
• Speed can be modified during playback.
The job can be played back at various speeds until the play speed is properly adjusted.
• Speed can be increased or decreased by a ratio of the current play speed.
The ratio settings range from 10% to 150% in increments of 1%.
Therefore, it is convenient when, for example, all play speed settings are to be increased by
150% at the same time.
The operation flow override of play speeds is as shown in the following:
4-18
4.4 Modifying Play Speed
Start speed override
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override
(Speed data modify :OFF,specify the ratio)
Start playback
Changes experimentally,
without modifying registered
speed
Adjust the ratio during playback if needed
(1cycle completed)
YES
Reset and playback?
NO
NO
Modify?
YES
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override
(Speed data modify: ON,specify the ratio)
Start playback
Modify play speed simultaneously
(1cycle completed)
End
4-19
Modifies play speed
4.4 Modifying Play Speed

Setting Speed Overrides
Operation
1
Select {UTILITY} under the
menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2
Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
Explanation
The PLAYBACK window becomes the speed override condition.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PLAYBACK
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0004 MOVL V=1500
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=100.00
SPEED ADJUSTMENT MODIFY
Main Menu
3
Select “ON” or “OFF” under
“MODIFY.”
Short Cut
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the data of
the item “MODIFY,” “ON” and “OFF” alternate.
Select “ON” to modify the registered play speed during playback.
When “OFF” is selected, the registered play speed is not modified. To change the play speed temporarily (for example, to experiment with various speeds), select “OFF.”
SPEED ADJUSTMENT MODIFY
4
OFF RATIO 100 %
OFF RATIO 100 %
The number input line appears. Input the override ratio using the
Line up the cursor with the
Numeric keys.
override ratio and move the
cursor up and down to change
SPEED ADJUSTMEN MODIFY
OFF RATIO 100
the ratio.
If you want to input the ratio
number directly, move the cursor to the override ratio and
press [SELECT].
4-20
4.4 Modifying Play Speed

Modifying Play Speed
Operation
1
Set speed override.
2
Playback the manipulator.
NOTE
Explanation
The play speed is increased or decreased in the set ratio. When
setting “MODIFY” to “ON,” the step’s play speed is modified when
each step is reached.
When one cycle is completed by the END instruction, the speed
override setting is released.
• Assuming that the manipulator moves from step 1 to step 2, the play speed of step 2 is
not modified if the speed override is released before reaching step 2.
• When the play speed is changed by speed override, the maximum and minimum speed is
limited by the manipulator.
• When the safety speed operation is commanded with the setting of “MODIFY: ON,” the
manipulator operates at safety speed. However, the play speed in memory is modified
as set using speed override.
• Play speed set by the SPEED instruction is not modified.

Releasing Speed Override Settings
Operation
1
Select {UTILITY} under the
menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2
Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
NOTE
Explanation
The setting of the speed override ratio is released. If it is
released, the speed ratio setting is not displayed on the PLAYBACK window.
The speed override settings are automatically released in the following cases:
• When dry-run speed operation is set.
• When the mode is changed to any mode other than the play mode.
• When an alarm or error occurs.
• When one cycle operation is completed with the END instruction.
• When the power supply is turned OFF.
4-21
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start
4.5
Playback with Reserved Start
4.5.1
Preparation for Reserved Start
In the reserved start function, jobs registered at different stations are played back in the
reserved order using the start buttons on the stations.
Station 3
(Job 3 registered)
Station 1
(Job 1 registered)
Station 2
(Job 2 registered)
For example, in a case where three stations handle three different workpieces, as shown in
the illustration above, the jobs would be registered as follows:
• Job 1 is registered to process workpiece 1 at Station 1
• Job 2 is registered to process workpiece 2 at Station 2
• Job 3 is registered to process workpiece 3 at Station 3
To play back the jobs, prepare workpiece 1 and press the start button on Station 1. The
manipulator executes Job 1. Prepare workpieces 2 and 3 while Job 1 is being executed, and
press the start buttons on Stations 2 and 3. Even if Job 1 is being executed at that time, jobs
on different stations are reserved in the order that the start buttons were pressed, and will be
executed in that order. During playback, the status of the reservation can be checked on the
start reservation window.
4-22
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Enabling Reserved Start
The start button on the station is operative when the reserved start function is enabled, and
the following start operations are disabled.
• [START] on the programming pendant
• Start operation from external input signal (system input)
NOTE The OPERATING CONDITION window is shown only when the security mode is management mode
Operation
1
Select {SETUP} under the
main menu.
2
Select {OPERATE COND}.
Explanation
The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. The screen is
scrolled up/down by the cursor key when it locates at the top/bottom of the items.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
EXTERNAL START
EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH
EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH
PP CYCLE SWITCH
EXTERNAL SERVO ON
CHECK/MACHINE LOCK
MASTER CALLING UP
MASTER JOB CHANGE
RESERVED START
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE
Main Menu
3
Select “RESERVED START.”
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PROHIBIT
PERMIT
Short Cut
Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “PERMIT” and “PROHIBIT”
alternate. Select “PERMIT.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPERATING CONDITION
EXTERNAL START
EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH
EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH
PP CYCLE SWITCH
EXTERNAL SERVO ON
CHECK/MACHINE LOCK
MASTER CALLING UP
MASTER JOB CHANGE
RESERVED START
RESERVED START JOB CHANGE
Main Menu
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
PERMIT
Short Cut
When reserved start is enabled, the external start and the programming pendant start are
NOTE prohibited even if setting is “PERMIT.”
Regardless of the operation cycle selected, it is automatically set to 1 CYCLE.
4-23
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal
Register the start I/O signal as a preparation to perform start operation from the station.
NOTE This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the security
mode is management mode.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {SETUP} under the
main menu.
2
Select {RES. START(CNCT)}. The RESERVED START (CNCT) window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
RESERVED START (CNCT)
START OUT
NO.
START IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main Menu
3
Select “START IN” or “START
OUT” for each station.
Short Cut
The number can now be entered.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
RESERVED START (CNCT)
NO.
START IN START OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
Input signal number and press The input/output signal number is registered.
[ENTER].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
RESERVED START (CNCT)
NO.
START IN
START OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
4-24
UTILITY
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Registering Jobs to Stations
Register the starting job of each station.
This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the setting of
NOTE “RESERVED START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the OPERATING CONDITION window.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
Explanation
The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
 indicates that the input/output number is registered.
 indicates that the input/output number is not registered.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
RESERVED START (JOB)
CONNECTION
NO. JOB NAME
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main Menu
3
Select job name for each station.
Short Cut
The selection dialog box appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
RESERVED START (JOB)
NO. JOB NAME
CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
AA
SETTING START JOB
CANCEL START JOB
4
Select “SETTING START
JOB.”
The JOB LIST window appears.
5
Select a job.
The starting job is registered.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
RESERVED START (JOB)
NO. JOB NAME
CONNECTION
JOB1
1
2
3
4
5
6
4-25
UTILITY
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations
Delete the registered job of each station.
NOTE This operation can be done only when the operation mode is teach mode and the setting of
“RESERVED START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the operation condition display.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
3
Select job name for each station.
The selection dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
RESERVED START (JOB)
CONNECTION
NO. JOB NAME
JOB1
SETTING START JOB
JOB2
CANCEL START JOB
JOB3
JOB4
1
2
3
4
5
6
Main Menu
4
Select “CANCEL START
JOB.”
Short Cut
Registered job is deleted.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
RESERVED START (JOB)
NO. JOB NAME
CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
JOB2
JOB3
JOB4
Main Menu
4-26
Short Cut
UTILITY
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start
4.5.2

Playback from Reserved Start
Start Operation
Operation
1
Set the mode switch to “PLAY.”
2
Press start button on the station.
Explanation
The job registered for the station starts up and the manipulator
performs one cycle operation.
• While the job is being executed, the start button lamp on the station lamps.
NOTE • If the workpiece must be prepared at the station, prepare it before pressing the start button.
• If the start button of another station is pressed during execution of a job at one station, the
job on the station is reserved and prepares to start. Jobs are reserved and executed in
the order that the start buttons are pressed.
• When a job is reserved, the start button lamp on the station blinks.
• No station job is reserved when it is being executed even if its start button is pressed.
• To suspend a job being executed, perform the Hold operation.
SUPPLE
-MENT
Reservations are cancelled when the start button is pressed again during the job reservation operation.
4-27
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Checking Job Reservation Status
The job reservation status during playback can be checked.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {RES. STATUS}.
Explanation
The RESERVATION STATUS window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
RESERVATION STATUS
STATUS
NO. JOB NAME
1
2
3
4
5
6
JOB1
JOB2
JOB3
JOB4
UTILITY
START IN
STARTING
RESERVE1
RESERVE2
RESERVE3
(1)
(2)
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1) STATUS
Reservation status is displayed.
STARTING: Indicates the station currently working.
STOP: Indicates any station where work has been temporarily
stopped by a hold operation.
RESERVE1,RESERVE2,...: Indicates the order in which jobs
have been reserved for start.
(2) START IN
Input signal status is displayed.
“”: Input signal ON
“”: Input signal OFF
4-28
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start

Resetting Job Reservation
NOTE If “STARTING” is displayed, the job cannot be reset.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} on the RESERVATION STATUS window.
2
Select {RESET RESERVATION} or {RESET ALL}.
Explanation
When {RESET RESERVATION} is selected, job reservation
stated to “RESERVE” is reset.
When {RESET ALL} is selected, job reservation stated to
“STOP” and “RESERVE” is reset.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
RESERVATION STATUS
NO. JOB NAME
STATUS
1
2
3
4
5
6
UTILITY
START IN
JOB1
JOB2
JOB3
JOB4
Main Menu
Short Cut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Clear data?
YES
3
NO
Select “YES.”
All job reservations are reset automatically in the following conditions:
NOTE • When the reserved start sets to “PROHIBIT.” (When “RESERVED START” is set to “PROHIBIT” on the OPERATING CONDITION window.)
• When another job is called or an edit operation is performed.
4-29
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start
4.5.3
Hold Operation
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion. It can be performed by the following
buttons or signal.
• [HOLD] on the programming pendant
• External Input Signal (system input)
• Hold button for the station axis
[HOLD] on the Programming Pendant

Hold
Operation
1
Explanation
Press [HOLD] on the program- The manipulator stops temporarily.
ming pendant.
The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD] button is held down.
Release
1
Operation
Explanation
Press the start button on the
suspended station.
The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it
was stopped,.
Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
Operation
1
Explanation
Input ON signal to the external The manipulator stops temporarily.
input (system input) specified
External holding
for hold operation.
The hold lamp for the external output signal lights.
The [HOLD] lamp on the programming pendant lights and the
[START] lamp turns OFF.
Release
Operation
1
Explanation
Input OFF signal to the exter- Hold is released.
nal input (system input) speci- To continue the operation, press the start button on the susfied for hold operation.
pended station. The manipulator restarts its operation from the
position where it was stopped.
4-30
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start
Hold at the Station

Hold
Operation
1
Press the hold button on the
station.
Explanation
The manipulator stops temporarily.
External holding
Release
1
Operation
Explanation
Press the hold button on the
suspended station.
Hold is released.
Press the start button on the station, then the manipulator restarts
its operation from the position where it was stopped.
SUPPLE
-MENT
Pressing the start button on a station that is not in Hold status does not start manipulator
operation. The job registered for the station is reserved or the reservation, if it has been
made, is canceled.
4-31
4.6 Displaying Job Stack
4.6
Displaying Job Stack
During execution of the series of jobs that combined with CALL or JUMP instructions, the job
stack can be displayed to check where the current job is and how many jobs left.
Stack Level 3
Stack Level 2
Stack Level 1
Stack Level 4
Job call
Job A
Job call
Job B
Job call
Job C
Return
Job D
Return
Job call
Return
SUPPLE
-MENT
Job calls can be used for up to 8 stack levels. (Up to 10 from NS3.00)
Operation
1
Select {DISPLAY} under the
menu on the PLAYBACK window.
Explanation
The pull-down menu appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PLAYBACK
CYCLE TIME
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
JOB STACK
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
DISPLAY STEP NO.
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0004 MOVL V=1500
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0006 CALL JOB:JOB B
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
2
Select {JOB STACK}.
The job stack status dialog box appears. To close the job stack
status dialog box, select {DISPLAY} and then {JOB STACK}
under the menu again.
DATA
EDIT
PLAYBACK
JOB NAME : TEST01
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0002 MOVL V=1500
0003 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0004 MOVL V=1500
0005 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0006 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=100.00
DISPLAY
UTILITY
STEP NO. : 0003
TOOL : 00
JOB STACK
1:MASTER
2:JOB-A
3:JOB-B
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
For above example, the playback of Job C is being executed and
the Job C is called from Job B. Also, the Job B is called from Job
A.
4-32
5 Editing Jobs
This section explains how to manage the jobs without moving the manipulator. Copying,
deleting, and modifying of the jobs can be done in the teach mode only. Other operations can
be done in any mode.
NOTE Edit operations are restricted when the edit lock is applied.
NOTE
Editing Move Instructions
See " 3 Teaching " for basic information on editing move instructions.
It is not possible to add, delete, or modify move instructions which have position data. See
" 3.4 Modifying Steps " for details.
The following MOV instruction edit operations are explained in this section:
For move instructions:
• Insertion, deletion, or modification of additional items
• Modification of interpolation type or play speed for move instructions
• Setting, modification, or deletion of UNTIL statements (interruption conditions based
on input signals)
• Setting and deletion of NWAIT instructions
For move instructions using position variables:
• Insertion and deletion of move instruction.
5-1
5.1 Copying Jobs
5.1
Copying Jobs
This operation is used to copy registered jobs and use them to create new jobs. It can be
done using either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
5.1.1
Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window
On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job becomes the copy source job.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
3
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
Select {JOB} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
JOB NAME:
JOB-A
MASTER
JOB
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
RENAME JOB
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003
0OVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
CREATE NEW JOB
4
Select {COPY JOB} under the
pull-down menu.
5
Input the new job name.
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It
is possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
> JOB-B
SUPPLE
-MENT
See " 1.2.6 Character Input " for information on letter input operations.
5-2
5.1 Copying Jobs
Operation
6
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process
is cancelled.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SET B001 1
0003
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
Copy?
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006
WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON YES
NO
0007
MOVL V=880.0
0008
MOVL V=880.0
0009
MOVL V=880.0
0010
DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011
DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012
DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu
5-3
ShortCut
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
5.1 Copying Jobs
5.1.2
Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the copy source job from the registered jobs and specify the
copy destination directory.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the copy
source job.
4
Select {JOB} under the
menu.
5
Select {COPY JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
JOB
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
ShortCut
EDIT
Set tool mass data
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB
TEST3A-!
TEST02
CREATE NEW JOB
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
6
Input the new job name.
The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area.
It is possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
> JOB-B
SUPPLE
-MENT
See " 1.2.6 Character Input " for information on letter input operations.
5-4
5.1 Copying Jobs
Operation
7
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process is cancelled.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SET B001 1
0003
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
Copy?
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006
WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON YES
NO
0007
MOVL V=880.0
0008
MOVL V=880.0
0009
MOVL V=880.0
0010
DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011
DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012
DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu
5-5
ShortCut
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
5.2 Deleting Jobs
5.2
Deleting Jobs
This operation is used to delete jobs that are registered on the NX100. It can be performed in
either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
5.2.1
Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window
On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job is deleted.
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3
Select {JOB} from the menu.
The pull-down menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
: JOB-A
CALL
MASTER JOB
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
CONTROL GROUP: R1
CREATE NEW JOB
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
RENAME JOB
0002
SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DELETE JOB
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
4
Select {DELETE JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
When “YES” is selected, the edit job is deleted. When deletion is
completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
When “NO” is selected, the job deletion is cancelled.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SET B001 1
0003
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
Delete?
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006
WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON YES
NO
0007
MOVL V=880.0
0008
MOVL V=880.0
0009
MOVL V=880.0
0010
DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011
DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012
DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu
5-6
ShortCut
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
5.2 Deleting Jobs
5.2.2
Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the job to be deleted from the list of the registered jobs.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
TEST03
TEST
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the job to
be deleted.
4
Select {JOB} from the menu.
TEST3A
TEST01
ShortCut
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB
TEST3A-!
TEST02
CREATE NEW JOB
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
DELETE JOB
5
Select {DELETE JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
Delete?
YES
Main Menu
NO
ShortCut
If “NO” or [CANCEL] is selected, the job deletion is cancelled and
the JOB LIST window appears.
6
Select “YES.”
SUPPLE
-MENT
To select all the registered jobs at a time, select {EDIT} from the menu and then select
“SELECT ALL.”
5-7
5.3 Modifying Job Names
5.3
Modifying Job Names
This operation is used to modify the name of a job that is registered. The operation can be
performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST window.
5.3.1
Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
3
Select {JOB} from the menu.
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
The pull-down menu appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
JOB
NAME:
CALL
MASTER
JOBJOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
RENAME
JOB B000 0
0001 SET
0002 SET B001 1
COPY JOB
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
CREATE NEW JOB
4
Select {RENAME JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
5-8
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
5.3 Modifying Job Names
Operation
5
Input the job name.
Explanation
Input the new job name on the input area.
The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
SUPPLE
-MENT
See " 1.2.6 Character Input " for information on letter input operations.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SET B001 1
0003
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
0006
WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
0007
MOVL V=880.0
0008
MOVL V=880.0
0009
MOVL V=880.0
0010
DOUT OGH#(14) B003
0011
DOUT OT#(5) ON
0012
DOUT OT#(6) ON
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
JOB-B
Main Menu
6
Press [ENTER].
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the process is cancelled.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002 Rename?
WAIT IF IN#(5)=ON
MOVL V=880.0
NO
YES
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
DOUT OGH#(14) B003
DOUT OT#(5) ON
DOUT OT#(6) ON
Main Menu
5-9
ShortCut
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
5.3 Modifying Job Names
5.3.2
Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the job whose name is to be modified from the list of the registered jobs.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB LIST
TEST3A-!
TEST02
TEST03
TEST
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the name
to be changed.
4
Select {JOB} from the menu.
JOB
TEST3A
TEST01
ShortCut
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SELECT JOB
CALL MASTER JOB
TEST3A-!
TEST02
CREATE NEW JOB
TEST03
TEST
TEST3A
TEST01
RENAME JOB
COPY JOB
5
Select {RENAME JOB} under
the pull-down menu.
6
Enter the job name and press
[ENTER].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Rename?
YES
7
Select “YES.”
5-10
NO
5.4 Editing Comments
5.4
Editing Comments
Comments of up to 32 characters can be affixed to jobs to identify them more specifically.
Comments are displayed and edited on the JOB HEADER window.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {DISPLAY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Select {JOB HEADER}.
Explanation
The JOB HEADER window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST
:
COMM.
:
DATE
:
CAPACITY
:
LINES
:
STEPS
:
EDIT LOCK
TO SAVE TO FD :
:
GROUP SET
2003/05/20 12:00
1024 BYTES
30 LINES
20 STEPS
OFF
NOT DONE
R1
5
Select “COMM.”
The window for character input appears.
6
Input comments.
For jobs that are already registered, comments are displayed on
the input area. It is possible to partially change comments to
enter new comments.
THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
SUPPLE
-MENT
7
Press [ENTER].
See " 1.2.6 Character Input " for information on
character input operations.
The input area comment is registered and is displayed in the
“COMM.” area on the JOB HEADER window.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST
: THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
COMM.
: 2003/05/20 12:00
DATE
:
1024 BYTES
CAPACITY
:
30 LINES
LINES
:
20 STEPS
STEPS
:
OFF
EDIT LOCK
NOT DONE
TO SAVE TO FD :
:
R1
GROUP SET
5-11
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
5.5
Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
In order to prevent inadvertent changes in registered jobs or data, it is possible to apply an
edit lock to individual jobs. When a job is protected from editing, the job cannot be edited or
deleted. Edit lock is set and cancelled on the JOB HEADER window.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {DISPLAY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Select {JOB HEADER}.
Explanation
The JOB HEADER window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB HEADER
JOB NAME: TEST01
COMM.
DATE
CAPACITY
LINES
STEPS
EDIT LOCK
5
Select “EDIT LOCK” and set
the edit prohibit.
: THIS JOB IS TEST JOB
: 2003/05/20 12:00
:
1024 BYTES
:
30 LINES
:
20 STEPS
:
OFF
Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“ON” (edit disabled) and “OFF” (edit enabled).
5-12
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
5.6
Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
It is possible to set conditions to allow changes of position data only, in jobs which are locked.
Operation
1
Select {SETUP} under the
main menu.
2
Select {TEACHING COND}.
Explanation
The TEACHING CONDITION window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
TEACHING CONDITION
RECT/CYLINDRICAL
LANGUAGE LEVEL
INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING
MOVE INSTRUCTION SET
STEP ONLY CHANGING
Main Menu
RECT
SUBSET
VALID
STEP
PROHIBIT
ShortCut
TEACHING CONDITION window is shown only
NOTE when the security mode is edit mode or management mode.
3
Select “STEP ONLY CHANGING.”
4
Press [SELECT].
Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“PROHIBIT” and “PERMIT.”
5-13
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
6 Convenient Functions
6.1
One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
The direct open function immediately shows the JOB CONTENT window or condition file contents of a job called with the CALL instruction. Move the cursor to the desired job name or
condition file name and simply press the direct open key
Direct
open
to display the contents of the
file. This function can be used for the following window:
• JOB CONTENT window for a job name directly specified by a CALL instruction
• CONDITION FILE window for a file name directly specified by a work instruction
• COMMAND POS window for a move instruction
• I/O window with an I/O instruction (when I/O numbers are specified)
6-1
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
<Example> Example Using Direct Open
DATA
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
COMMAND POS
INTR:**********
SPD: 558 cm/min
[CMD]
TOOL: **
[CURR]
TOOL: **
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0008
MONJ VJ=50.00
0009
DOUT OT#(1) ON
0010
WVON WEV#(2)
0011
CALL JOB:JOB-C
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
*
*
*
*
*
*
Main Menu
ShortCut
In the 8th line
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
Direct
open
In the 9th line
0
0
0
0
0
0
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
!Turn on servo power
COMMAND POS window
Direct
open
DATA
EDIT
USER OUTPUT
GROUP
OUT#C01
OUT#C02
OUT#C03
OUT#C04
OUT#C05
OUT#C06
OUT#C07
OUT#C08
DISPLAY
OG#01
UTILITY
0: DEC. 00: HEX.








#1010
#1011
#1012
#1013
#1014
#1015
#1016
#1017
In the 10th line
Direct
open
Main Menu
ShortCut
!Turn on servo power
USER OUTPUT window
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
WEAVING CONDITION
WEAVING COND NO.: 1/16
MODE
SMOOTH
SPEED
FREQUENCY
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
ANGLE
TRAVEL ANGLE
<TIMER MODE>
In the 11th line
Direct
open
Main Menu
SINGLE
ON
FREQ
3.5 Hz
2.000 mm
10.000 mm
10.000 mm
45.00
0.00
ShortCut
!Turn on servo power
WEAVING CONDITION window
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: JOB-C
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
END
Main Menu
ShortCut
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
!Turn on servo power
JOB CONTENT window for "JOB-C"
Operation
1
In the JOB CONTENT window, move the cursor to the
job name or condition file
for which the window is to
be displayed.
2
Press the direct open key
Direct
open
.
Explanation
This key lamp lights and the JOB CONTENT window or the condition file window appears. When the direct open key
Direct
open
is
pressed once more, the key lamp turns OFF, and the window
returns to the former JOB CONTENT window.
6-2
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
• The direct open function cannot be used again while a directly opened window is shown.
NOTE • If another window is selected while the direct open function is effective, the function is
automatically cancelled and the lamp on the direct open key goes out.
• Once another JOB CONTENT window is opened by the direct open function, the source
job cannot be continuously operated. (Stopped until the opened JOB CONTENT window
is closed.)
6.2
Parallel Shift Function
6.2.1
Function Overview
Parallel shift refers to the shifting of an object from a fixed position in such a way that all points
within the object move an equal distance. In the model for parallel shift shown in the following,
the shift value can be defined as the distance L (three-dimensional coordinate displacement).
The parallel shift function is relevant to the actual operation of the manipulator because it can
be used to reduce the amount of work involved in teaching by shifting a taught path (or position).
L
In the example in the figure below, the taught position A is shifted in increments of the distance L (this is actually a three-dimensional XYZ displacement that can be recognized by the
robot) in order to enable the operation that was taught at position A to also be performed at
positions B through G.
B
A
C
D
L
Teaching position
6-3
E
F
G
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
The block from the SFTON to the SFTOF instructions is subject to the shift operation.
Line (Step)
Instruction
0000
NOP
0001(001)
MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002(002)
MOVL V=138
0003
SFTON PUF# (1)
0004(003)
MOVL V=138
0005(004)
MOVL V=138
0006(005)
MOVL V=138
0007
SFTOF
0008(006)
MOVL V=138
1
2
Shifted block
3
4
5
6
When shifting an entire series of operations, the range to be shifted by the shift instruction can
be set using the method indicated above, but the method shown in the following, in which just
the part to be shifted is made into a separate job, can also be used.
SFTON P 
Job to perform the shifting
CALL JOB: 
SFTOF
6-4
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
6.2.2

Setting the Shift Value
Registering Position Variables
The NX100 has 128 position variables (P000 to P127); these can be used to define parallel
shift values. When using the parallel shift function, it is necessary to measure the distance
between the teaching point and the shift destination position (XYZ displacement of each coordinate) and then register this in advance as a position variable.
When the shift instruction is executed in playback, the operation is performed at a location
shifted from the taught position by the amount registered for the specified position variable.
The POSITION VARIABLE window is shown in the following.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT
R1:X
-200.000
Y
0.000
Z
500.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
Main Menu
ShortCut
NAME:
TOOL: 00
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
Amount of
shift (mm)
S>=180
R>=180
T< 180
Amount of wrist
displacement (° )
!Turn on servo power
SFTON P000

Coordinate Systems
The shift value for parallel shift is X, Y, and Z increment in each coordinates. There are four
coordinates: base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, and user coordinates. In
systems with no servo track, the base coordinates and robot coordinates are the same.
Tool coordinates
Robot coordinates
User coordinates
Base coordinates
User coordinates
6-5
6.2 Parallel Shift Function

Setting the Shift Value
When setting the shift value for the position variables, use the current position (coordinates) of
the manipulator in the window.
EDIT
DATA
CUR POS
COORDINATE
R1:
X
Y
Z
<ROBOT TYPE>
FRONT
UP
NO FLOP
DISPLAY
DATA
UTILITY
USER COORD #01
5.360 mm
66.080 mm
316.940 mm
CUR POS
COORDINATE
TOOL: 00
Rx
Ry
Rz
EDIT
-179.91 deg
-2.17 deg
-102.89 deg
R1:
X
Y
Z
<ROBOT TYPE>
FRONT
UP
NO FLIP
S>= 180
R>= 180
T< 180
DISPLAY
UTILITY
USER COORD #01
105.360 mm
66.080 mm
416.940 mm
Rx
Ry
Rz
TOOL: 00
-179.91 deg
-2.17 deg
-102.89 deg
S>= 180
R>= 180
T< 180
Position to be shifted
Teaching position
(Move the manipulator using the programming pendant.)
Differences are assumed to be shift amounts.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000 ROBOT
R1:X
-100.000
Y
0.000
Z
-100.000
Rx
0.00
Ry
0.00
Rz
0.00
Main Menu
NAME:
TOOL: 00
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S>=180
R>=180
T< 180
ShortCut
The shift value is the X, Y, and Z difference between the shift position and teaching position
and the difference in angular displacement RX, RY, And RZ (normally set at “0”). If shifting is
executed at equal pitch intervals, for example for palletizing, find the difference between the
teaching position and the final shift position, then divide by the number of pitch intervals (number of divisions) to calculate the shift value per pitch.
L1
L2
L2=
L1
Number of pitches
Final shift position
Teaching position
The posture of the wrist is defined by the angular displacement of the coordinates of the wrist
axes. Consequently, if the shift value is specified with X, Y, and Z only (RX, RY, RZ=0), the
wrist is shifted while maintaining the same posture as at the teaching point. Since shifting is
normally performed without changing the posture, there is no need to specify an angular displacement for the wrist. The motion when a parallel shift is performed is shown in the following:
6-6
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
Shift without changing the wrist posture
(RX,RY,RZ=0)
Teaching posture
Shift with wrist posture change
(RX,RY,RZ ≠ 0)
Shift value
The shift value is calculated on the position data window for the coordinates in which the shift
is performed. Since this is normally performed in the user coordinates, the position data window for the user coordinates is used.
6.2.3
Registering Shift Instructions
To register the instruction, move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window
during teach mode as follows:
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Address area
Instruction area
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST01
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
NOP
SET B000 0
SET B001 1
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
DOUT OGH#(13) B002
DOUT OT#(41) ON
MOVL C00002 V=880.0 CV#(1) CTP=0.662
DOUT OT#(44) ON
TIMER T=3.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
MOVL V=880.0
Main Menu
3
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
Move the cursor to the
address area.
6-7
ShortCut
!Turn on servo power
6.2 Parallel Shift Function

SFTON Instruction
This is the instruction that starts a parallel shift.
Operation
1
2
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before where the
SFTON instruction is to be
registered.
Press [INFORM LIST].
Explanation
0020
0021
0022
Line immediately
before where
SFTON instruction
is to be registered.
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=138
The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON
SHIFT
SFTOF
OTHER
MSHIFT
SAME
PRIOR
3
Select {SHIFT}.
4
Select the SFTON instruction. The SFTON instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5
Modify the additional items or
number values as required.
<When Nothing is to be Changed>
Proceed to Step 6.
<When Editing Additional Items>
• Adding or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
SFTON P000
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press
[SELECT] to display the input buffer line.
P=
SFTON
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number
value in the input buffer line.
6-8
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
Operation
5
(cont’d)
Explanation
• Adding the coordinate system in which the shift is performed
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and
press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
SFTON P001
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SFTON
P-VAR (RESULT)
COORDINATE
Main Menu
: P000
: BF
ShortCut
Line up the cursor with ”UNUSED” and press [SELECT]. The
selection dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coordinate system to be added, and press [SELECT].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SFTON
P-VAR ROBOT
COORDINATE
Main Menu
:
: BF
RF
TF
UF#( )
UNUSED
ShortCut
After the coordinate system addition is completed, press
[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6
Press [INSERT] and then
[ENTER].
The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where SFTON
instruction is
registered.
6-9
0020
0021
0022
MOVL V=138
SFTON P001 BF
MOVL V=138
6.2 Parallel Shift Function

SFTOF Instruction
This is the instruction that ends a parallel shift.
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before where the
SFTOF instruction is to be registered.
2
Press [INFORM LIST].
3
Select {SHIFT}.
4
Select the SFTOF instruction.
Explanation
0030
0031
Line immediately
before where
SFTOF instruction
is to be registered.
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=138
The instruction list dialog box appears.
The SFTOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
SFTOF
5

Press [INSERT] and then
[ENTER].
The SFTOF instruction is registered.
0030
0031
0032
MOVL V=138
SFTOF
MOVL V=138
MSHIFT Instruction
When a parallel shift of the wrist posture is attempted, the manipulator may not be shifted to
the target posture in the following cases.
• Posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified to the shift value set by the user.
• When a displacement between two points is calculated using an INFORM operating
instruction (ADD instruction, SUB instruction, etc.), and a posture displacement (Rx, Ry,
Rz) is specified in the shift value.
In such cases, the MSHIFT instruction can be used to automatically calculate the optimum
shift value for an operation to reach the target shift position and posture. With an MSHIFT
instruction, the shift value between the reference position and target position (shift position)
when parallel shift is performed is determined in the specified coordinate system, and set as
the specified position variable.
6-10
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
Operation
1
2
Move the cursor to the line
immediately before where the
MSHIFT instruction is to be
registered.
Press [INFORM LIST].
Explanation
Line immediately
before where
MSHIFT instruction
is registered.
0003
0004
0005
MOVJ VJ=10.00
GETS PX001 $PX000
END
The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON
SHIFT
SFTOF
OTHER
MSHIFT
SAME
PRIOR
3
Select {SHIFT}.
4
Select the MSHIFT instruction. The MSHIFT instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5
Change the number data or
additional items as required.
<When Nothing is to be Changed>
Proceed to Step 6.
<When Editing Additional Items>
• Adding or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press
[SELECT] to display the input buffer line.
PX =
MSHIFT
0 BF PX001 PX002
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number
value in the input buffer line.
6-11
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
Operation
5
(cont’d)
Explanation
• Changing the coordinate system in which the shift is performed
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and
press [SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
MSHIFT
P-VAR (RESULT)
COORDINATE
P-VAR (BASE)
P-VAR (DEST)
Main Menu
: P000
: BF
: PX001
: PX002
ShortCut
Line up the cursor with “BF” and press [SELECT]. The selection
dialog box appears.
Line up the cursor with the coordinate system to be changed,
and press [SELECT].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
MSHIFT
P-VAR (RESULT)
COORDINATE
P-VAR (BASE)
P-VAR (DEST)
Main Menu
:
: BF
BF
: PX001
RF
: PX002
TF
UF#( )
MTF
ShortCut
After the coordinate system modification is complete, press
[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6
Press [INSERT] and then
[ENTER].
The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where
MSHIFT is
registered.
6-12
0003
0004
0005
MOVJ VJ=10.00
GETS PX001 $PX000
MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
6.2.4
Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function
• If the shift function is cancelled through a job editing operation after
execution of a parallel shift instruction, the job must be started again
from the beginning.
Because no shift is performed when the operation is restarted, there is a possibility of
interference between the workpiece and fixture.
If any of the following operations are performed after executing a parallel shift instruction, the
shift function is cancelled.
• Job editing operation (changing, deleting, adding)
• Job copy, job name change
• Registering a new job, deleting a job, or modifying a selected job
• Restart after the alarm occurs
• When control power is turned OFF
NOTE The parallel shift function remains in effect even if the control power supply is turned OFF.
6-13
6.2 Parallel Shift Function
6.2.5

Examples of Use
Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction
Workpiece Stacking Operation
Line
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
Instruction
NOP
Make the first shift value zero.
SET B000 0
SUB P000 P000
*A
Step 1
MOVJ
Step 2
MOVL
’Gripping workpiece
Step 3
MOVL
Step 4
MOVL
SFTON P000 UF#(1) Shift start
Shift position Step 5
MOVL
’Releasing workpiece
Shift end
SFTOF
Add the shift value for the next operation.
ADD P000 P001
Step 6
MOVL
Step 7
MOVL
INC B000
JUMP *A IF B00<6
SFTON P000 UF#(1)
SFTOF
SUB P000 P001
1,7
Since the shift data is retained in memory,
the same data can be used (with subtraction
instead of addition) to perform a workpiece
unloading operation.
3
4,6
2
Workpiece
5
6-14
6.2 Parallel Shift Function

Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction
Line
Instruction
Explanation
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=20.00
Move the manipulator to the reference position.
0002 GETS PX000 $PX000
Set the reference position as position variable P000.
0003 MOVJ VJ=20.00
Move the manipulator to the target position.
0004 GETS PX001 $PX000
Set the target position as position variable P001.
0005 MSHlFT PX010 BF PX000 PX001 Set shift value and set it as position variable P010.
0006 END
6-15
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6.3
6.3.1
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Function Overview
If the manipulator and base positions are moved after a job has been taught, the entire job has
to be modified. The parallel shift conversion function shortens the modification time required in
cases like this by shifting all steps of the job by the same value to create a new job.
When parallel shift conversion is performed, all job steps are shifted by the same value.
Steps Outside the P-point Maximum Envelope
NOTE “/OV” is displayed for steps which result in a position outside the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator. When the position is corrected, “/OV” display disappears.
Position Variable
Position variables are not subject to parallel shift job conversion.
Not Converted Job
The following jobs cannot be converted. If conversion is attempted, no operation is performed.
• Jobs without any group axes
• Concurrent jobs (optional)
If a job name after conversion is not specified when executing parallel shift job conversion,
NOTE the position data of the job is shifted and converted, then the data is overwritten with a new
position data after the shift. Be sure to save the job in the external memory device or create the same job by copying before executing conversion.
6-16
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6.3.2
Coordinate Systems for Conversion
When performing parallel shift job conversion, it is necessary to specify the coordinate systems in which the conversion is to be performed. The coordinate system can be selected from
the following:
• Base coordinates
• Robot coordinates
• Tool coordinates
• User coordinates (24 types)
• Master tool coordinates (R*+R* job)
• Joint coordinates
In the case of an ordinary job for which group axes are registered, shift conversion is performed in accordance with the selected coordinate system. The relationship between group
combinations and coordinates are shown in the following table.
(1) to (4) in the table are followed by their explanations.
Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at Conversion
Group
Combination
in Job
R
Explanation
Usable Coordinate System
Shift is performed on basis of selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates, pulse
coordinates
R(B)
S
Shift is performed on basis of selected coordinates.
(1)Base
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the specified amount and the TCP
of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount in the
base coordinates.
(2)Robot
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the specified amount.
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount
in the robot coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
(3)Tool
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the specified amount.
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount
in the tool coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
(4)User
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the specified amount and the TCP
of the manipulator is shifted by the specified amount in the
user coordinates.
(5)Pulse
Coordinates
The taught position of each axis is shifted by the specified
amount on the basis of pulse values.
Shift is performed on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
6-17
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at Conversion
Group
Combination
in Job
R+S
Explanation
Usable Coordinate System
The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates.
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates, pulse
coordinates
R(B)+S
The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates, as in (1) to (5) above.
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless of the coordinates.
R+R
Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates, master
tool coordinates*1, pulse coordinates
R(B)+R(B)
*1
Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinate system, as in (1) to (5)
above. Two base axes are also shifted.
In the master tool coordinates, conversion only occurs at the “slave” from the standpoint of the SMOV instruction.
6-18
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
(1) Base Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the base coordinates.
Base coordinates
A
B
Base
(2) Robot Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B. The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the robot coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Robot coordinates
Base coordinates
A
B
6-19
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
(3) Tool Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the tool coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Base coordinates
Tool coordinates
A
B
(4) User Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted by A in the user coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
User coordinates
Base coordinates
A
B
6-20
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Converting R*+R* Jobs with Master Tool Coordinates
R*+R* coordinated jobs can be subjected to parallel shift job conversion in the master tool
coordinates. Only steps taken at the “slave” from the standpoint of the SMOV instruction are
subject to conversion (i.e. the steps of R2 in the figure below).
R2 (Slave)
R1 (Master)
X-axis
Y-axis
Master tool coordinates
Z-axis
Displays R2
Displays R1
1
0001 MOV
+MOV
0002 MOV
+MOV
0003 SMOV
+MOV
0004 SMOV
+MOV
0005 SMOV
+MOV
0006 MOV
+MOV
6
5
2
3
4
Motion path
after conversion
6-21
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6.3.3

Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion
Window Display
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOURCE JOB
STEP SECTION
DESTINATION JOB
COORDINATES
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
EXECUTE
:JOB1
: 001 → 010
: *******
: PULSE
: TEACH SETTING
0
0
0
0
0
0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
CANCEL
(1)SOURCE JOB
Selects the job before conversion. The job which is shown in the JOB CONTENT window is set initially. To change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the job name and press [SELECT]. The JOB LIST window appears. Select the
desired job.
(2)STEP SECTION (Start Step  End Step)
Specifies the step section of the source job. All the steps are set initially. If there is no steps in the
source job, “***” is displayed. To change the section, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the step section indication and press [SELECT]. The input buffer line appears.
Input the step number and press [ENTER].
(3)DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job. If this is not specified ( “********” is displayed), the source job is overwritten with a job after conversion. If the converted job is specified, the source job is copied and converted. To change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the converted job name indication and press [SELECT]. The character input line
appears. The source job name is displayed in the input line. To enter job name without using the
source job name, press [CANCEL] and then input a job name.
(4)OORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. Move the cursor to the coordinates name and press [SELECT].
The selection dialog box appears. Select the desired coordinates.
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears. Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
(5)BASE POINT
Calculates the difference by the two teaching points as a shift value.
(6)SHIFT VALUE
The axis shown is varied according to the setting of “coordinates” above.
Move the cursor to the input box and press [SELECT] to directly input the shift value.
If the shift value is calculated by the two teaching points, the difference is shown as a shift value.
6-22
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation

There are two methods for specifying the shift value.
• Directly input the shift value by numerical value.
• Calculate the shift value by teaching the original base point and converted base point.
SUPPLE
-MENT
The method using position variables by parameter setting is described in " 6.3.4 Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables " other than above two methods.
The following are the operation procedures by each setting of shift value for parallel shift job
conversion.
Numerical Value Input
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {UTILITY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Select {PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOURCE JOB
STEP SECTION
DESTINATION JOB
COORDINATES
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
EXECUTE
Main Menu
5
Specify the conversion items.
Specify each item.
6-23
:JOB1
: 001 → 010
: *******
: PULSE
: TEACH SETTING
0
0
0
0
0
0
CANCEL
ShortCut
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Operation
6
Explanation
Select the shift value to be set. The number can be entered.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
: JOB1
SOUCE JOB
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: JOB2
DESTINATION JOB
: ROBOT
COORDINATES
: TEACH SETTING
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:X
0.000
Y
0.000
Z
0.000
EXECUTE
Main Menu
7
Type the shift value using the
Numeric keys.
8
Press [ENTER].
CANCEL
ShortCut
The shift value is set.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
: JOB1
SOURCE JOB
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: JOB2
DESTINATION JOB
: ROBOT
COORDINATES
: TEACH SETTING
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:X
200.000
Y
0
Z
0
EXECUTE
Main Menu
6-24
CANCEL
ShortCut
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Operation
9
Explanation
Display the PARALLEL SHIFT The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is
JOB window.
not specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed. The
Select “EXECUTE.”
JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is completed.
When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
: JOB1
SOURCE JOB
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: JOB2
DESTINATION JOB
COORDINATES
Overwrite?
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:X
230.000
NO
YES
Y
20.000
Z
80.000
CANCEL
EXECUTE
Main Menu
ShortCut
NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is
suspended.
6-25
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Calculation by Teaching
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {UTILITY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Select {PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
SOURCE JOB
STEP SECTION
DESTINATION JOB
COORDINATES
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:S
L
U
R
B
T
EXECUTE
Main Menu
:JOB1
: 001 → 010
: *******
: PULSE
: TEACH SETTING
0
0
0
0
0
0
CANCEL
ShortCut
5
Specify the conversion items.
Specify each item.
6
Display the PARALLEL SHIFT The BASE POINT window appears.
JOB window.
Select “TEACH SETTING” in
EDIT
UTILITY
DATA
DISPLAY
the item of “BASE POINT.”
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
BASE POINT (SRC)
R1:X
0.000
R1:Y
0.000
R1:Z
0.000
EXECUTE
Main Menu
7
Select “BASE POINT(SRC).”
8
Move the manipulator to the
original base point by the axis
keys.
6-26
BASE POINT (DEST)
R1:X
0.000
R1:Y
0.000
R1:Z
0.000
CANCEL
ShortCut
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Operation
9
Press [MODIFY] and
[ENTER].
Explanation
The original base point is set.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
BASE POINT (SRC)
R1:X 230.000
R1:Y
40.000
R1:Z
20.000
EXECUTE
Main Menu
BASE POINT (DEST)
R1:X
0.000
R1:Y
0.000
R1:Z
0.000
CANCEL
ShortCut
10 Select “BASE POINT(DEST).”
11 Move the manipulator to the
converted base point by the
axis keys.
12 Press [MODIFY] and
[ENTER].
The conversion base point is set.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
R1:X
R1:Y
R1:Z
BASE POINT (SRC)
BASE POINT (DEST)
R1:X 460.000
230.000
R1:Y
60.000
40.000
R1:Z 100.000
20.000
EXECUTE
Main Menu
13 Touch “EXECUTE.”
CANCEL
ShortCut
The difference is calculated by the two teaching points and set as
a shift value.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
: JOB1
SOUCE JOB
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: JOB2
DESTINATION JOB
: ROBOT
COORDINATES
: TEACH SETTING
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:X
230.000
Y
20.000
Z
80.000
EXECUTE
Main Menu
6-27
CANCEL
ShortCut
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Operation
Explanation
14 Display the PARALLEL SHIFT The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is
JOB window.
not specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed. The
Select “EXECUTE.”
JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is completed.
When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
: JOB1
SOURCE JOB
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: JOB2
DESTINATION JOB
COORDINATES
Overwrite?
BASE POINT
<SHIFT VALUE>
R1:X
230.000
NO
YES
Y
20.000
Z
80.000
CANCEL
EXECUTE
Main Menu
ShortCut
NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is
suspended.
6-28
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6.3.4
Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables
The shift value can be specified using position variables by parameter settings.
Parameter S2C514: SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL SHIFT JOB CONVERSION
0: Shift value by numeral/teaching (Initial setting)
1: Position variable shift value

Window DIsplay
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
#P***
#EX***
TEST
SINGLE
ROBOT
COMMON
FILE NO.
SHIFT JOB NAME
MODE
COORDINATES
CONV. METHOD
EXECUTE
Main Menu
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
CANCEL
ShortCut
(1)FILE NO.
Specifies position variables.
(2)SHIFT JOB NAME
The job which was shown in the JOB CONTENT window is set initially. To change the job, perform
the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the conversion job name and press [SELECT]. The JOB LIST window appears.
Move the cursor to the desired job and press [SELECT]. The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window reappears, and the job name which was selected is shown.
(3)MODE
Specifies the conversion mode.
SINGLE (INDEPENDENT JOB CONVERSION)
Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes jobs called by JUMP or CALL
instructions. Related jobs are not converted.
RELATIVE (RELATIVE JOB CONVERSION)
Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions) are converted.
For details of each conversion mode, refer to " Jobs Targeted for Conversion ".
(4)COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. Move the cursor to the coordinates name and press [SELECT].
The selection dialog box appears. Select the desired coordinates.
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears. Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
(5)CONV. METHOD
Specifies the conversion methods of related jobs such as a coordinated job with two manipulators or
the system with multiple stations.
COMMON (COMMON SHIFT)
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted by the same shift value.
EACH (INDIVIDUAL SHIFT)
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted separately by different shift values.
For details of each conversion method, refer to " Conversion of Coordinated Jobs ".
6-29
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function

Jobs Targeted for Conversion
There are two ways to specify the job to be converted as described in the following:
Independent Job Conversion
Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes jobs called by JUMP or
CALL instructions. Related jobs are not converted.
Converted
SELECTED JOB
(EDIT JOB)
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
Related jobs are
not converted.
JOB
Related Job Conversion
Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions)
are converted.
SELECTED JOB
(EDIT JOB)
JOB
JOB
Converted
JOB
JOB
JOB
6-30
JOB
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function

Conversion of Coordinated Jobs
There are two ways to convert a related job such as a coordinated job with two manipulators
or the system with multiple stations as described in the following:
Common Shift
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted by the same shift
value.
Coordinated job with R1+R2
The system with multiple stations
Individual Shift
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted separately by different shift values.
The system with multiple stations
Coordinated job with R1+R2
6-31
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Variables used in an individual shift
NOTE Be sure to use the variables of which numbers are consecutive after the selected number.
The variables of which numbers are not consecutive are unable to be selected.
Example 1) When selecting P010 for a coordinated job with R1 + R2:
Use P010 for R1.
Use P011 for R2.
JOB R1
JOB R2
P010
P011
Example 2) When selecting EX005 for multiple jobs with four stations:
Use EX005 for S1.
Use EX006 for S2.
Use EX007 for S3.
Use EX008 for S4.
JOB S1
JOB S2
JOB S3
JOB S4
EX005
EX006
EX007
EX008
6-32
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Relation between variables and jobs for conversion in an individual shift
In case of independent job conversion:
• Coordinated job with R1 + R2
Different shift values can be set for each manipulator and base.
Variables
BP001
P001
JOB
For base R1
For R1
R1 + R2
P002
P002
For base R2
For R2
• Job with R (+ S)
Use one variable for a job with one manipulator.
Variables
JOB
BP001
P001
Ro
For base R1
For R1
In case of related job conversion:
• Different shift values can be set for each manipulator, base, and station.
In a system with R1, R2, and S1 to S12:
Variables
P001
For R1
Job without
group axes
P002
For R2
R1 + R2
R1
R2
S1
S12
EX001
For S1
EX002
For S1
EX0012
For S1
6-33
BP001
For base R1
P002
For base R2
6.3 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function

Operation Procedure
The following is the operation procedure for parallel shift job conversion using position variables.
Operation
Explanation
1
Set the parameter.
Set the parameter S2C514 (SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL
SHIFT JOB CONVERSION) to 1 (Position variable shift value.)
2
Set the position variable.
Specify a position variable in advance when setting a shift value
by position variables.
For the setting of position variables, refer to " 3.9.4 User Variables ".
3
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
4
Select {JOB}.
5
Select {UTILITY} under the
pull-down menu.
6
Select {PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB}.
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
#P**
#EX***
TEST
SINGLE
ROBOT
COMMON
FILE NO.
SHIFT JOB NAME
MODE
COORDINATES
CONV. METHOD
CANCEL
EXECUTE
Main Menu
ShortCut
7
Specify the conversion items.
Specify each item.
8
Select “EXECUTE.”
Select “EXECUTE” then the parallel shift job conversion is executed. The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion
is completed.
When “CANCEL” is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is
suspended.
NOTE Specify the position variable in advance when using the setting value as a shift value.
6-34
6.4 PAM Function
6.4
PAM Function
6.4.1
Function Overview
The function for position adjustment during playback (PAM: Position Adjustment by Manual)
allows position adjustment by simple operations while observing the motion of the manipulator
and without stopping the manipulator. Positions can be adjusted in both teach mode and play
mode.
The following data can be adjusted by key input at the programming pendant.
• Teaching Point (Position)
• Teaching Point (Posture angle): Valid from NS3.00
• Operation Speed
• Position Level
Input Ranges for Adjustment Data

The input ranges for adjustment data are indicated in the following table.
Data
Number of Steps for Adjustment
Input Range
Up to 10 steps can be adjusted at the same time.
Position Adjustment Range (X, Y, Z) Unit: mm, valid to two decimal places, maximum
±10 mm
Posture Angle Adjustment Range
(Rx, Ry, Rz)
Unit: deg, valid to two decimal places, maximum
±10 deg
Speed Adjustment Range (V)
Unit: %, valid to two decimal places, maximum
±50%
PL Adjustment Range
0 to 8
Adjustment Coordinates
Robot coordinates, base coordinates, tool coordinates, user coordinates (Default coordinates:
robot coordinates)
SUPPLE
-MENT
Valid from
NS3.00
The input ranges for adjustment data can be changed by the following parameters:
S3C806: Position adjustment range (unit: mm)
S3C807: Speed adjustment range (unit: 0.01%)
S3C808: Adjustment coordinate specification
S3C810: Posture angle adjustment range (unit: 0.01 deg) [Valid from NS3.00]
For details, refer to “8 Parameter Description.”
6-35
6.4 PAM Function
• Base axis and station axis data cannot be adjusted.
NOTE • Adjustment when a TCP instruction is executed is performed by adjusting the data of the
selected tool.
• When the coordinates for adjustment are user coordinates, an error occurs if teaching
has not been performed in the user coordinates.
• If an attempt is made to adjust “PL” when there is no “PL” in the step subject to the adjustment, an error occurs.
• Position variable and reference point steps cannot be adjusted. An error occurs if adjustment is attempted.
• An attempt to adjust the speed at a step that has no speed tag will cause an error.
6-36
6.4 PAM Function
6.4.2

Operating Methods
Setting Adjustment Data
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
3
Select {UTILITY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Select {PAM}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window (in the teach mode) or the PLAYBACK window (in the playback mode) appears.
The PAM window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PAM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
JOB
STATUS
NOT DONE
INPUT COORD ROBOT
(7)
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
Z(mm)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COMPLETE
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PL
-
(8)
CANCEL
(6)
Main Menu
5
Set adjustment data.
ShortCut
Set adjustment data.
(1)JOB
Set the job name to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the JOB
LIST window. Move the cursor to the desired job and press
[SELECT] to set the adjusted job.
(2)STATUS
Shows the status of adjustment in the PAM function.
“NOT DONE” appears when adjustment is not executed.
“DONE” appears when the execution of adjustment is completed.
(3)INPUT COORD
Set the desired coordinates.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the selection dialog box. Move the cursor to the desired coordinate
system and press [SELECT] to set the input coordinates.
6-37
6.4 PAM Function
Operation
5
(cont’d)
Explanation
(4)Step Number
Set the step number to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input buffer line. Input the step number and press
[ENTER] to set the value.
(5)XYZ Coordinate Adjustment
Set the direction and amount of the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press
[SELECT] to display the number input buffer line. Input the
number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
(6)Rx, Ry, Rz Coordinate Adjustment
Set the direction and amount of the Rx, Ry and Rz posture
angles.
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press
[SELECT] to display the number input buffer line. Input the
number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
(7)V Coordinate Adjustment
Set the speed.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input buffer line. Input the number data and press
[ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
(8)PL
This is displayed when the position level of the job to be
adjusted for the step set in  is already decided, and the
data can be modified. When the position level is not
decided, [-] is displayed, and cannot be set. To modify the
position level, line up the cursor, press [SELECT], input the
number value and press [ENTER].
6-38
6.4 PAM Function

Executing the Adjustment
Executing the Adjustment
Operation
1
Touch “COMPLETE” on the
screen.
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PAM
JOB
TEST
STATUS
NOT DONE
INPUT COORD ROBOT
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
10.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Z(mm)
0.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COMPLETE
Main Menu
2
Select “YES.”
R1
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
PL
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
CANCEL
ShortCut
In the teach mode, the job adjustment can be immediately executed. In the play mode, the job can be adjusted just before execution (move operation).
When the job adjustment is completed, the set data shown in the
PAM window is cleared. However, if the step’s adjusted position
exceeds the software limit, an error occurs, and the data in only
that step cannot be cleared on the window.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PAM
JOB
TEST
STATUS
NOT DONE
INPUT COORD ROBOT
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
10.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COMPLETE
Main Menu
6-39
R1
Z(mm)
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
PL
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00 Correct?
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
YES 0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-
CANCEL
ShortCut
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
NO
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6.4 PAM Function
Cancelling the Execution
In the play mode, during the adjustment wait status, “STOP” is displayed in the PAM window.
To cancel the adjustment process, touch “STOP” on the screen. Also, if the following occurs
before executing, the process is automatically cancelled.
• If the mode is changed
• If an alarm occurs
• If the power is turned OFF
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PAM
JOB
TEST
STATUS
NOT DONE
INPUT COORD ROBOT
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
10.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
STOP
Main Menu

0.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
R1
Z(mm)
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
PL
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
CANCEL
ShortCut
Editing Data
Clearing Data
If there is a mistake made when adjusting the data, or if the adjustment of the step becomes
unnecessary, the data can be cleared.
Operation
1
Explanation
Move the cursor to the step of
the data to be cleared.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PAM
Steps in which
data is to be
cleared.
TEST
JOB
NOT DONE
STATUS
INPUT COORD ROBOT
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
10.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
R1
Z(mm)
0.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COMPLETE
Main Menu
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
3
Select {LINE CLEAR}.
The line data is cleared.
6-40
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
CANCEL
ShortCut
2
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PL
-
6.4 PAM Function
Copying Data
To input the same data as those set previously, perform the following operation.
Operation
Explanation
1
Move the cursor to the line to
be copied.
2
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
DATA
PAM
JOB
STATUS
INPUT COORD
EDIT
DISPLAY
LINE CLEAR
TEST
10.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Z(mm)
LINE
0.00 PASTE
0.00
0.00
5.00
5.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
COMPLETE
Main Menu
3
Select {LINE COPY} under the
pull-down menu.
4
Move the cursor to the line
where the item is to be copied.
5
Select {EDIT} under the menu.
6
Select {LINE PASTE}.
R1
LINE COPY
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
UTILITY
Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PL
-
CANCEL
ShortCut
The desired data is copied to the line. However, if the line where
the data is to be copied does not have a speed value or PL value,
it cannot be copied.
6-41
6.4 PAM Function
Canceling the Adjustment [Valid from NS3.00]
After the position adjustment in the PAM function, the job can be undone to the status before
adjustment only during teaching. To undo the job, perform the following operation.
However, the job cannot be undone during playback.
Operation
1
Move the cursor to the line to
be copied.
Explanation
After the position adjustment, the status shows “DONE.”
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB
TEST
STATUS
DONE
INPUT COORD ROBOT
R1
DATA
UTILITY
PAM
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
000
000
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PL
0.00
0.00
-
STEP X(mm) Y(mm)
Z(mm) Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
LINE PASTE
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00 UNDO
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PL
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
-
Select {EDIT} under the menu. The pull-down menu appears.
EDIT
DATA
PAM
JOB
STATUS
INPUT COORD
DISPLAY
LINE CLEAR
TEST
LINE COPY
COMPLETE
Main Menu
3
Z(mm) Rx(deg) Ry(deg) Rz(deg) V(%)
UTILITY
R1
CANCEL
ShortCut
Select {UNDO} under the pull- The confirmation dialog box appears.
down menu.
UNDO?
YES
4
Select “YES.”
NO
The status turns “NOT DONE” and the job is undone when selecting “YES.” The status does not change and the job is not undone
when selecting “NO.”
6-42
6.5 Mirror Shift Function
6.5
Mirror Shift Function
6.5.1
Function Overview
With the mirror shift function, a job is converted to the job in which the path is symmetrical to
that of the original job. This conversion can be performed for the specified coordinate among
the X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates and the user coordinates.
The mirror shift function is classified into the following three: the pulse mirror-shift function, the
robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, and the user-coordinates mirror-shift function.
Mirror shift
The original path
before the mirror shift
6.5.2
The converted path
after the mirror shift
Pulse Mirror-shift Function
With the pulse mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed by reversing the sign (+/-) for
the axes which are specified with the parameter in advance.
R-axi s
R-ax is
T-axis
T-axis
S-axis
S-ax is

Parameter Setting
Using the following parameter, specify the axes for which the sign is to be reversed.
S1CxG065: Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification
The 1st axis (0:Not reversed, 1:Reversed)
The 6th axis
6-43
6.5 Mirror Shift Function

Object Job
Jobs without group axes and relative jobs cannot be converted.

Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group axes system, the
group axes specified in the original and converted jobs must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration

Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
6.5.3
Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
With the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates.
Z
Z
Y
Y
X

X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group axes system, the
group axes specified in the original and converted jobs must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration
6-44
6.5 Mirror Shift Function

Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
NOTE
6.5.4
 Mirror shift conversion for the base axis is not performed with the robot-coordinates mirror shift function.
 With the robot-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift conversion for the station axis
is performed by reversing the sign for the axes specified with the parameter S1CxG065
"Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification."
User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
With the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed on the X-Z, X-Y, or
Y-Z coordinate of the specified user coordinates.
Z

Z
Y
Y
X
X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.

Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group axes system, the
group axes specified in the original and converted jobs must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration

Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
With the user-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift conversion for the station axis is
NOTE performed by reversing the sign for the axes specified with the parameter S1CxG065 "Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification."
6-45
6.5 Mirror Shift Function
6.5.5
Notes on the Mirror Shift Function
For manipulators, such as a polishing wrist, whose center of S-axis rotation and T-axis rotation are offset in the X-coordinate direction, the mirror shift cannot correctly be performed by
the pulse mirror-shift function. Be sure to use the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function or use
the user-coordinates mirror-shift function with the user coordinates specified on the center of
the T-axis rotation.
• Using the Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
When the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function is performed, the mirror shift is performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates. The path of the converted job is as
follows:
R o b o t - c o o r d i n a t e s M i rro r-s h i f t Co n v e rs i o n
After conversion
B e f o re c o n v e rs i o n
• Using the User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
To use the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, specify the user coordinates on the center of T-axis rotation in advance.
Us er-c oordinates Mirror-shift Conversi on
User coordi nates
After c onv ers ion
Before conversion
6-46
6.5 Mirror Shift Function
6.5.6

Operation Procedures
Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window
Call up the JOB CONTENT window of the job to be converted as follows:
For Current Job
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
For Another Job
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
2
Select {SELECT JOB}.
3
Select desired job.

Explanation
The JOB LIST window appears.
Mirror Shift Conversion
Operation
Explanation
1
Display the JOB CONTENT
window.
2
Select {UTILITY} under the
pull-down menu.
The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
3
Select {MIRROR SHIFT}.
The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
6-47
6.5 Mirror Shift Function

Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MIRROR SHIFT
(8)
: JOB1
SOURCE JOB
SOURCE CTRL GROUP : R1
: 001 → 010
STEP SECTION
: ****
DESTINATION JOB
: ****
DEST CTRL GROUP
: PULSE
COORDINATES
:
USER COORD NO.
:
TARGET
(9)
EXECUTE
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Main Menu
CANCEL
ShortCut
(1)SOURCE JOB
Selects the conversion source job.
To select another job to be converted, move the cursor to the name and press [SELECT] to call
up the list of jobs. Select the desired job and press [SELECT].
(2)SOURCE CTRL GROUP
Displays the control group of the conversion source job.
(3)STEP SELECTION
Specifies the steps to be converted. From the first step to the last step of the selected job are
specified as initial value.
(4)DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job name. To enter the name, move the cursor to the name and press
[SELECT]. The name of the conversion source job is displayed in the input line as initial value.
When "***" is displayed, the name for the converted job is to be the same as that of the conversion source job.
(5)DEST CTRL GROUP
Selects the control group for the converted job. When the destination job name is entered, the
same control group as the conversion source job is automatically set. To change it, move the
cursor to the control group and press [SELECT] to call up the selection dialog box.
(6)COORDINATES
Specifies the coordinates used for conversion.
"PULSE": Executes the pulse mirror-shift conversion.
"ROBOT": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the cartesian coordinates.
"USER": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the specified user coordinates.
(7)USER COORD NO.
Specifies the user coordinates number when "USER" is selected in (6).
This item cannot be set when "PULSE" or "ROBOT" is selected in (6).
(8)TARGET
Specifies the coordinate where conversion is to be done when "ROBOT" or "USER" is selected
in (6). "XY," "XZ," or "YZ" can be selected. Always specify "XZ" for "ROBOT."
(9)EXECUTE
Mirror shift conversion is executed when pressing “EXECUTE” or [ENTER]. A job is created
with the name of conversion source job when a job after conversion is not entered.
6-48
7.1 Memory Devices
7 External Memory Devices
7.1
Memory Devices
The following memory devices can be used in the NX100 to save and load data such as jobs
and parameters.
Device
Function
Media (destination of saved/
loaded data)
Optional function requirement
Compact Flash
Standard
Compact Flash (CF card)
No requirement.
Programming pendant is
equipped with a slot.
FC1
Option*1
2DD floppy disk, personal
computer (FC1 emulator)
“FC1” or personal computer
with “FC1 emulator”
FC2
Option*1
2DD floppy disk,
2HD floppy disk
“FC2”
PC
Option*1
Personal computer (MOTOCOM32 host)
• Via RS-232C: “Data transmission function” and
“MOTOCOM32”
• Via Ethernet: “Ethernet function” plus above two requirements
FTP
Option*1
FTP server such as personal
computer
“Data transmission function”,
“MOTOCOM32”, and “FTP
function”
*1 For the operation, refer to instruction manuals for each optional function.
7-1
7.1 Memory Devices
7.1.1
Compact Flash (CF Cards)
The programming pendant is equipped with CF card slot. Use the FAT16 or FAT32 formatted
Compact Flash.
Recommended Compact Flash Cards

Recommended products used for external memory of NX100 are listed below. Model numbers
are subject to be updated due to termination of product and new addition. Contact Yaskawa
representative when necessary.
<Currently Recommended Compact Flash Cards>
No.
Manufacturer
Model
Remarks
Hagiwara Sys-Com
MCF10P-128MS
(A00A II -YE
(128MB)
2
Hagiwara Sys-Com
MCF10P-256MS-YE2
(256MB)
3
Hagiwara Sys-Com
MCF10P-512MS
(512MB)
4
Hagiwara Sys-Com
MCF10P-A01GS
(1GB)
5
Hagiwara Sys-Com
MCF10P-A02GS
(2GB)
1
<Previously Recommended Compact Flash Cards>
No.
Manufacturer
Model
Remarks
1
Hagiwara Sys-Com
CFI-128MDG
(128MB)
2
Hagiwara Sys-Com
CFI-256MDG
(256MB)
Hagiwara Sys-Com
CFC-064MBA
(HOOAA)
(64MB)
Hagiwara Sys-Com
CFI-064MBA
(HOOAA)
(64MB)
SanDisk
SDCFBI-64-EXPP-80
(64MB)
3
4
5
*512 MB (or more) CF cards in the same series can be used as external memory devices.
However, FAT32 formatted CF cards such as high-capacity CF cards cannot be used for
upgrading Pendant OS version.
7-2
7.1 Memory Devices

Notes on handling Compact Flash
• Do not drop or bend exerting any shock or strong force to the Compact Flash.
• Keep away from water, oil, organic solvent, dust, and dirt.
• Do not use or keep the Compact Flash in places where strong static electricity or electronic noise may occur.
• To protect the data, back up the data regularly on other media. Damages or loss of data
due to operation errors or accidents can be minimized.
*Compact Flash has a limited life span.
The life span differs depending on products or status of use. However, normal use of Compact
Flash as an external memory device for the NX100 does not adversely affect the Compact
Flash. For details, refer to instruction manuals for each medium.
NOTE
Removing the CF or disconnecting the control power supply while writing data to the CF/
reading data from the CF may cause data corruption in the CF.
Please DO NOT remove the CF or disconnect the control power supply
while
• the remaining bytes indication is switching to the file list window after the data of the
external memory device is saved, loaded, or verified, and the hourglass icon disappears.
• the screen is switching to the file list window after the data of the external memory device
is deleted.
• the folder list is being updated after a folder is created to or deleted from a folder of the
external memory.
• the message "Under running auto backup" is being displayed.
• CMOS.BIN is being saved with the message "Saving system data. Don't turn the power
off" displayed.
• CMOS.BIN is being loaded with the message "Loading system data. Don't turn the power
off" displayed.
7-3
7.1 Memory Devices

Inserting a Compact Flash
When inserting a Compact Flash, take note of insertion direction. With the notch and clip of
the Compact Flash downward, insert the Compact Flash slowly into the slot of the programming pendant of which display faces up.
Forcible insertion may result in damage to the Compact Flash or CF card slot. After inserting
the card, be sure to close the cover of the slot before starting operation.
REMOTE
PLAY
TEACH
START
HOLD
Insertion slot for
the Compact Flash
Insertion direction
top surface
LAYOUT
COORD
Multi
MAIN
MENU
SHORT
CUT
X
X
S
S
Y
Y
DIRECT
OPEN
SERVO
ON
READY
GO BACK
PAGE
AREA
!?
CANCEL
SELECT
ASSIST
Notch
SERVO ON
HIGH
SPEED
L
L
Z
Z
MANUAL SPEED
U
U
SLOW
X
X
Y
Y
B
B
Z
Z
R
FAST
R
T
T
SHIFT
INTER
LOCK
7
8
9
ROBOT
INFORM
LIST
4
5
6
BWD
FWD
1
2
3
DELETE
INSERT
.
−
MODIFY ENTER
EX.AXIS
BACK
SPACE
MOTION
TYPE
0

TEST
START
SHIFT
MOTOMAN
Installing the Compact Flash
7-4
Click
7.2 Handling Data
7.2
7.2.1
Handling Data
Normal Mode Data Classification
For the NX100, data that can be saved in the normal mode are classified into eight categories.
(1) JOB
(2) FILE/GENERAL DATA
(3) BATCH USER MEMORY*1
(4) PARAMETER*2
(5) SYSTEM DATA
(6) I/O DATA
(7) BATCH CMOS*3
(8)ALL CMOS AREA*4
Data saved on the external memory device can be loaded again into the NX100.
Each data in the eight categories varies depending on applications or options.
When the device is set to “PC” and “FTP”, data cannot be handled other than “(1) JOB” and
“(2) FILE/GENERAL DATA.”
*1
*2
*3
“(3) BATCH USER MEMORY” includes “(1) JOB” and “(2) FILE/GENERAL DATA.”
“PARAMETER BATCH” includes all “(4) PARAMETER.”
“(7) BATCH CMOS” includes “(3) BATCH USER MEMORY”, “(4) PARAMETER”,
*4
“(5) SYSTEM DATA”, and “(6) I/O DATA.”
“ALL CMOS AREA” data cannot be loaded in edit mode and management mode.
NOTE
PARAMETER, I/O DATA, SYSTEM DATA, PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH CMOS, and ALL
CMOS AREA are used for backup.
If those data are loaded by other controllers, unintended data overwriting, unexpected
operation, or abnormal system startup may occur.
Do not load those backup data into other controllers.
If two controllers are loaded with the same job, paths of the two manipulators are different
due to the home positions or mechanical error of the component parts.
Be sure to check the operation instruction before operation.
7-5
7.2 Handling Data
File Name
(Saved Data)
Data classification
Save
Load
EDIT MAN EDIT MAN
(8) ALL CMOS AREA
ALCMSxx.HEX


X
X
(7) BATCH CMOS
CMOSxx.HEX


X

JOBxx.HEX




Single job
JOBNAME.JBI




Related job (Job+Condition)
JOBNAME.JBR




TOOL.CND




WEAV.CND




UFRAME.CND




Variable data
VAR.DAT




Arc start condition data
ARCSRT.CND




Arc end condition data
ARCEND.CND




Welding condition auxiliary
data
Power Source characteristic
data
Power Source characteristic
definition data
Shock detection level data
ARCSUP.DAT
















Motor gun pressure power
data
Motor gun dry spot
pressure data
Spot gun characteristic data
SPRESS.CND




















(3) BATCH USER MEMORY
(1) JOB
(2) FILE/
Tool data
GENERAL
Weaving data
DATA
User coordinate data
WELDER.DAT
WELDUDEF.DAT
SHOCKLVL.CND
SPRESSCL.CND
SGUN.DAT
Spot gun condition auxiliary
data
Spot welding Power Source
characteristic data
Spot I/O allocation data
SGUNSUP.DAT
SPOTIO.DAT




Spot welding condition data
SPOTWELD.DAT








SWELDER.DAT
Short/Full open position data STROKE.DAT
7-6
7.2 Handling Data
File Name
(Saved Data)
Data classification
(8) (7) (4) PARAMETER BATCH
ALL.PRM
(4) PARAME- Robot matching parameter
TER
System definition parameter
(5) I/O DATA
(6) SYSTEM
DATA
RC.PRM
SD.PRM
Save
Load
EDIT MAN EDIT MAN


X



X



X



X

Coordinate home position
parameter
System matching parameter
RO.PRM
SC.PRM


X

ClO parameter
CIO.PRM


X

Function definition parameter FD.PRM


X

Application parameter
AP.PRM


X

Transmission(general)
parameter
Sensor parameter
RS.PRM


X

SE.PRM


X

Servo parameter
SV.PRM


X

Servomotor parameter
SVM.PRM


X

Operation control parameter
AMC.PRM


X

Servo power block
parameter
Motion function parameter
SVP.PRM


X

MF.PRM


X

SERVOPACK parameter
SVS.PRM


X

Converter parameter
SVC.PRM


X

Concurrent I/O program
CIOPRG.LST


X

I/O name data
IONAME.DAT


X

Pseudo input signals
PSEUDOIN.DAT


X

User word registration
UWORD.DAT


X

SV monitor signals
SVMON.DAT


X

Variable name
VARNAME.DAT


X

Second home position
HOME2.DAT


X

Alarm history data
ALMHIST.DAT


X
X
Home position calibrating
data
System information
ABSO.DAT


X

SYSTEM.SYS


X
X
Work home position data
OPEORG.DAT


X

I/O message history data
IOMSGHST.DAT


X
X
Function key allocation data
KEYALLOC.DAT


X

EDIT : Edit Mode, MAN: Management Mode
 : Can be done, X : Cannot be done
7-7
7.2 Handling Data
7.2.2
Collective Backup
For the NX100, four types of collective backup are available: CMOS.BIN, CMOSBK.BIN,
ALCMSxx.HEX, and CMOSxx.HEX.

CMOS.BIN
For the normal backup, use this data.
Save: Perform in the maintenance mode (the editing mode or higher.)
Load: Perform in the maintenance mode (the management mode.)
As for the load/save procedures, refer to “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS (RE-CTO-A211)”.
Target Area: All areas of the internally-stored data. (Note that the monitoring time is not
loaded.)

CMOSBK.BIN
This data is used in the automatic backup function.
Save: In the normal mode, saves with the preset conditions.
Load: Perform for the system restoration in the maintenance mode (the management
mode.)
For details, refer to “NX100 INSTRUCTIONS (RE-CTO-A211)”.
Target Area: All areas of the internally-stored data. (Note that the monitoring time is not
loaded.)

CMOSxx.HEX
This data is loaded/saved in the FD/CF menu of the normal mode.
Save: Perform in the normal mode (the editing mode or higher.)
Load: Perform in the normal mode (the management mode.)
For details, refer to the following pages.
Target Area: The collected data including "Job File", "Data File", "Parameter File", "System
Data", and "I/O Data" which can be individually loaded/saved in the FD/CF menu. Because
the setting information of robot etc. are not included in the collected data, the system cannot
be completely restored.

ALCMSxx.HEX
This data is for the manufacturer only. Users can save but cannot load this data.
In order to save the batch data, the following free space per file is needed in the Compact
Flash card.
JZNC-NIF01-1: (The number of stored file + 1) x 7.5 MByte
JZNC-NIF01-2: (The number of stored file + 1) x 11.0 MByte
Note that the free space for one working file is needed in addition to the abovementioned
space when using the automatic backup function.
Besides, it is recommended to store the backup data in two or more Compact Flash cards to
minimize problems if the Compact Flash card is damaged.
7-8
7.2 Handling Data
7.2.3
File Existence
The following data categories show whether the same file name as a file that is going to be
saved is in the external memory device or not.
• JOB
No mark appears when the selected folder has the file of the same name.
The asterisk (*) appears when the folder does not have the same name file.
• FILE/GENERAL DATA, PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA
Black circle (
) appears when the selected folder has the file of the same name.
White circle (
) appears when the folder does not have the same name file.
Whether the job after editing is saved or not can be judged by checking “TO SAVE TO FD”
in the JOB HEADER window. However, the status of “TO SAVE TO FD” does not change
after saving “(3) BATCH USER MEMORY” and “(7) BATCH CMOS.”
SUPPLE
-MENT
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE)
SINGLE NO.
FOLDER
AA35
AA36
AA4
AA5
AA7
AA8
N
N1
TEST2
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-C
Main Menu
DATA
UTILITY
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
TOOL DATA
WEAVING DATA
USER COORDINATE DATA
VARIABLE DATA
ARC START COND DATA
ARC END COND DATA
ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
POWER SOURCE COND DATA
USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA
INTERRUPT JOB
33
AA37
AA6
AA9
TEST
TEST3A
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-D
Main Menu
ShortCut
Example of JOB

EDIT
.CND
TOOL
.CND
WEAV
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
VAR
.CND
ARCSRT
ARCEND .CND
ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER .DAT
WELDUDEF.DAT
.DAT
INTJOB
ShortCut
Example of FILE/GENERAL DATA
Saving by Overwriting
“(3) BATCH USER MEMORY”, “(7) BATCH CMOS”, and “(8) ALL CMOS AREA” can be
overwritten.
As for “(1) JOB”, “(2) FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “(4) PARAMETER”, “(5) SYSTEM DATA”, and
“(6) I/O DATA”, those data cannot be overwritten. Delete the target file in the device before
the saving operation. If Compact Flash is used as the device, the file does not need to be
deleted because another folder can be created to save the data.
7-9
7.3 Operation Flow
7.3
Operation Flow
The following description is the operation flow for external memory devices.
• SELECT DEVICE
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination device for saving.
The device selected is valid after turning the power supply ON again.
*1 Sub menu {FORMAT} appears when selecting FC1 or FC2.
• SELECT FOLDER
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination folder for saving.
The folder selected is invalid after turning the power supply ON again.
*2 {FOLDER} appears when using the Compact Flash as a device.
*3 The settings of {CREATE NEW FOLDER}, {DELETE FOLDER}, and {ROOT FOLDER}
can be set.
• SELECT SUB MENU
Select an operation to be performed from {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, and {DELETE}.
• SELECT DATA CATEGORY
Select the target data category.
• SELECT DATA
Select the target data.
"(3) BATCH USER MEMORY", "(7) BATCH CMOS", and "(8) ALL CMOS AREA" do not
require this operation.
*4 Individual selection, batch selection, marker (*) selection, and canceling selection can
be performed.
• EXECUTE
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}.
Main Menu
{FD/PC CARD}
Sub Menu
{LOAD}
{SAVE}
{VERIFY}
*1
{FORMAT}
{DEVICE}
*2
{FOLDER}
Select Floppy Type
Select Size
Select
Device
*3
Operate Folder
{DELETE}
Select Data Category
{EXECUTE}
Select Data*4
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}
7-10
Select Folder
7.3 Operation Flow

Operating a Folder
Folders can be used in order to classify and sort out the data such as jobs and condition files
when using the Compact Flash. The folders can be created in hierarchical structure positioning a root folder at the top.
Restrictions
Folder name: Up to 8 one-byte characters + 3 characters for extension
*Long folder names cannot be used such as the name that exceeds the restricted number
of characters mentioned above as created in PC, etc.
Maximum path length: 64 one-byte characters
*“ERROR 3360: INVALID FOLDER” appears when selecting the folder of which name
exceeds the maximum path length.
Selecting a Folder
Operation
Explanation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {FOLDER}.
The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3
Move the cursor to a folder
and press [SELECT].
A folder can be selected.
4
To move the hierarchy from a
child folder to a parent folder,
move the cursor to [..] and
press [SELECT].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FOLDER LIST
TARGET FOLDER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NUM.
0003
[..]
FOLDER 2
FOLDER 3
Main Menu
7-11
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Creating a Folder
Operation
Explanation
1
Change the security to management mode.
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {FOLDER}.
The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3
Move the cursor to a folder
and press [SELECT].
Select the higher-level folder where a new folder to be created
should be contained. When creating a folder in top-level, this
step is unnecessary.
4
A folder is created.
Select {DATA} --> {CREATE
NEW FOLDER} under the pulldown menu.
Input folder name using the
keyboard on the screen and
press [ENTER].
Deleting a Folder
Operation
Explanation
1
Change the security to management mode.
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {FOLDER}.
The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3
Move the cursor to a folder
and press [SELECT].
Select the higher-level folder where a folder to be deleted is contained. When deleting a folder in top-level, this step is unnecessary.
4
Delete the files and subfolders beforehand inside the
folder that is to be deleted.
A folder cannot be deleted if the folder contains files or subfolders
inside.
5
Move the cursor to the folder
to be deleted.
Select {DATA} --> {DELETE
FOLDER} under the pull-down
menu.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
CREATE NEW
FOLDER
UTILITY
FOLDER 2
0003
DELETE FOLDER
FOLDER 4
FOLDER 5
Main Menu
7-12
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Initial Folder Setting
The folder that is contained in a deep hierarchy can be selected in a shortened operation.
When selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, or {DELETE} from the sub menu of {FD/PC
CARD}, the folder that has been set as an initial folder becomes a current folder.
Operation
Explanation
1
Change the security to management mode.
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {FOLDER}.
The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3
Move the cursor to a folder
and press [SELECT].
Select a folder that is to be set as a root folder.
4
Select {DISPLAY} --> {ROOT The INITIAL FOLDER SETTING window appears.
FOLDER} under the pull-down
EDIT
DISPLAY
DATA
UTILITY
menu.
FOLDER LIST
ROOT FOLDER
TARGET FOLDER FOLDER 1
FOLDER NUM.
0003
[..]
FOLDER 2
FOLDER 3
Main Menu
ShortCut
A folder currently selected appears in “CURRENT FOLDER” and
the initial folder appears in “ROOT FOLDER.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ROOT ENTRY
AUTO CHANGE
CURRENT FOLDER
C:/FOLDER 1 /FOLDER 2
ROOT FOLDER
C:/
Main Menu
7-13
ShortCut
OFF
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Explanation
The initial folder is set in “ROOT FOLDER.”
Select {EDIT} --> {SETUP
FOLDER} under the pull-down
DATA
DISPLAY UTILITY
EDIT
menu.
ROOT ENTRY
Move the cursor to “AUTO
CHANGE” and press
[SELECT].
AUTO CHANGE
CURRENT FOLDER
C:/FOLDER 1 /FOLDER 2
ON
ROOT FOLDER
C:/FOLDER 1 /FOLDER 2
Main Menu
ShortCut
“AUTO CHANGE” shows “ON” and the initial folder setting
becomes valid. Subsequently, every time {FD/PC CARD} -->
{FOLDER} is selected, the initial folder that has been set
becomes a current folder.
SUPPLE
-MENT
When the initial folder is missing due to exchange of the Compact Flash, etc., “ERROR
3360: INVALID FOLDER” appears when selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, {DELETE}
or {FOLDER} menu from {FD/PC CARD}, and simultaneously the initial folder becomes
invalid. Set “ON” in “AUTO CHANGE” when the initial folder setting needs to be valid.
7-14
7.3 Operation Flow

Saving Data
To download data from the memory of the NX100 to the external memory device, perform the
following procedure.
NOTE
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, and the batch data such as
PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific to each robot controller.
Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in destruction or loss of critical system
information.
Take extra care for the saved data.
Saving a Job
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
3
Select {JOB}.
The JOB LIST window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE)
SINGLE NO.
FOLDER
AA35
AA36
AA4
AA5
AA7
AA8
N
N1
TEST2
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-C
7-15
UTILITY
33
AA37
AA6
AA9
TEST
TEST3A
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-D
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
4
Select a job to be saved.
Explanation
The selected job is marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE)
SINGLE NO.
FOLDER
AA35
AA36
AA4
AA5
AA7
AA8
N
N1
TEST2
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-C
Main Menu
5
Press [ENTER].
33
AA37
AA6
AA9
TEST
TEST3A
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-D
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected job is saved.
7-16
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving a Condition File or General Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {FILE/
GENERAL DATA} and select.
ShortCut
The selection window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
TOOL DATA
WEAVING DATA
USER COORDINATE DATA
VARIABLE DATA
ARC START COND DATA
ARC END COND DATA
ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
POWER SOURCE COND DATA
USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA
SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
Main Menu
.CND
TOOL
.CND
WEAV
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
VAR
.CND
ARCSRT
ARCEND .CND
ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER .DAT
WELDUDEF.DAT
SHOCKLVL .CND
ShortCut
The content of the display varies in accordance with applications
and options.
4
Select condition files or general data to be saved.
The selected files are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
TOOL DATA
WEAVING DATA
USER COORDINATE DATA
VARIABLE DATA
ARC START COND DATA
ARC END COND DATA
ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
POWER SOURCE COND DATA
USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA
SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
Main Menu
7-17
ShortCut
.CND
TOOL
.CND
WEAV
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
VAR
.CND
ARCSRT
ARCEND .CND
ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER .DAT
WELDUDEF.DAT
SHOCKLVL .CND
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected files are saved.
7-18
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving a Parameter
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {PARAME- The selection window for parameters appears.
TER} and select.
DATA
Select parameters to be
saved.
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 BATCH PARAMETER
 ROBOT MATCH PRMTR
 SYS DEF PRMTR
 COORD ORG PRMTR
 SYS MATCH PRMTR
 CIO PRMTR
 FCTN DEF PRMTR
 APPLI PRMTR
 TRANSMISSION (USER)
 SENSOR PRMTR
 SERVO PRMTR
ALL
RC
SD
RO
SC
CIO
FD
AP
RS
SE
SV
Main Menu
4
ShortCut
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
ShortCut
The selected parameters are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 BATCH PARAMETER
 ROBOT MATCH PRMTR
 SYS DEF PRMTR
 COORD ORG PRMTR
 SYS MATCH PRMTR
 CIO PRMTR
 FCTN DEF PRMTR
 APPLI PRMTR
 TRANSMISSION (USER)
 SENSOR PRMTR
 SERVO PRMTR
ALL
RC
SD
RO
SC
CIO
FD
AP
RS
SE
SV
Main Menu
7-19
ShortCut
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected parameters are saved.
7-20
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving I/O Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
3
Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} The selection window for I/O data appears.
and select.
EDIT
UTILITY
DATA
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 C.IO PRGM
 IO NAME DATA
 SIMULATED IN DATA
4
Select I/O data to be saved.
CIOPRG .LIST
IONAME .DAT
PSEUDOIN.DAT
The selected I/O data are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 C.IO PRGM
 IO NAME DATA
 SIMULATED IN DATA
5
Press [ENTER].
CIOPRG .LIST
IONAME .DAT
PSEUDOIN.DAT
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected I/O data are saved.
7-21
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving System Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {SYSTEM
DATA} and select.
ShortCut
The selection window for system data appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 USER WORD
 SV MONITOR SIGNAL
 SECOND HOME POSITION
 ALARM HISTORY DATA
 HOME POS CALIB DATA
 SYSTEM INFORMATION
 OPERATION ORG POS DATA
 I/O MESSAGE HISTORY DATA
 KEY ALLOCATION DATA
Main Menu
4
Select system data to be
saved.
UWORD .DAT
.DAT
SVMON
.DAT
HOME2
ALMHIST .DAT
.DAT
ABSO
SYSTEM .SYS
OPEORG .DAT
IOMSGHST .DAT
KEYALLOC .DAT
ShortCut
The selected system data are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF(SAVE)
FOLDER
 USER WORD
UWORD .DAT
 SV MONITOR SIGNAL
.DAT
SVMON
 SECOND HOME POSITION
.DAT
HOME2
 ALARM HISTORY DATA
ALMHIST .DAT
 HOME POS CALIB DATA
.DAT
ABSO
 SYSTEM INFORMATION
SYSTEM .SYS
 OPERATION ORG POS DATA OPEORG .DAT
 I/O MESSAGE HISTORY DATA IOMSGHST .DAT
 KEY ALLOCATION DATA
KEYALLOC .DAT
Main Menu
7-22
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
SUPPLE
-MENT
NO
The selected system data are saved.
“BATCH USER MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, and “ALL CMOS AREA” can be overwritten.
As for “JOB”, “FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “PARAMETER”, “SYSTEM DATA”, and “I/O DATA”,
those data cannot be overwritten. In that case, delete the file of the same name in the
folder beforehand or create a new folder so that the data can be stored inside.
7-23
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving All User’s Programs
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {BATCH
USER MEMORY} and select.
4
Select “EXECUTE.”
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
5
Select “YES.”
All user’s programs are saved.
7-24
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving All CMOS Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {BATCH
CMOS} and select.
4
Select “EXECUTE.”
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
5
Select “YES.”
All CMOS data are saved.
7-25
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Saving All Data in CMOS Area
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {SAVE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (SAVE) UN-USED MEMORY 55.91 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {ALL
CMOS AREA} and select.
4
Select “EXECUTE.”
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Save?
YES
5
Select “YES.”
All data in CMOS area are saved.
7-26
NO
7.3 Operation Flow

Loading Data
To upload data from the external memory device to the memory of the NX100, follow the procedure in the following.
NOTE
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, and the batch data such as
PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific to each robot controller.
Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in destruction or loss of critical system
information.
Take extra care for the saved data.
Loading a Job
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Select {JOB}.
ShortCut
The job selection window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA36
AA35
AA37
AA5
AA4
AA6
AA8
AA7
AA9
N1
N
TEST
TEST3
TEST2
TEST3A
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-TEST3A-)
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-2
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-C
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-D
Main Menu
7-27
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
4
Select a job to be loaded.
Explanation
The selected jobs are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA35
AA37
AA36
AA4
AA6
AA5
AA7
AA9
AA8
N
TEST
N1
TEST2
TEST3A
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-D
TEST3A-C
Main Menu
5
Press [ENTER].
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected jobs are loaded.
7-28
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading a Condition File or General Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA
0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {FILE/
GENERAL DATA} and select.
ShortCut
The selection window for condition file or general data appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
.CND
 TOOL DATA
TOOL
.CND
 WEAVING DATA
WEAV
 USER COORDINATE DATA
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
 VARIABLE DATA
VAR
.CND
 ARC START COND DATA
ARCSRT
 ARC END COND DATA
ARCEND .CND
 ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
ARCSUP .DAT
 POWER SOURCE COND DATA
WELDER .DAT
 USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA WELDUDEF.DAT
 SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
SHOCKLVL .CND
Main Menu
4
Select a condition file or general data to be loaded.
ShortCut
The selected files are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
.CND
 TOOL DATA
TOOL
.CND
 WEAVING DATA
WEAV
 USER COORDINATE DATA
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
 VARIABLE DATA
VAR
.CND
 ARC START COND DATA
ARCSRT
 ARC END COND DATA
ARCEND .CND
 ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
ARCSUP .DAT
 POWER SOURCE COND DATA
WELDER .DAT
 USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA WELDUDEF.DAT
 SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
SHOCKLVL .CND
Main Menu
7-29
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected files are loaded.
7-30
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading a Parameter
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {PARAME- The selection window for parameters appears.
TER} and select.
DATA
Select parameters to be
loaded.
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 BATCH PARAMETER
 ROBOT MATCH PRMTR
 SYS DEF PRMTR
 COORD ORG PRMTR
 SYS MATCH PRMTR
 CIO PRMTR
 FCTN DEF PRMTR
 APPLI PRMTR
 TRANSMISSION (USER)
 SENSOR PRMTR
 SERVO PRMTR
ALL
RC
SD
RO
SC
CIO
FD
AP
RS
SE
SV
Main Menu
4
ShortCut
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
ShortCut
The selected parameters are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 BATCH PARAMETER
 ROBOT MATCH PRMTR
 SYS DEF PRMTR
 COORD ORG PRMTR
 SYS MATCH PRMTR
 CIO PRMTR
 FCTN DEF PRMTR
 APPLI PRMTR
 TRANSMISSION (USER)
 SENSOR PRMTR
 SERVO PRMTR
ALL
RC
SD
RO
SC
CIO
FD
AP
RS
SE
SV
Main Menu
7-31
ShortCut
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
.PRM
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected parameters are loaded.
7-32
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading I/O Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
3
Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} The selection window for I/O data appears.
and select.
EDIT
DATA
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 C.IO PRGM
 IO NAME DATA
 SIMULATED IN DATA
4
Select I/O data to be loaded.
The selected I/O data are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 C.IO PRGM
 IO NAME DATA
 SIMULATED IN DATA
5
Press [ENTER].
CIOPRG .LIST
IONAME .DAT
PSEUDOIN.DAT
UTILITY
CIOPRG .LIST
IONAME .DAT
PSEUDOIN.DAT
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected I/O data are loaded.
7-33
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading System Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {SYSTEM
DATA} and select.
ShortCut
The selection window for system data appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 USER WORD
 SV MONITOR SIGNAL
 SECOND HOME POSITION
 ALARM HISTORY DATA
 HOME POS CALIB DATA
 SYSTEM INFORMATION
 OPERATION ORG POS DATA
 I/O MESSAGE HISTORY DATA
 KEY ALLOCATION DATA
Main Menu
4
Select system data to be
loaded.
UWORD .DAT
.DAT
SVMON
.DAT
HOME2
ALMHIST .DAT
.DAT
ABSO
SYSTEM .SYS
OPEORG .DAT
IOMSGHST .DAT
KEYALLOC .DAT
ShortCut
The selected system data are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
FOLDER
 USER WORD
 SV MONITOR SIGNAL
 SECOND HOME POSITION
 ALARM HISTORY DATA
 HOME POS CALIB DATA
 SYSTEM INFORMATION
 OPERATION ORG POS DATA
 I/O MESSAGE HISTORY DATA
 KEY ALLOCATION DATA
Main Menu
7-34
ShortCut
UWORD .DAT
.DAT
SVMON
.DAT
HOME2
ALMHIST .DAT
.DAT
ABSO
SYSTEM .SYS
OPEORG .DAT
IOMSGHST .DAT
KEYALLOC .DAT
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
5
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
NO
The selected system data are loaded.
7-35
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading All User’s Programs
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {BATCH
USER MEMORY} and select.
4
Select “EXECUTE.”
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
5
Select “YES.”
All user’s programs are loaded.
7-36
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Loading All CMOS Data
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {LOAD}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) UN-USED MEMORY 55.32 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to {BATCH
CMOS} and select.
4
Select “EXECUTE.”
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Load?
YES
5
Select “YES.”
All CMOS data are loaded.
7-37
NO
7.3 Operation Flow

Verifying Data
Follow the procedure below to verify data in the memory of the NX100 with data saved in the
external memory device.
NOTE This function cannot be executed with “BATCH USER MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, or
“ALL CMOS AREA” specified.
Verifying a Job
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {VERIFY}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (VERIFY) UN-USED MEMORY 54.73 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
Main Menu
3
Select {JOB}.
ShortCut
The job selection window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (VERIFY)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA37
AA36
AA35
AA6
AA5
AA4
AA9
AA8
AA7
TEST
N1
N
TEST3A
TEST3
TEST2
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-TEST3A-)
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-2
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-D
TEST3A-C
TEST3A-B
Main Menu
7-38
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Operation
4
Select a job to be verified.
Explanation
The selected jobs are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (VERIFY)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA35
AA37
AA36
AA4
AA6
AA5
AA7
AA9
AA8
N
TEST
N1
TEST2
TEST3A
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-D
TEST3A-C
Main Menu
5
Press [ENTER].
ShortCut
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Verify?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected jobs are verified.
7-39
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Verifying a File
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {VERIFY}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (VERIFY) UN-USED MEMORY 54.73 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
3
Select the group of the file to
be verified.
4
Select a file to be verified.
The selected files are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (VERIFY)
FOLDER
.CND
 TOOL DATA
TOOL
.CND
 WEAVING DATA
WEAV
 USER COORDINATE DATA
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
 VARIABLE DATA
VAR
.CND
 ARC START COND DATA
ARCSRT
 ARC END COND DATA
ARCEND .CND
 ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
ARCSUP .DAT
 POWER SOURCE COND DATA
WELDER .DAT
 USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA WELDUDEF.DAT
 SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
SHOCKLVL .CND
5
Press [ENTER].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Verify?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected files are verified.
7-40
NO
7.3 Operation Flow

Deleting Data
Follow the procedure below to delete a file or files on an external memory device.
Deleting a Job
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {DELETE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE) UN-USED MEMORY 54.14 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
3
Select {JOB}.
The job selection window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA37
AA36
AA35
AA6
AA5
AA4
AA9
AA8
AA7
TEST
N1
N
TEST3A
TEST3
TEST2
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-TEST3A-)
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-2
TEST3A 7
TEST3A 6
TEST3A 5
4
Select a job to be deleted.
The selected jobs are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA35
AA37
AA36
AA4
AA6
AA5
AA7
AA9
AA8
N
TEST
N1
TEST2
TEST3A
TEST3
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-TEST3A-2
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-6
5
Press [ENTER].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected jobs are deleted.
7-41
NO
7.3 Operation Flow
Deleting a File
Operation
1
Select {FD/PC CARD} under
the main menu.
2
Select {DELETE}.
Explanation
The following window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE) UN-USED MEMORY 54.14 MB
FOLDER
 JOB
57
 FILE/GENERAL DATA
0
 BATCH USER MEMORY
0
 PARAMETER
0
 SYSTEM DATA
0
 I/O DATA
0
 BATCH CMOS
0
 ALL CMOS AREA

0
3
Select the group of the file to
be deleted.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE)
FOLDER
 TOOL DATA
 WEAVING DATA
 USER COORDINATE DATA
 VARIABLE DATA
 ARC START COND DATA
 ARC END COND DATA
 ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
 POWER SOURCE COND DATA
 USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA
4
Select a file to be deleted.
.CND
TOOL
.CND
WEAV
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
VAR
.CND
ARCSRT
ARCEND .CND
ARCSUP .DAT
WELDER .DAT
WELDUDEF.DAT
The selected files are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (DELETE)
FOLDER
.CND
 TOOL DATA
TOOL
.CND
 WEAVING DATA
WEAV
 USER COORDINATE DATA
UFRAME .CND
.DAT
 VARIABLE DATA
VAR
.CND
 ARC START COND DATA
ARCSRT
 ARC END COND DATA
ARCEND .CND
 ARC AUXILIARY COND DATA
ARCSUP .DAT
 POWER SOURCE COND DATA
WELDER .DAT
 USER DEF PWR SRC COND DATA WELDUDEF.DAT
 SHOCK DETECTION LEVEL
SHOCKLVL .CND
5
Press [ENTER].
The confirmation dialog box appears.
Delete?
YES
6
Select “YES.”
The selected files are deleted.
7-42
NO
7.3 Operation Flow

Job Selection Mode
The method of selecting a job and various data files when loading, saving, verifying, and
deleting are described in the following:
• Individual Selection
Jobs and data files are selected individually one at a time.
• Batch Selection
Jobs and data files are selected all at one time.
• Marker (*) Selection
Loading: selects the files in the external memory device.
Saving: selects the files in the memory of the NX100.
Verifying: selects both the files in the external memory device and in the memory of the
NX100.
Using Individual Selection
Operation
1
In either the external memory
JOB LIST window or the file
selection window, move the
cursor to a job or a file to be
selected.
Explanation
DATA
Press [SELECT].
Move the cursor to a file
needed and press [SELECT]
again.
*To cancel the selected items,
select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL SELECT}.
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA36
AA35
AA37
AA5
AA4
AA6
AA8
AA7
AA9
N1
N
TEST
TEST3
TEST2
TEST3A
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-TEST3A-)
TEST3A-1
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-2
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-C
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-D
Main Menu
2
EDIT
ShortCut
The selected jobs are marked with “.”
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO. 33
FOLDER
AA35
AA36
AA37
AA4
AA5
AA6
AA7
AA8
AA9
N
N1
TEST
TEST2
TEST3
TEST3A
TEST3A-!
TEST3A-’
TEST3A-(
TEST3A-)
TEST3A-TEST3A-1
TEST3A-2
TEST3A-3
TEST3A-4
TEST3A-5
TEST3A-6
TEST3A-7
TEST3A-8
TEST3A-9
TEST3A-A
TEST3A-B
TEST3A-C
TEST3A-D
Main Menu
7-43
ShortCut
7.3 Operation Flow
Using Batch Selection
Operation
1
In either the external memory
JOB LIST window or the file
selection window, select
{EDIT} under the menu.
Explanation
The pull-down menu appears.
FOLDER
UTILITY
DISPLAY UTILITY
DISPLAY
EDIT
EDIT
FLOPPY DISK/Compact
SELECT ALL Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO.
FOLDER SELECT MARKER
33
(*)
AA35
AA36
SELECT
AA4 CANCEL AA5
AA7
* AA8
N
* N1
2
Select {SELECT ALL}.
*To cancel the selected items,
select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL SELECT}.
*
*
AA37
AA6
AA9
TEST
*
*
All jobs are selected.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) SINGLE
NO.
FOLDER
AA35
AA4
*
AA7
N
*
*
TEST2
TEST3A-! *
TEST3A-) *
TEST3A-2 *
TEST3A-5 *
TEST3A-8 *
TEST3A-B*
Main Menu
7-44
AA36
AA5
*
AA8
*
N1
TEST3
*
TEST3A-’ *
TEST3A-- *
TEST3A-3 *
TEST3A-6 *
TEST3A-9 *
TEST3A-C*
ShortCut
UTILITY
33
AA37
AA6
AA9
*
*
TEST
TEST3A *
TEST3A-( *
TEST3A-1 *
TEST3A-4 *
TEST3A-7 *
TEST3A-A *
TEST3A-D *
7.3 Operation Flow
Using Marker (*) Selection
Operation
1
In either the external memory
JOB LIST window or the file
selection window, select
{EDIT} under the menu.
Explanation
The pull-down menu appears.
FOLDER
EDIT
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY UTILITY
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact
SELECT ALL Flash
CF (LOAD)
SINGLE NO.
FOLDER SELECT MARKER
33
(*)
AA35
AA36
SELECT
AA4 CANCEL AA5
AA7
* AA8
2
Select {SELECT MARKER
(*)}.
*To cancel the selected items,
select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL SELECT}.
DATA
EDIT
*
DISPLAY
FLOPPY DISK/Compact Flash
CF (LOAD) SINGLE
NO.
FOLDER
AA35
AA4
*
AA7
N
*
*
TEST2
TEST3A-! *
TEST3A-) *
TEST3A-2 *
TEST3A-5 *
TEST3A-8 *
TEST3A-B*
Main Menu
7-45
AA36
AA5
*
AA8
*
N1
TEST3
*
TEST3A-’ *
TEST3A-- *
TEST3A-3 *
TEST3A-6 *
TEST3A-9 *
TEST3A-C*
ShortCut
AA37
AA6
AA9
*
UTILITY
33
AA37
AA6
AA9
*
*
TEST
TEST3A *
TEST3A-( *
TEST3A-1 *
TEST3A-4 *
TEST3A-7 *
TEST3A-A *
TEST3A-D *
8.1 Parameter Configuration
8 Parameter
8.1
Parameter Configuration
The parameters of NX100 can be classified into the following seven:
Motion Speed Setting Parameter
Determines the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching, test operation, or
playback operation.
Mode Operation Setting Parameter
Makes the setting for various operations in the teach mode or remote mode.
Parameter according to Interference Area
Limits the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or sets the interference area for axis
interference or cubic interference.
Parameter according to Status I/O
Sets the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.
Parameter according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
Makes the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between manipulators or
between manipulators and stations.
Parameter for Other Functions or Applications
Makes the settings for other functions or applications.
Hardware Control Parameter
Makes the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.
S1CxG Parameters
SUPPLE
-MENT
The initial setting of S1CxG parameters depends on the manipulator model.
For a system in which two manipulators are controlled, the following two types of parameters are used: S1C1G type and S1C2G type.
8-1
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters
8.2
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
These parameters set the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching, test operation, or playback operation.

S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED
Units: 0.01%
The upper speed limit is set for in-guard safe operation. While the in-guard safe operation
command signal is being input, the TCP speed is limited to the TCPmax speed.

S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED
Units: 0.01%
This is a dry-run operation speed setting value used when checking the path. Take safety into
consideration when setting changes are unnecessary.
Normal playback operation speed
I n- gu ard safe
oper ation speed
limit
Operation speed under in-guard
safe operation
Teach-speed
Dry-run speed
Operation speed
when dry-run is
specified.

S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION
Units: 0.01%
The value set in these parameters is registered as the joint speed for each speed level when
teaching the position data with the programming pendant. The percentage corresponding to
the set value at each level is registered as 100% of the value set in the playback speed limit.
Values greater than those set as speed limit values cannot be set.

S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION
Units: 0.1mm/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the linear speed for each speed level when
teaching the position data with the programming pendant. Values greater than those set as
playback speed limit values cannot be set.
8-2
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED
Units: 0.1°/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the position angle speed for each speed
level when teaching the position data with the programming pendant. Values greater than
those set as playback speed limit cannot be set.

S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE VALUE
SPEED
Units: 0.1mm/s
These are setting values of jog operation speed set by the programming pendant. Values
greater than those set as jog operation speed limit value cannot be set.
Low level
: Jog operation speed when “LOW” manual speed is specified.
Medium level
: Jog operation speed when “MEDIUM” manual speed is specified.
High level
: Jog operation speed when “HIGH” manual speed is specified.
High-speed-level : Jog operation speed when [HIGH SPEED] is pressed.

S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT
These parameters specify the amount per move at inching operation by the programming
pendant. The referenced parameter differs according to the operation mode at inching operation.
Joint Operation
: 1 to 10 pulses in units of 1 pulse
Cartesian/cylindrical, user, tool : 0.01 to 2.55mm in units of 0.01mm
Motion about TCP

: 0.1 to 1.0° in units of 0.1°
S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE
This parameter value will be referenced when positioning is specified with the “MOVE” instruction: MOVJ (joint movement) or MOVL (linear movement).
<Example> MOVL V=100.0 PL=1
Positioning level
Positioning specification
The value set in this parameter specifies the range to enter in relation to the teaching point for
that step positioning. After entering the specified positioning zone, the manipulator starts
moving to the next step. The system is also set up so inward turning operation is carried out
in the moving section when moving to the next path; speed changeover is smooth.
Since operation will be turning inward during playback, as shown in the following diagram, use
setting values taking safety aspects into consideration.
8-3
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters
P1
l
P1
P1
l4
l3
l2
l1
l8
P1
NOTE
This process becomes effective when change in direction of steps is between 250° and
155°.
Position Level
SUPPLE
-MENT
Position levels are divided into nine stages of 0 to 8 with the “MOV” instruction.
e.g. MOVL V=500 PL=1 (PL:Position Level)
The functions at each level are as follows:
0: Complete positioning to the target point
1 to 8: Inward turning operation
Following are explanations of the respective processing details and their relations with the
parameter.
• Level 0
Determines positioning completion when the amount of deviation (number of pulses) to
the target point of each axis comes within the position set zone specified by the parameter.
After the positioning completes, the instruction system starts instruction to the next target
point.
• Level 1 to 8
Recognizes virtual positioning before the target point. The distance of the virtual target
position from the target point is specified at the positioning level.
Distance data corresponding to each level are set in the parameter. Determination of the
virtual target position is carried out in the instruction system.
Set zone: The zone of each positioning level set in the parameter. (μm)

S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START
Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies max. speed at low speed start. Specify the starting method for “initial operation speed of manipulator” (S2C169).
8-4
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED
Units: 0.01%
These parameters prescribe the link speed at jog operation by the programming pendant.
Specify the percentage (%) for the jog operation speed limit, the joint max. speed.
S1CxG045: Jog operation link speed at level “LOW”
S1CxG046: Jog operation link speed at level “MEDIUM”
S1CxG047: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH”
S1CxG048: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH SPEED”

S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED
Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies the speed for returning to work home position against the maximum
speed.

S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED
Units: 0.1mm/s
This parameter specifies the max. speed for searching.

S2C153: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION OF
JOG
This parameter specifies whether or not posture control is performed at cartesian operation of
“JOG” by the programming pendant. Use posture control unless a special manipulator model
is used.
0: With posture control
1: Without posture control

S2C154: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (WHEN
EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL FUNCTION USED)
This parameter specifies the TCP or reference point of motion about TCP when the external
reference point control function is used and the user coordinate system is selected by the programming pendant.
0: When manipulator TCP is selected
Manipulator TCP
8-5
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters
1: When external reference point is selected
External
reference
point

S2C238: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION
CHANGE
This parameter is used to change only the job teaching position of controlled group axis.
0: Not changed
1: Changed

S2C324, S2C325: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH
DEVIATION
These parameters specify the method of restarting the manipulator that has deviated from the
normal path such as an emergency stop or jog operation.
0: Move to the indicated step (initial setting).
1: After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated step.
2: Move back to the deviated position and stop.
S2C324
Parameter Setting
Value
Movement When Restarting
Move to next step.
Emergency stop
0
Movement
when restarting
Move to next step.
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated
step.
1
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
Move to the path deviated
position and then move to the
indicated step.
8-6
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters
S2C324
Parameter Setting
Value
Movement When Restarting
Emergency stop
2
Move to the path deviated
position and stop.
When restarting, move to
the indicated step.
S2C325
Parameter Setting
Value
Movement When Restarting
Move to the next step.
0
Movement
when restarting
JOG
Move to next step.
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated
step.
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
1
Move to the path deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
JOG
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
Move to the path deviated
position and stop. When
restarting, move to the
indicated step.
2
JOG
NOTE
• To the path deviated position, the manipulator moves in a straight line at low speed operation (SICxG044).
It is linear movement. After resetting from deviation, the speed becomes the same as
taught speed.
• The initial setting (prior to shipping) is 0: The manipulator moves in a straight line from the
present position to the indicated step.
8-7
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

S2C326: DEVIATED POSITION
This parameter specifies whether deviated position is to be robot current (reference) position
or feedback position.
0: Return to the feedback position.
1: Return to the current value (reference) position.
When emergency stop is applied during high-speed motion, the deviated position differs from
the robot current value (reference) position and feedback position as shown in the following.
Current value
(reference) position
Feedback position
Emergency stop

S2C327: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL POSITION CONTROL
This parameter selects tool position control methods at circular interpolation operation.
0: Fixed angle position
Interpolation is performed depending on the position change viewed from the base
coordinate.
As the figure below (left) shows, when tool position viewed from outside is not significantly changed and that position is mainly taught at teaching, this setting is required.
1: Rotating position by circular arc path
Interpolation is performed depending on the position change corresponding to circular arc path.
As the figure below (right) shows, when tool position corresponding to circular arc
path (tool position viewed from the center of the circular arc) is not significantly
changed, and that position is mainly taught at teaching, this setting is required.
1: Rotating position by circular arc path
0: Fixed angle position
P1
P1
P0
P0
P2
8-8
P2
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

S2C515: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to use the cursor advance control function or not.
0: Not use
1: Use

S2C516: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION
Units: %
When the manipulator stops during moving inner corner by CONT process, this parameter
specifies which position of the inner corner should be considered as the end of step.
Step 4
100%
B
When 50% is set, moves to Step 3 if the manipulator stops
in A section, and to Step 4 if the manipulator stops in B
section.
50%
A
Step 3
0%
8-9
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters

S2C517: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION
COMPLETION DELAY TIME
Units: ms
In order to recognize securely the completion of motion to the step of work start instruction
(such as ARCON instruction), this parameter specifies the delay time for motion completion of
the work start instruction step only.

S2C560: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING
Parameter Setting and Jog Operation Key Allocation
Coordinates/Parameter
S2C560= “0”
S2C560= “1”
Joint
Axis number order
Specified
Cylindrical
Axis number order
Specified
Cartesian
Specified
Specified
Tool
Specified
Specified
User
Specified
Specified
Axis number order: X: First axis, Y: Second axis, Z: Third axis
Specified: X: X-direction (RECT-X), Y: Y-direction (RECT-Y), Z: Z-direction (RECT-Z)

S3C806 to S3C808: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION
DURING PLAYBACK
These parameters specify the necessary data for position correcting function (PAM) during
playback operation.
S3C806 Specifies the limit of position correcting range (Units: μm)
S3C807 Specifies the limit of speed correcting range (Units: 0.01%)
S3C808 Specifies the correcting coordinates
0 : Base
1 : Robot
2 : Tool
3 : User 1
to
26:User 24
8-10
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
These parameters set various operations in the teach mode or remote mode.

S2C147: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
IS TURNED ON
The operation level when the control power supply is turned ON is set.
0: Operation Mode
1: Editing Mode
2: Management Mode

S2C148: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL
This parameter specifies whether the cartesian mode or cylindrical mode is affected when cartesian/cylindrical mode is selected by operation (coordinate) mode selection at axis operation
of programming pendant. This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION
window.
0: Cylindrical mode
1: Cartesian mode

S2C149: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED
This parameter prohibits switching coordinates during JOG operation by the programming
pendant.
0: Switching permitted for tool coordinates and user coordinates
1: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates
2: Switching prohibited for user coordinates
3: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates and user coordinates
8-11
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C150: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the execution units at step mode of “FORWARD” operation by the
programming pendant.
Parameter Setting
Value

Operation Units
Stops at every instruction
0
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
Stops at move instruction
1
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
S2C151: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT
“FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the method of instruction (except for move) execution at “FORWARD” operation by the programming pendant.
0: Executed by pressing [FWD] + [INTERLOCK]
1: Executed by pressing [FWD] only
2: Instruction not executed

S2C155: CHANGING STEP ONLY
This parameter specifies whether to permit only step changes in an editing-prohibited job.
When permitted, only position data can be changed but additional data such as speed cannot
be changed. This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C156: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE
This parameter specifies whether to assign different manual speeds for the joint coordinates
and other coordinates. If “NOT STORED” is selected, manual speed is not affected by changing the coordinates. If “STORED” is selected, manual speeds can be selected separately for
the joint coordinates and other coordinates.
0: Not stored
1: Stored
8-12
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C158: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION
This parameter designates either “before next step” or “after the cursor position (between
instructions)” as additional step position. This specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
<Example>
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
DOUT OT# (1) ON
13
MOVL V=50
Cursor position
S2C158-0 (Before the Next Step)
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
DOUT OT#(1) ON
13
MOVL V=100
14
MOVL V=50
Added step
S2C158-1 (Between Instructions)
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
MOVL V=100
13
DOUT OT# (1) ON
14
MOVL V=50
Added step

S2C159: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit master job changing operation. If
“PROHIBIT” is specified, the master job cannot be changed (or registered) easily. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
8-13
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C160: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN
PLAY MODE
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit in play mode to change the operation
that changes the operation condition. Even if an error occurs because of the operation with
the keys, the manipulator does not stop. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C161: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION
This parameter specifies whether to permit reserved work job changing operation.
The designation can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C162: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN PLAY
MODE
This parameter specifies whether the master or submaster call operation in play mode is permitted or not. When the independent control function is valid, the master job for sub-task is
specified at the same time. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION
window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C163: LANGUAGE LEVEL
This parameter specifies the level of the robot language (INFORM III). The levels simplify the
instruction registering operation. With NX100, all robot instructions can be executed regardless of specification of instruction sets. The specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
0: Contracted Level
Only frequently used robot instructions are selected to reduce the number of instructions to
be registered. Robot instructions displayed on the instruction dialog box are also reduced
so that specification is simplified.
1: Standard Level
2: Expanded Level
All the robot instructions are available in standard and expanded levels. The two levels are
distinguished by the number of additional information items (tags) that can be used with
robot instructions. At the expanded level, the flowing functions are available.
• Local Variables and Array Variables
• Use of Variables for Tags (Example: MOVJ VJ=I000)
The above functions are not available at the standard level, however, which reduces
the number of data required to register instructions, thereby simplifying the operation.
8-14
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C166: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to set a line of instructions that has been input on the input
buffer line when pressing the first soft key for each instruction. If “PROVIDED” is selected, the
instructions are set.
0: Without learning function
1: With learning function

S2C167: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS
TURNED ON
This parameter specifies the processing of the job name, step No., and line No. that are set
when the control power supply is turned ON.
0: Reproduces the address when power supply is turned ON.
1: Lead address (Line”0”) of the master job.

S2C168: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION
These parameters specify the displaying method on the JOB LIST window at job selection.
0: Order of Names
1: Order of Date

S2C169: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR
This parameter specifies the operation speed level of the first section when starting. Specify
the operation speed with the low-speed start (S1CxG044). When starting at low-speed, the
manipulator stops after reaching the indicated step regardless of the cycle setting. Once the
manipulator is paused during the low-speed operation, it moves at teaching speed when
restarted.
0: Specified on the SPECIAL PLAY window. Operates at low speed only when low
speed start is set. Operates at taught speed when not instructed.
1: Starts at low speed after editing regardless of soft key instructions.
8-15
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C170: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP”
Parameter Setting
Value
NOTE

Operation Units
Stops at every instruction.
0
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
Stops at move instruction.
1
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
When operating “FORWARD” by the programming pendant, the units for execution are set
in another parameter (S2C150).
S2C171: EXTERNAL START
This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from external input is accepted or not.
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C172: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START
This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from the programming pendant is
accepted or not.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C173: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM
This parameter specifies the units for speed data input and display.
mm/s : in units of 0.1 mm/s
cm/min : in units of 1cm/min
inch/min : in units of 1 inch/min
mm/min : in units of 1 mm/min
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: mm/sec
1: cm/min
2: inch/min
3: mm/min
8-16
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C174: RESERVED START
This parameter specifies whether a reserved start instruction from the programming pendant
is accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C176: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY
MODE)
This parameter specifies whether a job selection in play mode at remote function is prohibited
or not.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C177: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH
This parameter specifies whether mode switching from the outside is accepted or not. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C179: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the outside is accepted or not. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited

S2C180: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the programming pendant is accepted
or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
8-17
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C181: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION
This parameter specifies whether a servo ON instruction is accepted or not. More than one
instruction can be specified. For example, to permit the servo ON instruction from an external
input only, set “6.” In this case, servo ON instruction from the programming pendant is not
accepted.The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
d7

d0
E xte rn a l in p u t p r o h ib ite d
: 1 (V A L ID )
P ro g ra m m in g p e n d a n t
: 2 (V A L ID )
DSW
: 4 (V A L ID )
S2C182: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” IS
SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE
This parameter specifies whether each operation of the following is valid when “IO” is selected
for remote function selection. IO and command are available for remote function selection:
“IO” is set prior to shipping. “Command” is valid when transmission function (optional) is specified.
d7
d0
Programming pendant ([SERVO ON READY] key)
: 1 (VALID)
valid/invalid

Programming pendant (Enable switch)
: 2 (VALID)
Mode switching valid/invalid
: 4 (VALID)
Master call valid/invalid
: 8 (VALID)
Cycle switching valid/invalid
: 16 (VALID)
Start valid/invalid
: 32 (VALID)
S2C186: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE
The registration of the step when the tool number is changed allows the setting to be made as
prohibited.
If this parameter is set to “1” (prohibited), the following operations are prohibited.
0: Permitted
1: Prohibited
• Modification of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currently-selected tool number,
the step cannot be modified.
• Deletion of a step
Even if the teaching step position coincides with the current position, the step cannot be
deleted when the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currently-selected tool
number.
• Addition of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step indicated by the cursor differs from the currently-selected tool number, the step cannot be added.
8-18
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C211: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the local mode to the remote mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained

S2C212: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the remote mode to the local mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained

S2C230: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the first cycle mode for when the power is turned ON.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained

S2C231: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the play mode to the teach mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained

S2C232: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the teach mode to the play mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0: Step
1: 1 cycle
2: Continuous
3: Setting retained
8-19
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C297: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION
On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the user input/output signal number
can be displayed as alias instead of the signal number itself.
S2C297
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function invalid
1
Function valid
With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name (alias)?” is displayed
when a signal (IN#(), OT#(), IG#(), OG#(), IGH#(), OGH#()) is selected on the DETAIL EDIT
window. Select “YES” and the signal select window appears. Then select the target signal of
number and press [ENTER], and the registered name is displayed instead of the signal number. However, if the signal number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number as
usual.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output OUT#0001 as “OUTPUT 1”
In the case of DOUT instruction:
S2C297=0 : DOUT OT#(1) ON
S2C297=1 : DOUT OT#(OUTPUT 1) ON
SUPPLE
-MENT
Select {IN/OUT}  {UNIVERSAL INPUT/OUTPUT} to edit signal names on the window.
Up to 16 characters can be entered as a signal name. However, when this function is valid,
if the content below is entered, the error message shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
•
•
•
•
Letters beginning with a number
Letters including the signs below:
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” + “number”
<Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2...
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R, S, P, BP, EX, PX,
LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP, LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment and the same comment can
be registered for two or more signals. In this case, although this function is valid, the number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead of the name.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output OUT#0002 as “ ‘OUTPUT 2”
S2C297=0 : DOUT OT#(2) ON
S2C297=1 : DOUT OT#(2) ON
8-20
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C298: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION
On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the variable (including local variables)
can be displayed as alias instead of the variable number.
S2C298
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function invalid
1
Function valid
With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name (alias) ?” is displayed
when you select the variable on the DETAIL EDIT window. Select “YES” and the variable
select window appears. Then select the target variable of number and press [ENTER], and
the registered name is displayed instead of the variable number. However, if the variable number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number as usual.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B000 as “WORK KIND”
In the case of SET instruction
S2C298=0 : SET B000 128
S2C298=1 : SET WORK KIND 128
SUPPLE
-MENT
Select {VARIABLE} from the menu to select each variable and edit the variable name. Up
to 16 characters can be entered as a variable name. However, when this function is valid, if
the content below is entered, the error message shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
• Letters beginning with a number
• Letters including the signs below:
•
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
• Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” + “number”
<Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2...
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R, S, P, BP, EX, PX,
LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP, LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment and the same comment can
be registered for two or more variables. In this case, although this function is valid, the
number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead of the name.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B001 as “WORKNUM”
S2C298=0 : SET B001 10
S2C298=1 : SET B001 10
8-21
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C299: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION
This function enables registration of any particular input/output signal/variable. Reference and
editing of signals/variables are possible on the same window.
S2C299
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function Invalid
1
Function Valid
With this function valid, the sub-menu {I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE} opens under the main
menu {ARC WELDING}, {SPOT WELDING}, {GENERAL}, {HANDLING} (differs by application). Select {I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE}, and the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window
appears as shown below.
I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE
No I/O-VARIABLE
CONTENTS NAME
250 BYTE001
01 B001
02 #10011 OUT#0002
OUT0002
123456789 DOUBLE002
03 D002
04 #82015
05 #00010 IN#0001
CMD REMOTE SEL
SIM
06 I000
IN0001
500 INTEGER000
07
08
09
10
11
12
I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
On the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window, any of the input/output signals/variables can be
selected and registered (up to 32 items). Registrable signals/variables are as follows:
Registrable Items on the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
Input/Output Signals
Variables
USER INPUT SIGNAL
USER OUTPUT SIGNAL
PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL
BYTE TYPE VARIABLE (B VARIABLE)
INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (I VARIABLE)
DOUBLE-PRECISION INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (D VARIABLE)
The contents and names of the registered signals/variables can be checked and edited on this
window.
In addition, the data list of registered signals/variables can be loaded, saved, verified or
deleted with an external memory unit.
Only when this function is valid, “I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name: USRIOVAR.DAT)”
is displayed and can be selected. To display the “I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name:
USRIOVAR.DAT)”, select {FD/CF}  {LOAD} {SAVE} {VERIFY} {DELETE}  {SYSTEM
8-22
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters
DATA}

S2C317 to S2C321: TIME RESET
These parameters specify whether resetting operation of the specified times is permitted or
not.
S2C317 : CONTROL POWER ON TIME
S2C318 : SERVO POWER ON TIME
S2C319 : PLAYBACK TIME
S2C320 : WORK TIME
S2C321 : WEAVING TIME
0: Prohibit Resetting
1: Permit Resetting
“PERMIT” is set as the initial value for the work time and motion time.

S2C333: TOOL NO. SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether tool number switching is permitted or not. If “PERMIT” is
selected, 24 types of tools from number 0 to 23 can be switched. If “NOT PERMIT” is
selected, only number “0” can be used.
0: Prohibited
1: Permitted

S2C335: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER
This parameter specifies whether the buzzer sound at position teaching is used or not.
0: With buzzer
1: Without buzzer
8-23
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C336: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin Synchronous
Function Used)
This parameter specifies whether the manipulator at the synchronizing side is to be linked
when the manipulator and the station at the synchronized side are performing FWD/BWD or
test run, by using the twin synchronous function.
0: Not operating
1: Linking
0 : Does not operate the synchronizing side
while teaching the synchronized side.
1 : Links the synchronizing side while teaching
the synchronized side.
Synchronizing side
Synchronizing side
8-24
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters

S2C339: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION FUNCTION
This function is used to decide where to resume the playback on the start operation after suspending the playback and moving the cursor or selecting other jobs.
0: Starts operation where the cursor is located in the job displayed at the moment.
1: The playback continuation window appears. Select “YES” and the playback resumes
where the cursor has been located when the playback suspended. If “NO” is selected,
the playback resumes where the cursor is located in the job displayed at the moment.
S2C339
Parameter Setting Value
Where the Playback Resumes
0
Resumes where the cursor is located in the job displayed at
the moment.
Resumes where the cursor has been located when the playback suspended OR where the cursor is located in the job
displayed at the moment.
<Example>
Suspended at step 0003 during the playback of job A

1
Displays job B

Starts operation

On the playback operation continuation window
• When “YES” selected, the playback resumes from step
0003 of job A
• When “NO” selected, the playback resumes from the current position in job B
* When this function is valid (S2C339=1), a light blue cursor is displayed at the instruction section of step where the playback has been stopped. When “YES” is selected, the playback
resumes where this cursor is located.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME : TEST4-1
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO : 001
TOOL : 00
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=0.78
0002 TIMER T=2.00
0003 MOVJ VJ=0.78
0004 MOVJ VJ=0.78
0005 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
NOTE
Short Cut
If a job has been edited or FWD/BWD/TEST RUN operation(s) have been executed, the
playback cannot resume where it has suspended. Also this function is invalid if the
reserved start function is set valid (S2C174=0).
8-25
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
8.4
Parameters according to Interference Area
These parameters limit the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or set the interference area for axis interference or cubic interference.

S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT
Soft limit is set independently for each axis by pulse value setting. Set current value (pulse
value) of the axis at the soft limit set up position.
Operation area
Soft limit
Limit switch
Mechanical
operation limit
8-26
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area

S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK
This parameter specifies whether to check the cube soft limit. More than one soft limit can be
specified.
0 : No check
1 : With check
d7
d0
Cube 1 soft limit (base coordinates value of robot 1 TCP)
Cube 2 soft limit (base coordinates value of robot 2 TCP)
Cube 3 soft limit (base coordinates value of robot 3 TCP)
Cube 4 soft limit (base coordinates value of robot 4 TCP)
If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.
S3C000 to S3C023: Cube Soft Limit
SUPPLE
-MENT
Soft Limit
Soft limit is a software-type function to limit the range of movement of the manipulator.
If the TCP reaches the soft limit during operation, the manipulator automatically stops and
no longer moves in that same direction. An alarm occurs if this soft limit is exceeded during playback. This soft limit is classified into two types.
• Cube Soft Limit
Soft limit is set with the absolute value on the base coordinates.
z
x
• Pulse Soft Limit (Independent Axis Soft Limit)
Y
Refer to " S1CxG200 to S1CxG215: PULSE SOFT LIMIT. "

S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK
This parameter specifies whether to check for interference with each manipulator. If “WITH
CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.
S3C024 to S3C031: S-axis Interference Area
8-27
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
S2C003 to S2C050: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK

1. Designation of checking
These parameters specify the cube/axis interference to be used by bit.
0 : Cube Interference/Axis Interference Not Used
1 : Robot 1
2 : Robot 2
3 : Robot 3
5 : Base Axis 1
6 : Base Axis 2
7 : Base Axis 3
9 : Station Axis 1
10 : Station Axis 2
11 : Station Axis 3
13 : Station Axis 5
14: Station Axis 6
15: Station Axis 7
17 : Station Axis 9
18: Station Axis 10
19: Station Axis 11
4: Robot 4
8: Base Axis 4
12: Station Axis 4
16: Station Axis 8
20: Station Axis 12
2. Checking method
Designates whether checking is performed by command or feedback.
Designation of checking (data setting)
0: Not used
1: Robot 1,
, 20: Station axis 12
Checking method (bit setting)
0: Command, 1: Feedback
SUPPLE
-MENT
Checking method
The checking method differs according to ON/OFF status of servo power supply.
Checking Method Designation Servo Power Supply ON Servo Power Supply OFF
Command
Command
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
During the servo float function operation, checking is performed by feedback regardless of
the checking method designation.
8-28
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
Interference Area
It is possible to output whether the TCP during operation is inside or outside as a status
signal, and to set the area to control the position by parameters S2C003 to S2C114. When
the manipulator attempts to enter this area, the corresponding input signal (e.g. an
“entrance prohibit signal”) is detected. The manipulator stops immediately if there is an
input signal and goes into waiting status until this signal is cleared. This signal is processed in the I/O section. Three methods of interference area settings are prepared for
manipulators and stations. For a system with one manipulator, use robot 1.
• S-axis Interference Area
Position is controlled by the pulse value of the S-axis.
(-) si de
(+) s ide
In left area
In right area
• Cubic Interference Area
Up to 32 cubic areas can be set. The edges of the cubes are set parallel to the robot
coordinates or the user coordinates.
Z
Cube Setting Method
Base coordinates
(robot coordinates,
user coordinates)
S2C003-S2C034
S2C051-S2C114
S3C032-S3C543
X
Y
Thirty two cubic areas can be set,
each cube is set parallel to the set coordinates.
Use cube
intrf. check?
No
Yes
Decide the using
method.
Set the area.
Completed
• Axis Interference Area
Up to 32 areas can be set. Each operation area maximum and minimum value are set for
the robot, base axis, and station axis plus and minus side.
Max value
positive side (+)
0
Min value
negative side (-)
ON
OF F
SUPPLE
-MENT
8-29
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
S2C051 to S2C114: CUBE USING METHOD

These parameters specify the coordinates for defining the cube. If the user coordinates are
selected, also specify the user coordinate system numbers. Set cubic area referring to the
cubic interference areas shown below.
Coordinate specification
0 : Pulse (axis interference)
1 : Base coordinates
2 : Robot coordinates
3 : User coordinates
Coordinate No.: Specify the user coordinate number when selecting “3: User Coordinates.”
Units: 1μm
Precaution When Setting the Interference Area
SUPPLE
-MENT
It will be necessary to consider the following when setting the cubic interference and S-axis
interference areas. The manipulator is processed to decelerate to stop from the point
where it enters in the area. Therefore, set the areas in consideration of the amount of the
manipulator movement in the deceleration section shown in the figure below.
Interference area
Deceleration
Stop
Speed
Movement
Speed reduction section
The move amount in the speed reduction section is dependent on the moving speed of the
manipulator at that time:
V = 1500mm/s  approx. 300mm (Max.)
V = 1000mm/s  approx. 160mm
V = 30mm/s  approx. 3 to 4 mm
V = 20mm/s  approx. 2mm
8-30
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
SUPPLE
-MENT
Interference Prevention in Interference Area
Processing to prevent interference is executed in the I/O processing section. The relation
between the NX100 I/O signal and manipulator operation is shown below.
Start
Is the TCP within
the cube?
Yes
No
Is the "CUBE
ENTRANCE PROHIBIT"
signal ON?
Yes
No
Outputs "WAIT" signal.
"WAIT" reset
Manipulator stops.
"OPERATING IN CUBE"
signal output
Has it left the check
cube?
No
Yes
In wait status with the entrance prohibit signal, the manipulator just barely enters the area
for speed reduction processing and then stops.
8-31
8.4 Parameters according to Interference Area
SUPPLE
-MENT
NX100
Operating inside
CUBE1
Output in cube during
operation.
Operating inside
CUBE2
Output during waiting by
entrance prohibit signal.
Interference waiting
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
These signals are checked
when entering the cube.
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Manipulator A
Manipulator B
Operating inside
CUBE1
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE2
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE1
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE2
Interference waiting
Interference waiting
Alarm signal
Connection Example Where Two Manipulators are Operated in the Same Area

S2C188 to S2C193: ROBOT INTERFERENCE CHECK
This parameter specifies whether to check interference between robots 1, 2, 3, and 4. Interference check is executed in the spherical range having the TCP in the center. If “provided” is
selected, also select the following parameters.
ROBOT INTERFERENCE CHECK (units: μm)
S3C801 : ROBOT1 SPHERE RADIUS
S3C802 : ROBOT 2 SPHERE RADIUS
S3C803 : ROBOT3 SPHERE RADIUS
S3C804 : ROBOT4 SPHERE RADIUS

S3C000 to S3C023: CUBE SOFT LIMIT
These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C001 parameter. For details, see the
explanation of the S2C001 parameter.
8-32
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O
S3C024 to S3C031: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C002 parameter. For details, see the
explanation of the S2C002 parameter.
S3C032 to S3C543: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C003 to S2C034 parameters. For details,
see the explanation of the S2C003 to S2C050 parameters.
S3C801 to S3C804: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA

These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C188 to S2C193 parameters. For details,
see the explanation of the S2C188 to S2C193 parameters.
S3C805: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE

Units: 1μm
This parameter specifies a side length of the cube for the work home position.
8.5
Parameters according to Status I/O
These parameters set the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.

S2C187: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS
ON
This parameter specifies the state of the user output relays when the control power is turned
ON. Since the power OFF state, including peripheral devices, cannot be completely reproduced, take note when restarting.
0: Reset to the power OFF state
1: Initialized (all user relays OFF)
8-33
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O

S4C000 to S4C007: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether to execute priority checks with parameters when instructions covering the input group (1G#) are executed. The instructions covering the input groups
are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15
d0
d15
S4C000
d0
S4C001
d15
IG#01
IG#17
IG#02
IG#18
IG#03
IG#19
IG#04
IG#20
IG#05
IG#21
IG#06
IG#22
IG#07
IG#23
IG#08
IG#09
IG#24
IG#25
IG#10
IG#26
IG#11
IG#27
IG#12
IG#28
IG#13
IG#29
IG#14
IG#30
IG#15
IG#16
IG#31
IG#32
d0
S4C002
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each input group and are written in even parity. If
an error is detected during parity check, an alarm occurs and the manipulator stops. Remains
unchanged if no parity check is specified.
8-34
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O

S4C008 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is executed with parity check
(even parity).
d15
d0
d15
S4C008
d0
S4C009
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1)
d15
PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1)
d0
S4C010
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
PARITY CHECK AT BIT-ON (1)
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each output group. For example, if OG#01 is
specified with parity and DOUT OG# (1) 2 is executed, the result will be 00000010 if 2 is
binary converted. Since there will be only one bit (odd) ON at this time, the parity bit (highest
level bit) will be set to ON and 10000010 (130) will be output to OG# (1).
As in the case of a variable such as DOUT OG# (1) B003 parity bits are added to the contents
of the variable data. However, if the contents of the variable exceed 127, as in the case of
DOUT OG# (1) 128, an alarm will occur. Remains unchanged if no parity check is specified.
8-35
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O

S4C016 to S4C023: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether to handle the input group data as binary data or as BCD
data when an instruction for the input group (1G#) is executed. The instructions covering the
input groups are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15
d0
d15
S4C016
d0
S4C017
IG#01
IG#17
IG#02
IG#18
IG#03
IG#19
IG#04
IG#20
IG#05
IG#21
IG#06
IG#22
IG#07
IG#23
IG#08
IG#09
IG#24
IG#25
IG#10
IG#26
IG#11
IG#27
IG#12
IG#28
IG#13
IG#29
IG#14
IG#30
IG#15
IG#16
IG#31
IG#32
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d0
S4C018
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
8-36
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O

S4C024 to S4C031: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is executed with binary data or
BCD data.
d15
d0
d15
S4C024
d0
S4C025
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d0
S4C026
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
BCD DATA SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
Differences Between Binary Data and BCD Data
SUPPLE
-MENT
For the input group and output group, the result will depend on whether the binary or BCD
formula is used.
<Example> When the input function is [10101010]
DATA
EDIT
USER INPUT
GROUP
IN#0001
IN#0002
IN#0003
IN#0004
IN#0005
IN#0006
IN#0007
IN#0008
DISPLAY
IG#01
#10010
#10011
#10012
#10013
#10014
#10015
#10016
#10017
State
0:10 00:16








1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Binary
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
24 = 16
25 = 32
26 = 64
27 = 128
BCD
Case
1
0
4
0
16
0
64
0
85
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
Case
Total
is in
ones.
1
0
4
0
1
Total
is in
tens.
0
4
0
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
Binary data value
5
5
55
BCD data value
!
However, in the case of BCD data, because the upper bound value is 99, it is not possible
to use any value which exceeds nine in the one or ten digit place.
8-37
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation

S4C032 to S4C039: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED
AT SWITCHING MODE
Set the user output group with bit to be initialized at switching mode. Use these parameters
when using user output signals as work instructions for peripheral devices.
d15
d0
d15
S4C032
d0
S4C033
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d15
INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)
d0
S4C034
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
INITIAL VALUE SPECIFICATION AT BIT-ON (1)

S4C126: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP
ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS
This parameter specifies the user output number to output the manipulator drop allowable
range error alarm occurrence externally. When this function is not used, set “0.”
8.6
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
These parameters make the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between
manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
8-38
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation

S2C164: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT
This parameter specifies whether the speed inputting for move instructions of the master robot
in a coordinated job is permitted or not.
<Example> 0: Not Provided
SMOVL
1: Provided
V=100
← Master side
+MOVL
SMOV L
V=100
+MOV L
V=100
Speed specification
not provided

← Master side
Speed specification provided
S2C165: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT
This parameter specifies which interpolation is permitted for move instructions for the master
robot in a coordinated job. More than one instruction can be specified.
d7
d0
+ MOVJ : 1(VALID)
+ MOVL: 2(VALID)
+ MOVC : 4(VALID)
+ MOVS: 8(VALID)

S2C183: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION OR
TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the operation method at FWD/BWD operation or test run by independent control.
0: The job of the task that is currently displayed operates.
1: Jobs of all the tasks operate.
 When master task is currently displayed:
Master
task
: Not operating
Sub task 1
: Operating
Sub task 2
 When sub task 1 is currently displayed:
Master
task
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
Sub task 1
Sub task 2
 When sub task 2 is currently displayed:
Master
task
Sub task 1
Sub task 2
0: One of the task jobs that are currently
displayed operates.
1: All task jobs operate.
8-39
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation

S2C184: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7 BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the job which is called up when the master of the subtask is called up
by independent control.
0: Master job
1: Root job
Master Job: Job registered in the master control window
Root Job: Job activated by PSTART instruction

S2C194: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the function to display the current value of the station axis in
the following units is valid/invalid.
• Rotary axis : Angle (deg)
• Servo track : Distance (mm)
0: Invalid
1: Valid

S2C195 to S2C206: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT
This parameter specifies the station axis displayed unit (bit specification).
0: Display angle (deg)
1: Display in distance (mm)
Setting Method
Set a numerical value (decimal) where the bit of the axis to be displayed in the units of distance becomes 1.
d7
d6
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
(32) (16)
(8)
(4)
(2)
(1)
d5
Decimal
Station 1st axis
Station 2nd axis
Station 3rd axis
Station 4th axis
Station 5th axis
Station 6th axis
<Example> When 1st and 3rd axes of station 1 are displayed in the units of distance:
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
0
0
0
1
(4)
0
1
(1)
4
+
1
Therefore, set parameter S2C195 of station 1 to 5.
8-40
Set 1 to axis displayed in
distance.
=
5
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation

S2C322: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED MANIPULATOR (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for synchronized manipulator performing
compensation during playback by using the twin synchronous function.
0: Change posture according to station movement
1: Fixed in relation to the ground
0 : Change posture according to staion movement
1 : Fixed in relation to the ground

S2C323: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for manipulator executing compensation
at the linking side when job linking is performed during FWD/BWD operation by the twin synchronous function.
0: Change posture according to station movement
1: Fixed in relation to the ground

S2C549: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP
SPECIFICATION
When the servo power supply is individually turned OFF where jobs in multiple number of
tasks are operated using the independent control function, the job execution of the control
group whose servo power supply is turned OFF is interrupted. The jobs of other control
groups continue their execution.
For the jobs without control group specification such as master job, the conditions for execution can be set by the parameter.
0: Execution possible only when servo power supply to all the axes have been turned
ON.
1: Execution possible when servo power supply to any axis is turned ON.
8-41
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
S2C550: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION

This parameter prohibits step-back operation of a job without a step.
d7
d0
"BWD" operation for a job without a group axis. 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled
"BWD" operation for concurrent job. 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled
S3C809: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT STATION
POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)

Used when the twin synchronous function is used. This parameter specifies the maximum
deviation between the teaching position and the current station position.
0
: No deviation check
Other than 0: Deviation angle (units : 0.1°)
Sub-task1
Sub-task2
R1
R2
Manipulator at
synchronizing side
Conpensation
Position set when
teaching synchronizing side
Deviation made
at playback
Station S1
Station
In the above figure on the left, the follower R2 executes the job of subtask 2 in synchronization
with the motion of the station axis which is moved by the R1 job. In this procedure, the job of
subtask 2 controls only the R2 robot axis.
If the teaching position of the station in the subtask 2 differs from the station current position
(controlled by the subtask 1 job), the difference is automatically offset so that R2 keeps the
taught position in relation to the station.
Difference between the taught and the station current positions is always monitored. If the difference exceeds a set value of the parameter, the message “PULSE LIMIT (TWIN COORDINATED)” appears.
8-42
8.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
8.7
Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
These parameters make the settings for other functions or applications.

S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING
These parameters prescribe cutting operation at small circle cutting.
S1CxG049
: Set the minimum diameter of a figure in the units of μm that can
(Minimum diameter) be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG050
: Set the maximum diameter of a figure in the units of μm that can
(Maximum diameter) be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG051
(Maximum speed)

: Set the maximum cutting speed at operation by CUT instruction
in the units of 0.1mm/s.
S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING DIRECTION
LIMIT VALUE
These parameters set the cutting direction limits at small circle cutting.

S1CxG052
(+ direction)
: Set the limit value in the positive direction of cutting angle DIR
set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.
S1CxG053
(- direction)
: Set the limit value in the negative direction of cutting angle DIR
set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.
S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING OVERLAP
VALUE
These parameters set the overlapped value at small circle cutting.

S1CxG054
(Operation radius)
: Set the operation radius at inner rotation in the units of 1 μm after
overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG055
(Rotation angle)
: Set the rotation angle at inner rotation in the units of 0.1° after
overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION
These parameters set the minimum diameter (S1CxG063) and the maximum diameter
(S1CxG064) for the pattern cutting in units of μm.

S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION
This parameter sets which axis to be shifted (mirror-shift: invert the sign).
1st axis (0: Not invert, 1: Invert)
6th axis
8-43
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters
S2C332: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD

This parameter specifies how to operate a relative job. A method to convert a relative job into
a standard job (pulse), and a conversion method to calculate the aimed position (pulse position) when a relative job is operated can be specified.
0: Previous step with priority (B-axis moving distance minimized.)
1: Form with priority
2
Previous step with priority (R-axis moving distance minimized.)
S3C819 to S3C898: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT
(When analog output corresponding to speed function is used)

By setting a constant to filter, a filter processing can be performed for the output analog signal.
S3C899: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form cutting
function is used)

This parameter specifies the path correction value for pattern cutting operation. A value 1/2 of
the cut width is set in units of μm.
8.8
Hardware Control Parameters
These parameters make the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.

S2C508: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION
This parameter specifies anticipation output.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
The anticipator function is a function to quicken or slow the ON/OFF timing of four user output
signals and two user output groups. Using this function, signal output can be carried out
before or after the step is reached. As a result, timing deviation due to delayed motion of
peripheral devices and robot motion can be adjusted.
Setting the time to a negative value (-) advances the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed motion of peripheral
devices.
Setting the time to a positive value (+) delays the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed robot motion.
8-44
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters
<Advanced Signal Output>
Signal output is carried out before the step is reached.
Step
Instructions
:
n-1
n
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(1) ON
MOVL
n+1
Step
User output
n-1
n
n+1
ON
OFF
Setting time for advanced output
<Delayed Signal Output>
Signal output is carried out after the step is reached.
Step
Instructions
:
n-1
n
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(2) ON
MOVL
n+1
Step
User output
n-1
n
n+1
ON
OFF
Setting time for delayed output

S2C646 to S2C648: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION
This parameter specifies a detection for cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm sensor, connected to
power ON unit.
0: No detection
1: Detected with message display
2: Detected with message and alarm display

S4C181 to S4C212: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO.
Up to 32 output signals can be turned ON/OFF with the programming pendant. The object
relay No. is set in these parameters. Although it is possible to set optional values for output
No. 1 to 1024 in the parameters, the following must be taken into consideration.
• Avoid setting duplicate numbers.
• The signal turned ON or OFF with the programming pendant is operated again or remains
unchanged until the instruction is executed.
8-45
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters

S4C213 to S4C244: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS
These parameters specify the operating method of output signals by the programming pendant. The operating method can be specified for each output signal.
Parameter Setting
Value
0
Operation of Output Signal
+ON
ON
-OFF
OFF
+ON
1
ON/OFF with the key
ON while the key
is pressed
OFF if the key is
not pressed
ON
OFF

S2C649 to S2C651: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION

S2C652 to S2C654: COOLING FAN ALARM 2 OPERATION

S2C655 to S2C657: COOLING FAN ALARM 3 OPERATION
These parameters specify the operation of cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm sensor, connected to
power ON unit.
Each bit specifies the power ON unit to which the detecting sensor is connected.
d7
d0
S2C649,S2C652,S2C655
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 1
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 2
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 3
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 4
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 5
SERVOPACK#1 - Power ON unit 6
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 1
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 2
d7
d0
S2C650,S2C653,S2C656
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 3
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 4
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 5
SERVOPACK#2 - Power ON unit 6
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 1
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 2
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 3
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 4
d7
d0
S2C651,S2C654,S2C657
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 5
SERVOPACK#3 - Power ON unit 6
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 1
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 2
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 3
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 4
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 5
SERVOPACK#4 - Power ON unit 6
8-46
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

S2C658 to S2C660: FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS

S2C661 to S2C663: FAN ALARM 2 POWER SOURCE STATUS

S2C664 to S2C666: FAN ALARM 3 POWER SOURCE STATUS
8.9

TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
RS000: COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
The protocol of the serial port of the NCP01 circuit board is specified.
0: No protocol
2: Basic protocol
3: FC1 protocol
8.9.1
Basic Protocol
Specify when using Yaskawa data transmission functions.

RS030: NUMBER OF DATA BITS
This parameter specifies the number of data bits.

RS031: NUMBER OF STOP BITS
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits.

RS032: PARITY
This parameter specifies the parity bits.

RS033: TRANSMISSION SPEED
This parameter specifies the transmission speed in units of bauds.

RS034: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A)
Units: 0.1 seconds
This timer monitors the sequence. It specifies the response waiting time for invalid or missing
responses.

RS035: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER (TIMER B)
This timer monitors text reception. Specify the monitoring time to wait for text termination
character.
8-47
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

RS036: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES
This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of the control characters for
invalid or missing responses.

RS037: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES
This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of text for block check error
(NAK reception).

RS038: BLOCK CHECK METHOD
This parameter specifies the checking method for text transmission errors. Set “0” for this protocol.
8.9.2
FC1 Protocol
The following protocols naturally correspond to the external memory unit, YASNAC FC1 or
FC2.

RS050: NUMBER OF DATA BITS
This parameter specifies the number of data bits.

RS051: NUMBER OF STOP BITS
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits.

RS052: PARITY
This parameter specifies the parity bits.

RS053: TRANSMISSION SPEED
This parameter specifies the transmission speed in units of bauds.

RS054: RESPONSE WAITING TIMER (TIMER A)
Units: 0.1 seconds
This timer monitors the sequence. It specifies the response waiting time for invalid or missing
responses.

RS055: TEXT TERMINATION MONITORING TIMER (TIMER B)
This timer monitors text reception. Specify the monitoring time to wait for text termination
character.

RS056: NUMBER OF ENQ RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES
This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of the control characters for
invalid or missing responses.
8-48
8.10 Application Parameters

RS057: NUMBER OF DATA RE-TRANSMISSION RETRIES
This parameter specifies the number of re-transmission attempts of text for block check error
(NAK reception).

RS058: FC2 FORMAT SPECIFICATION
Specify the format type of the floppy disk used with external memory (YASNAC FC2).
NOTE

720 kilobytes are unconditionally specified for YASNAC FC2 (2DD floppy disk exclusive
use).
RS059: EXTERNAL MEMORY FILE OVERWRITE
SPECIFICATION
Specify whether to accept the file overwrite of the external memory (YASNAC FC2 or FC1).
8.10 Application Parameters
8.10.1

Arc Welding
AxP000: APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the application. Set “0” for arc welding.

AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START
CONDITION FILE
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding start condition file to
be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a lower number are automatically assigned
to Power Source 1. For a system with one Power Source, set “49” (maximum value).
Condition file
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2

AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END
CONDITION FILES
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding END condition file to
be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a lower number are automatically assigned
to Power Source 1. For a system with one Power Source, set “13” (maximum value).
8-49
8.10 Application Parameters
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2

AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY
This parameter specifies whether the welding speed is specified by the “ARCON” instruction,
by the welding start condition file, or by the additional times of the “MOV” instruction.

AxP009: WORK CONTINUING
This parameter specifies whether to output an “ARCON” instruction to restart after the manipulator stopped while the “ARCON” instruction is being output.

AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the beginning number (0 to 12) of the analog output channel to the
Power Source. “0” indicates that no Power Source exists.

AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED
These parameters specify the manual wire operation speed as a percentage of the maximum
instruction value. Instruction polarity is determined by the current instruction in the Power
Source characteristic file. The setting range is from 0 to 100.

AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME
These parameters specify the welding control time in units of minutes. The setting range is
from 0 to 999.

AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL
These parameters specify the number of welding controls. The setting range is from 0 to 99.

AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO. (Jigless
system)
These parameters specify the user output number for the tool open/close operation by specific
keys.
8.10.2

Handling Application
AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION
These parameters set the output signal to assign for f1 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-1 to HAND4-1
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP004).
8-50
8.10 Application Parameters

AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION
These parameters set the output signal to assign for f2 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-2 to HAND4-2
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP005)
8.10.3

Spot Welding
AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF CONNECTED POWER
SOURCES
The initial value is set to 4. The value is automatically set at start-up. No modification is
needed.

AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL
This parameter specifies which stroke switching signal is output ON or OFF to make the gun
fully-opened for each gun.
Bit specification (1 for 01) for 8 guns. The initial setting is “0.”
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | | | | | |
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Gun number
AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT
When using the X2 gear mechanical stopper gun and switching gun stroke, this parameter
sets the time from the stroke-switching-sequence start until the pressure instruction end.
Setting range: 0.0 to 9.9 sec.
The initial setting is “0,” with which the switching signal is output for the “stopper-type stroke
switching time” set in the file, and then the gun pressure instruction is turned OFF.

AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS
When adding the parity signal to the welding condition signal with the Power Source connected to each welding gun, this parameter specifies odd or even parity.
Bit specification for 4 Power Sources. (0 : odd number, 1 : even number) The initial setting is
“0.”
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | |
4 3 2 1

Power Source number
AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME
When executing the GUNCL or SPOT instruction with NWAIT specified in the previous move
instruction but the time is not specified by ATT in the GUNCL or SPOT instruction, this parameter specifies the anticipate condition (time). The initial setting is “0,” with which the each
instruction is executed as soon as the taught position of the previous move instruction is
reached, as normal operation.
8-51
8.10 Application Parameters

AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME
This parameter sets the output time of the welding error reset signal to the Power Source
when the alarm reset signal is input.
If the setting is "0," the welding error reset signal is not output to the Power Source even if the
alarm reset signal is input.

AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE
These parameters set the electrode wear amount alarm values (AxP016: movable side,
AxP017: fixed side) at the wear detection.
8.10.4

General-purpose Application
AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT
This parameter specifies whether to output TOOLON instruction or not at restarting when the
work is stopped for some reasons during the output of TOOLON instruction.
8-52
9.1 Function Keys
9 Painting Application
9.1
Function Keys
The function keys for painting application are assigned to the Numeric keys as described
below.
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
.
-
SPRAY
ON
PAINT
ON/OFF
SPRAY
OFF
PAINT
SET
TIMER
0
REFP
Registers a timer instruction, “TIMER,” in a job.
1
TIMER
0
REFP
Registers a reference point, “REFP,” in a job or changes an already-registered reference point.
Press [REFP] + [FWD] to move the manipulator to the registered reference
point.
<Teach Mode>
Used to output a permission signal to prohibit painting of a spray signal. To
turn OFF the permission signal, press this key again.
5
PAINT
ON/OFF
<Play Mode>
Used to stop outputting a spray signal while the spray signal is being output
by the SPYON instruction. To start outputting the spray signal, press this key
again.
Displays the PAINT CONDITION window.
6
PAINT
SET
9-1
9.1 Function Keys
Registers an instruction to start the spray, “SPYON,” in a job.
8
SPRAY
ON
Registers an instruction to end the spray, “SPYOF,” in a job.
9
SPRAY
OFF
The output destinations of the spray signal and the atomization pressure signal are written
NOTE in the concurrent I/O ladder program.
If the connection of the destinations of the user output signals is changed in the painting
system’s configuration, also change the destinations in the concurrent I/O ladder program.
Unless the destinations are set correctly, a spray signal or an atomization pressure signal
cannot be output correctly.
NOTE In a system configuration where more than two sprays are connected, the operation of all
sprays is controlled by the “PAINT ON/OFF” key.
9-2
9.2 Outline of Operations and Painting Functions
9.2
Outline of Operations and Painting Functions
9.2.1
Example of Painting System Configuration
The following diagram shows an example of system configuration where the paint control
panel controls the painting devices.
Non-hazardous area
Hazardous area
Master panel
Operation
panel of
paint control
panel
Air panel
R C/L
HV C/L
PLC
YASNAC NX100
Intrinsically
safe
explosionproof
programming
pendant
3-phase power
supply 200 VAC
Grounding
9-3
Painting robot
Paint supplying
device
Paint gun
9.2 Outline of Operations and Painting Functions
9.2.2
Settings for Panting System When Using a Spray Gun
Item
Description
Settings
1
Gun Type
Sets the type of gun to be used.
“SPRAY”
2
Supply Type
Sets the paint supplying device.
“UNUSED”
3
Number of
Connected
CCVs
Sets the number of CCVs to be
connected.
0
4
Atomized Air
Output
Sets the output method of the
atomized air.
“I/O OUTPUT” or
“LEVEL”
5
Pattern Output
Sets the output method for atomizing pattern.
“I/O OUTPUT” or
“LEVEL”
9.2.3
Remarks
Not necessary to
set.
Settings for Painting System When Using a Bell Gun
Item
Description
Settings
1
Gun Type
Sets the type of gun to be used.
“BELL”
2
Supply type
Sets the paint supplying device.
“UNUSED”
3
Number of
Connected
CCVs
Sets the number of CCVs to be
connected.
0
4
Turbine Output
Sets the method to control the
number of bell rotations by turbine.
“I/O OUTPUT” or
“LEVEL”
5
Shaping
Output
Sets the method to control the
shaping air pressure.
“I/O OUTPUT” or
“LEVEL”
9-4
Remarks
Not necessary to
set.
9.3 Teaching for Painting Operations
9.3
Teaching for Painting Operations
Taking an example where a workpiece, such as the one shown in the following diagram, is to
be painted, the following flowchart outlines the operational procedure and the robot program
for the reference job that are necessary to use the manipulator for painting operations.
Face to be painted
Step 3
Step 2
Path 1
Step 1
Step 6
Path 2
Step 11
Step 7
Path 3
Path 4
Step 10
Step 4
Step 5
Step 8
Step 9
: Teaching point (Step)
Operational Procedure
Create a job.
Teach manipulator’s motions (reference job) to perform painting.
↓
Set instructions to start and
stop the spray.
(Register the work
instructions.)
Set a start instruction and an end instruction for the spray to be
used for the workpiece to be painted.
↓
Confirm the motion.
(Test run)
Confirm the manipulator’s motion in a test run without painting.
↓
Fine-tune a job.
Reset the painting conditions.
Carry out the painting test to fine-tune the teaching data, and
reset or modify the painting conditions.
↓
Start the actual production.
(Automatic operation)
Teaching has been successfully completed. Start the actual
production with the manipulator.
9-5
9.3 Teaching for Painting Operations
Reference Job
Line
Instruction
Description
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=25.00
Move to the standby position
(Step 1)
0002
MOVL V=50
Move to a position near the start
position for painting
(Step 2)
0003
MOVL V=50 NWAIT
Move to the start position for painting (the start point of path 1)
(Step 3)
0004
SPYON
Spray ON
0005
MOVL V=100
Move to the end point of path 1
(Step 4)
0006
MOVL V=100
Move to the start point of path 2
(Step 5)
0007
MOVL V=100
Move to the end point of path 2
(Step 6)
0008
MOVL V=100
Move to the start point of path 3
(Step 7)
0009
MOVL V=100
Move to the end point of path 3
(Step 8)
0010
MOVL V=100
Move to the start point of path 4
(Step 9)
0011
MOVL V=100 NWAIT
Move to the end point of path 4
(Step 10)
0012
SPYOF
Spray OFF
0013
MOVL V=50
Move to the standby position
0014
END
9-6
(Step 11)
9.4 Anticipation Output Function
9.4
Anticipation Output Function
The anticipation output function is a function to quicken or slow the execution timing of
painting start/end instructions. Using this function, a paint start or end instruction can be
carried out before or after the step is reached.
“ANT=” is used when anticipation output is performed.
“ANT=” can be added to the following two instructions:
SPYON (spray start)
SPYOF (spray stop)
To carry out anticipation output, set the time “ANT=**second,” add it to the SPYON or SPYOF
instruction, and set “NWAIT” to the move instruction of the step.
Setting the time to a negative value (-) advances the signal output.
Setting the time to a positive value (+) delays the signal output.
9.4.1
Example
Advanced Signal Output
While the manipulator moves towards step n, painting starts 0.5 seconds before step n is
reached; and stops 0.5 seconds before step n+1 is reached while the manipulator moves
towards step n+1.
Step
Instructions
:
n-2
n-1
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
SPYON ANT=-0.5
MOVL NWAIT
SPYOF ANT=-0.5
MOVL
:
n
n+1
:
n-1
n
n+1
Step
Spray ON
status OFF
0.5 seconds
0.5 seconds
Delayed Signal Output
While the manipulator moves towards step n+1, painting starts 0.5 seconds after step n is
reached; and stops 0.5 seconds after step n+1 is reached while the manipulator moves
towards the next step.
Step
:
n-2
n-1
n
n+1
:
Instructions
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
SPYON ANT=0.5
MOVL NWAIT
SPYOF ANT=0.5
MOVL
:
n-1
n
n+1
Step
Spray ON
status OFF
0.5 seconds
9-7
0.5 seconds
9.4 Anticipation Output Function
9.4.2
Notes on Anticipation Output Function
• If the time required by the manipulator to reach step n from step n-1 by a SPYON instruction is shorter than the time set at “ANT=XX,” painting starts when the cursor moves to
the SPYON instruction.
Step
:
n-2
n-1
n
n+1
:
Instructions
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
SPYON ANT=2.0
MOVL
MOVL
:
When the moving time between n-1
and n is one second
n-1
n
n+1
Step
Spray ON
status OFF
1.0 second
If the time required by the manipulator to reach n+1 from n is shorter than the time set at
“ANT=XX,” painting starts when the manipulator reaches step n+1.
Step
:
n-2
n-1
n
n+1
:
Instructions
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
SPYON ANT=2.0
MOVL
MOVL
:
When the moving time between
n and n+1 is one second
n-1
n
n+1
Step
Spray ON
status
OFF
1.0 second
• If NWAIT is not added to step n, painting starts immediately after the manipulator reaches
step n.
Step
:
n-2
n-1
n
n+1
:
Instructions
:
MOVL
MOVL
SPYON ANT=-0.5
MOVL
SPYOF ANT=-0.5
MOVL
:
n-1
n
n+1
Step
Spray ON
status OFF
Disregarded because NWAIT is
not added to the move instruction.
• If a CALL or JUMP instruction is added before the SPYON instruction, the NWAIT operation is interrupted and the setting of “ANT=XX” is disregarded. Painting starts when the
cursor moves to the SPYON instruction.
• The NWAIT operation is not performed in a FWD/BWD operation or during playback in
one step. Therefore, the same operations as those done when NWAIT is not set are performed.
• Because the NWAIT operation is not continued when the manipulator is restarted after an
emergency stop, the path differs from the continuous operation path.
If NWAIT is not set to the move instruction before the SPYON/SPYOFF instruction, the
NOTE execution timing of SPYON/SPYOF becomes the same as the normal DOUT instruction,
and the anticipation cannot be executed.
When executing the anticipation, be sure to set NWAIT to the move instruction before the
SPYON/SPYOF instruction.
9-8
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
9.5
Registering Work Instructions
9.5.1
SPYON
The SPYON instruction is used to start painting.
As a work start instruction, the instruction turns ON the Specific Output Signals corresponding
to the specified gun number.
The instruction also sets the advance time for turning ON the splay and the delay time for
turning ON the atomizing in the register. These times are set in the painting system
characteristics setting file.
8
SPRAY
ON
SUPPLE
-MENT

Function key to register an instruction to start the spray "SPYON"
Select {DEVICE} in the instruction group list when registering the SPYON instruction from
[INFORM LIST].
Registering the SPYON Instruction
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
9-9
Short Cut
UTILITY
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
2
Select {JOB}.
Explanation
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Short Cut
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
4
Press [INFORM LIST].
Short Cut
The instruction list dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
Aa
ARITH
SAME
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
9-10
DEVICE
MOTION
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
ROBOT
Main Menu
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
Short Cut
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
5
Explanation
Select {DEVICE}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
6
Short Cut
Select {SPYON}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
SPYON
DEVICE
SPYOF
MOTION
PAINTSET
ARITH
PAINTED
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SHIFT
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
Short Cut
"SPYON" instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON
Main Menu
9-11
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
7
Explanation
Press [SELECT] and set each The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
item in the DETAIL EDIT winEDIT
DISPLAY UTILITY
DATA
dow.
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
DETAIL EDIT
SPYON
GUN NO.
TIME
UNUSED
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON
Main Menu
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SPYON
GUN NO.
TIME
UNUSED
GUNNO=
UNUSED
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SPYON
GUN NO.
TIME
GUN NO.= 1
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON GUNNO=1
Main Menu
Short Cut
The setting appears in the input buffer line.
9-12
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
8
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the job.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON GUNNO=2
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.

Registering the SPYON Instruction in a One-touch Operation
Operation
1
Press [8 / SPRAY ON].
Explanation
"SPYON" appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYON GUNNO=2
Main Menu
2
Press [ENTER] to register
SPYON.
9-13
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Syntax for the SPYON instruction
SPYON
END
(1)
(2)
GUNNO=
Gun No.
Execution
timing
ANT=
(1) Gun No. (Setting range: 1 to 4)
Controls the work start signal of the Specific Output Signals corresponding to the specified
gun number.
If setting is omitted, 1 is applied for the gun number.
(2) Execution timing (Setting range: -327.68 to 327.67)
Sets the anticipation time (advance time, delay time) in units of seconds.
If setting is omitted, 0 is applied for the anticipation time.
9.5.2
Notes on the SPYON Instruction
When a SPYON instruction is carried out, the Specific Output Signals (a work start instruction)
corresponding to the specified gun number turns ON. The instruction also sets the advance
time for turning ON the spray and the delay time for turning ON the atomizing in the register.
These times are set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
The concurrent I/O ladder program controls the actual outputs of the spray signal and
atomization signal according to the ON status of the work start instruction of the Specific
Output Signals and the advance time for turning ON the spray and the delay time for turning
ON the atomizing that are set in the register. The graph shows the timing of when the spray
signal and the atomization pressure signal are turned ON.
n-1
n
T1
Ta
Ts
n+1
T2
Ant
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
Work start instruction
Ant: Anticipation time for the SPYON instruction
Ts: Advance time for turning ON the spray
Ta: Delay time for turning ON the atomizing
NOTE When the system configuration or the output destination of the spray or atomization pressure signals is changed, be sure to make changes in the concurrent I/O ladder program.
9-14
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
9.5.3
SPYOF
The SPYOF instruction is used to complete painting.
The instruction turns OFF the Specific Output Signals (a work start instruction) corresponding
to the specified gun number.
The instruction also sets the advance time for turning OFF the spray and the delay time for
turning OFF the atomizing in the register. These times are set in the painting system
characteristics setting file.
9
SPRAY
OFF
SUPPLE
-MENT

Function key to register an instruction to end the spray "SPYOF"
Select {DEVICE} in the instruction group list when registering the SPYOF instruction from
[INFORM LIST].
Registering the SPYOF Instruction
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {JOB}.
Short Cut
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
9-15
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Explanation
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
4
Press [INFORM LIST].
Short Cut
The instruction list dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
5
Short Cut
Select {DEVICE}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
Aa
ARITH
SAME
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
9-16
DEVICE
MOTION
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
ROBOT
Main Menu
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
Short Cut
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
6
Explanation
Select {SPYOF}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
SPYON
DEVICE
SPYOF
MOTION
PAINTSET
ARITH
PAINTED
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SHIFT
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
Short Cut
"SPYOF" instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF
Main Menu
9-17
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
7
Explanation
Press [SELECT] and set each The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
item in the DETAIL EDIT winEDIT
DISPLAY UTILITY
DATA
dow.
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
DETAIL EDIT
SPYOF
GUN NO.
TIME
UNUSED
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF
Main Menu
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SPYOF
GUN NO.
TIME
UNUSED
GUNNO=
UNUSED
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
SPYOF
GUN NO.
TIME
GUN NO.= 1
UNUSED
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF GUNNO=1
Main Menu
Short Cut
The setting appears in the input buffer line.
9-18
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
8
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the job.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF GUNNO=2
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.

Registering the SPYOF Instruction in a One-touch Operation
Operation
1
Press [9 / SPRAY OFF].
Explanation
"SPYOF" appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> SPYOF GUNNO=2
Main Menu
2
Press [ENTER] to register
SPYOF.
9-19
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Syntax for the SPYOF instruction
SPYOF
END
(2)
(1)
GUNNO=
Gun No.
Execution
timing
ANT=
(1) Gun No. (Setting range: 1 to 4)
Controls the work start signal of the Specific Output Signals corresponding to the gun number.
If setting is omitted, 1 is applied for the gun number.
(2) Execution timing (Setting range: -327.68 to 327.67)
Sets the anticipation time (advance time, delay time) in units of seconds.
If setting is omitted, 0 is applied for the anticipation time.
9.5.4
Notes on the SPYOF Instruction
When a SPYOF instruction is carried out, the Specific Output Signals (a work start instruction)
corresponding to the specified gun number turns OFF. The instruction also sets the advance
time for turning OFF the spray and the delay time for turning OFF the atomizing in the register.
These times are set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
The concurrent I/O ladder program controls the actual outputs of the spray signal and
atomization signal according to the OFF status of the work start instruction of the Specific
Output Signals and the advance time for turning OFF the spray and the delay time for turning
OFF the atomizing that are set in the register. The graph shows the timing of when the spray
signal and the atomization pressure signal are turned OFF.
n-1
T1
n
T2
Ant
n+1
Ts
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
Ta
Work start instruction
Ant: Anticipation time for the SPYOF instruction
Ts: Advance time for turning OFF the spray
Ta: Delay time for turning OFF the atomizing
NOTE When the system configuration or the output destination of the spray or atomization pressure signals is changed, be sure to make changes in the concurrent I/O ladder program.
9-20
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
9.5.5
PAINTSET
The PAINTSET instruction is used to set the painting conditions for the painting machine
controller.

Registering the PAINSET Instruction
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {JOB}.
Short Cut
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Short Cut
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
9-21
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
4
Press [INFORM LIST].
Explanation
The instruction list dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
5
Short Cut
Select {DEVICE}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
Aa
ARITH
SAME
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
9-22
DEVICE
MOTION
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
ROBOT
Main Menu
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
Short Cut
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
6
Explanation
Select {PAINTSET}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
SPYON
DEVICE
SPYOF
MOTION
PAINTSET
ARITH
PAINTED
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SHIFT
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
Short Cut
"PAINTSET" instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> PAINTSET
Main Menu
9-23
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
7
Explanation
Press [SELECT] and set each The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
item in the DETAIL EDIT winEDIT
DISPLAY UTILITY
DATA
dow.
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
DETAIL EDIT
PAINTSET
GUN NO.
PAINT COND
PAINT VOLUME
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
HIGH VOLTAGE
PAINT SPEED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> PAINTSET
Main Menu
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PAINTSET
GUN NO.
PAINT COND
PAINT VOLUME
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
HIGH VOLTAGE
PAINT SPEED
UNUSED
GUNNO=
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> PAINTSET
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
PAINTSET
GUN NO.
PAINT COND
PAINT VOLUME
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
HIGH VOLTAGE
PAINT SPEED
GUN NO. = 1
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
UNUSED
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> PAINTSET GUNNO=1
Main Menu
Short Cut
The setting appears in the input buffer line.
9-24
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
8
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the job.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> PAINTSET GUNNO=2
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.
9-25
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Syntax for the PAINTSET instruction
A
PAITNSET
(1)
(2)
GUNNO=
Gun No.
(3)
PCF#
(
Painting condition
file No.
)
PF=
Amount of
discharge
PFL=
Level of the
amount of
discharge
(4)
END
A
(5)
BR=
Number of the
bell rotations
(6)
BRL=
(7)
SH=
(9)
Shaping air
pressure
HVL=
(8)
Level of
the number of
bell rotations
SHL=
(10)
Highvoltage
level
V=
Painting
operation
No.
Level of
the shaping air
pressure
(1) Gun No. (Setting range: 1 to 3)
Controls the spray signal of the painting system characteristics setting file corresponding to
the gun number.
If setting is omitted, 1 is applied for the gun number.
(2) Painting condition file No. (Setting range: 1 to 128)
Outputs the painting conditions for each setting in the painting condition file to the paint control panel.
(3) Amount of discharge (Setting range: 0 to 999 [cc/min])
Outputs the setting for the amount of discharge to the paint control panel if the paint control
panel is used to control the paint supplying device (when the paint supply that was set in the
settings for the painting system is not connected).
(4) Level of the amount of discharge (Setting range: 1 to 128)
Outputs the setting for the level of the amount of discharge to the paint control panel if the
paint control panel is used to control the paint supplying device.
(5) Number of the bell rotations (Setting range: 1 to 999 [krpm])
Outputs the data to the user output group that has been set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
(6) Level of the number of bell rotations (Setting range: 1 to 128)
• If the output type of rotations in the painting system is set to “LEVEL”:
Outputs the data to the user output that has been set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
• If the output type of rotations in the painting system is set to anything other than “LEVEL”:
Does not function even if a setting is made.
(7) Shaping air pressure (Setting range: 1 to 999 [kPa])
Outputs the data to the user output group that has been set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
(8) Level of the shaping air pressure (Setting range: 1 to 128)
• If the shape output type in the painting system is set to “LEVEL”:
Outputs the data to the user output that has been set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
• When the shape output type in the painting system is set to anything other than “LEVEL”:
Does not function even if a setting is made.
(9) High-voltage level (Setting range: 1 to 3)
9-26
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Outputs the data to the user output group that has been set in the painting system characteristics setting file.
(10) Operation speed (Setting range: 0.1 to 1500.0 [mm/s])
Sets the moving speed of the manipulator for a painting operation.
If the speed is not set in the move instruction in the PAINTSET section, the manipulator
moves at the speed set here.
If each item (amount of discharge, revolutions, shape, high-voltage, operation speed) is set
NOTE after the painting condition file number has been set, the settings in the painting condition
file are disregarded and the latter settings become valid.
9.5.6
CALL
The CALL instruction is used to call a specified job.
This section describes an example where a job registration table is specified.

What Is the Job Registration Table?
In a job registration table, jobs that are read out by instructions such as the CALL instruction
can be registered.
Three files are available for the job registration table. Each job registration table can hold
1024 jobs.
A job can be registered or edited in the job registration table even during play mode. The
updated table becomes valid the next time when the job registration table is referred by
instructions such as the CALL instruction.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
JOB REGISTRATION
TABLE NUMBER : 1/3
NO.
JOB NAME
CTRL GROUP
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
(4)
(3)
(2)
EXECUTE CANCEL
Main Menu
(1)
Short Cut
(1) TABLE NUMBER (Setting range: 1 to 3)
The job registration table number.
(2) NO
The job registration number.
(3) JOB NAME
9-27
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Sets the job name.
To call up the job list so that a job can be entered, press [SELECT].
To delete the registered job, press [ENTER] without selecting a job.
(4) CTRL GROUP
Displays the control group of the selected job.
9-28
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Registering the Job Registration Table

SUPPLE
-MENT
Be sure to edit the painting system characteristics setting file in management mode.
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {JOB REGISTRATION}.
Short Cut
DATA
DATA
EDIT
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
DOUT
MOVE
END
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
CF
PAINTING
SELECT JOB
PARAMETER
VARIABLE
MASTER
DISPLAY
SETUPJOB
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
JOB CAPACITY
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
JOB REGISTRATION TABLE
ROBOT
CYCLE
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
Short Cut
The JOB REGISTRATION window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
JOB REGISTRATION
TABLE NUMBER : 1/3
NO.
JOB NAME
CTRL GROUP
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
EXECUTE CANCEL
Main Menu
9-29
Short Cut
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
3
Press [SELECT] and set job
data in the JOB NAME window.
Explanation
The JOB NAME window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
UTILITY
JOB NAME
TEST
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the job to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
JOB REGISTRATION
TABLE NUMBER : 1/3
NO.
JOB NAME
CTRL GROUP
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
TEST
EXECUTE CANCEL
Main Menu
Short Cut
The setting appears in the window.
9-30
9.5 Registering Work Instructions

Registering the CALL Instruction (JET)
Operation
1
Select {JOB} under the main
menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {JOB}.
Short Cut
The JOB CONTENT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Short Cut
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
9-31
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
4
Press [INFORM LIST].
Explanation
The instruction list dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
SAME
ROBOT
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
5
Short Cut
Select {CONTROL}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
Aa
ARITH
SAME
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
9-32
DEVICE
MOTION
SHIFT
DISPLAY SETUP
ROBOT
Main Menu
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
Short Cut
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
6
Explanation
Select {CALL}.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
CALL
DEVICE
TIMER
MOTION
LABEL
ARITH
COMMENT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : ** CONTROL
JUMP
RET
ROBOT
SHIFT
SAME
PRIOR
SYSTEM INFOR
=> MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
Short Cut
"CALL" instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> CALL JOB: JOB
Main Menu
9-33
Short Cut
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
7
Explanation
Press [SELECT] and set each The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
item in the DETAIL EDIT winEDIT
DISPLAY UTILITY
DATA
dow.
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
DETAIL EDIT
CALL
CALL TO
USER COORD
CONDITION
JOB: JOB
UNUSED
UNUSED
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> CALL JOB: JOB
Main Menu
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
(For the CALL destination, select {JET}.)
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
CALL
CALL TO
USER COORD
CONDITION
SETUP
VARIABLE
JOB:
JOB: JOB
B
UNUSED
I
UNUSED
D
JET#()
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> CALL JOB: JOB
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
CALL
CALL TO
REGISTRATION NO.
USER COORD
CONDITION
JET#( ): 1
ENTRY= 1
UNUSED
UNUSED
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> CALL JET#(1) ENTRY=1
Main Menu
Short Cut
The setting appears in the input buffer line.
9-34
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Operation
8
Press [ENTER].
Explanation
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the job.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: TEST
CONTROL GROUP : R1
STEP NO: 00
TOOL : **
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0002 MOVJ P000 VJ=50.00
0003 MOVL P000 V138
0004 END
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
=> CALL JET#(1) ENTRY=1
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.
9-35
9.5 Registering Work Instructions
Syntax for the CALL instruction
CALL
(1)
JET#
(
Job registration table No.
)
(2)
ENTRY=
Job registration No.
END
(1) Job registration table No. (Setting range: 1 to 3)
Sets the job registration table number.
(2) Job registration No. (Setting range: 1 to 1024)
Sets the registration number of the job that is registered in a specified job registration table.
Example of CALL Job
Line
Instruction
Description
0000
NOP
0001
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
Waits for a start signal to be input.
0002
DIN B000 OG#(2)
Enter the job registration number.
0003
CALL JET#(1) ENTRY=B000
Calls the job corresponding to the registration
number that is entered in B000.
0004
PULSE OT#(1) T=1.00
Outputs the work end signal in pulses.
0005
END
0006
MOVL V=100
9-36
9.6 Painting Condition File
9.6
Painting Condition File
A painting condition file is a file in which the painting conditions are registered.
Use this file to make the setting and correction of the painting instructions easier.
The internal memory of the NX100 can usually hold 128 painting condition files. One painting
condition package can contain 128 painting condition files.
The PAINTSET instruction is used to make the settings for a painting condition file.
9.7
Managing Painting Condition Files
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
1
PAINT VOLUME
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
B001
HIGH VOLTAGE
IN/OUT
In
Out
(1)
PAINT COND NO.
COMMENT
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1) CONDITION NO. (Setting range: 1 to 128)
Displays the painting condition number.
(2) COMMENT
Maximum eight characters.
(3) PAINT VOLUME
Sets the amount of paint to be discharged. The setting is made in units of cc/min or by levels, depending on the connected device that is registered in the settings for the painting
system.*1
(4) PAINT SPEED
Sets the moving speed of the manipulator in a painting operation.
(5) BELL ROTATION
Sets the number of the bell rotations of the bell gun. The setting is made in units of krpm or
by levels, depending on the connected device that is registered in the settings for the painting system.*2
(6) SHAPING AIR
Sets the shaping air pressure of the bell gun. The setting is made in units of kPa or by levels, depending on the connected device that is registered in the settings for the painting
system.*3
9-37
9.7 Managing Painting Condition Files
(7) HIGH VOLTAGE
Sets the high voltage of the bell gun. The setting is made by levels.
*1
The setting for the amount of discharge differs depending on the type of the supply section that was registered in the settings for the painting system.
• When the supply section is set to “UNUSED”:
The amount of discharge is set by levels.
• When the supply section is set to “FGP”:
The amount of discharge is set in units of cc/min.
*2
The setting for the number of the bell rotations differs depending on the number of rotations to be output that was registered in the settings for the painting system.
• When the number of rotations to be output is set to “I/O OUTPUT”:
The number of bell rotations is set in units of krpm.
• When the number of rotations to be output is set to “LEVEL”:
The number of bell rotations is set by levels.
*3
The setting for the shaping air pressure differs depending on the shape output that was
registered in the settings for the painting system.
• When the shape output is set to “I/O OUTPUT”:
The shaping air pressure is set in units of kpa.
• When the shape output is set to “LEVEL”:
The shaping air pressure is set by levels.
9-38
9.8 Editing Painting Condition Files
9.8
9.8.1
Editing Painting Condition Files
Calling Up Painting Condition Files
Operation
1
Select {PAINTING} under the
main menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Short Cut
Select {PAINT CONDITION}.
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.
SETUP SPECIAL
PAINTING
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
PAINT CONDITION
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
MANUAL SPRAY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
Short Cut
The PAINT CONDITION window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
PAINT COND NO.
PAINT VOLUME
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
1
COMMENT
PARAMETER
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
DISPLAY SETUP
HIGH VOLTAGE
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
9-39
Short Cut
9.8 Editing Painting Condition Files
9.8.2
Registering Painting Condition Files
Operation
1
Select {PAINTING} under the
main menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {PAINT CONDITION}.
Short Cut
The PAINT CONDITION window appears.
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.
SETUP SPECIAL
PAINTING
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
PAINT CONDITION
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
MANUAL SPRAY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Short Cut
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
PAINT COND NO.
PAINT VOLUME
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
1
COMMENT
PARAMETER
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
DISPLAY SETUP
HIGH VOLTAGE
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
9-40
Short Cut
9.8 Editing Painting Condition Files
Operation
4
Set each item in the PAINT
CONDITION window.
Explanation
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
PAINT COND NO.
PAINT VOLUME
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
1
COMMENT
PARAMETER
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
DISPLAY SETUP
HIGH VOLTAGE
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use character input keys and the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
PAINT COND NO.
PAINT VOLUME
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
1
COMMENT
PARAMETER
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
DISPLAY SETUP
HIGH VOLTAGE
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
5
Press [ENTER].
Short Cut
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the painting
condition file.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
UTILITY
PAINT CONDITION
PAINT COND NO.
PAINT VOLUME
PAINT SPEED
VARIABLE
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
2
COMMENT
PARAMETER
BELL ROTATION
SHAPING AIR
DISPLAY SETUP
HIGH VOLTAGE
0 cc/min
0 cm/min
0 Krpm
0 KPa
0 LEVEL
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.
9-41
9.9 Painting System Setting File
9.9
Painting System Setting File
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
PAINT SYSTEM CONFG.
GUN1
GUN TYPE
BELL
PAINT SUPPLY
UNUSED
CCV NUMBER
0
BELL ROTATION OUTPUT I/O OUTPUT
SHAPING OUTPUT
I/O OUTPUT
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1) GUN TYPE
Sets the gun type.
“SPRAY” or “BELL” can be selected.
(2) PAINT SUPPLY
Sets the paint supplying device.
“UNUSED” or “FGP” can be selected, however, normally select “UNUSED.”
• When “UNUSED” is selected
The paint supplying device is controlled by the paint control panel. Therefore, control of
the amount of discharge from the NX100 is controlled by the I/O output.
• When “FGP” is selected
The paint supplying device, FGP, is controlled by the NX100. The amount of discharge is
controlled by the servo.
(3) CCV NUMBER (Setting range: 0 to 52)
Sets the number of CCVs (the number of painting colors) to be connected. When a CCV is
connected to the paint control panel, set the CCV number to zero.
(4) BELL ROTATION OUTPUT
Sets the output method to control the number of bell rotations.
“I/O OUTPUT” or “LEVEL” can be selected.
• When “I/O OUTPUT” is selected
The paint control panel controls the number of bell rotations. The set number of bell rotations (krpm) is output for the output bit specified in the painting system characteristics setting file.
• When “LEVEL” is selected
The paint control panel controls the number of bell rotations. The level value that was set
is output for the output bit specified in the painting system characteristics setting file.
9-42
9.9 Painting System Setting File
(5) SHAPING OUTPUT
Sets the output method to control shaping.
“I/O OUTPUT” or “LEVEL” can be selected.
• When “I/O OUTPUT” is selected
The paint control panel controls shaping. The shaping air pressure (kPa) that was set is
output for the output bit specified in the painting system characteristics setting file.
• When “LEVEL” is selected
The paint control panel controls shaping. The level value that was set is output for the
output bit specified in the painting system characteristics setting file.
9-43
9.9 Painting System Setting File
9.9.1
Calling Up Painting System Setting Files
Operation
1
Select {PAINTING} under the
main menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.}.
DATA
DATA
Short Cut
DISPLAY
EDIT
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.
SETUP SPECIAL
PAINTING
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
PAINT CONDITION
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
MANUAL SPRAY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
Short Cut
The PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG. window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
PAINT SYSTEM CONFG.
GUN1
GUN TYPE
BELL
PAINT SUPPLY
UNUSED
CCV NUMBER
0
BELL ROTATION OUTPUT I/O OUTPUT
SHAPING OUTPUT
I/O OUTPUT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
9-44
Short Cut
9.9 Painting System Setting File
9.9.2
SUPPLE
-MENT
Editing Painting System Setting Files
Be sure to edit the painting system setting file in management mode.
Operation
1
Select {PAINTING} under the
main menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Short Cut
Select {PAINT SYSTEM CON- The PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG. window appears.
FIG.}.
DATA
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.
SETUP SPECIAL
PAINTING
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
PAINT CONDITION
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
MANUAL SPRAY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
9-45
Short Cut
UTILITY
9.9 Painting System Setting File
Operation
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Explanation
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
PAINT SYSTEM CONFG.
GUN1
GUN TYPE
BELL
PAINT SUPPLY
UNUSED
CCV NUMBER
0
BELL ROTATION OUTPUT I/O OUTPUT
SHAPING OUTPUT
I/O OUTPUT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
4
Set each item in the PAINT
SYSTEM CONFIG. window.
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
UTILITY
PAINT SYSTEM CONFG.
GUN1
GUN TYPE
BELL
BELL
SPRAY
PAINT SUPPLY
UNUSED
CCV NUMBER
0
BELL ROTATION OUTPUT I/O OUTPUT
SHAPING OUTPUT
I/O OUTPUT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use character input keys and the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
5
Press [ENTER].
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the painting
system setting file.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
UTILITY
PAINT SYSTEM CONFG.
GUN1
GUN TYPE
SPRAY
PAINT SUPPLY
UNUSED
CCV NUMBER
0
BELL ROTATION OUTPUT I/O OUTPUT
SHAPING OUTPUT
I/O OUTPUT
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.
9-46
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
PAINTING SPECIAL
GUN1
PAINT VOL-FGP
0.001 cc
MAX PAINT VOL
0.1 cc
SPY ON ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
SPY OFF ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
ATOM ON DELAY TIME
0.0 s
ATOM OFF DELAY TIME
0.0 s
PAINT CONDITION
OG# 000 16 bit
PAINT VOLUME
OG# 000 16 bit
TURBINE
OG# 000 16 bit
SHAPING
OG# 000 16 bit
HIGH VOLTAGE
OG# 000 16 bit
ROT. PERMIT IN
IN# 0000
ROT. DURING OUT
OT# 0000
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
(1) PAINT VOL-FGP
The setting differs depending on the gun type registered in the settings for the painting system.
• When “UNUSED” is selected
The setting does not affect the manipulator’s motion.
• When “FGP” is selected
The FGP capacity (the amount of discharge per rotation) is set in units of cc.
(2) MAX PAINT VOL
The setting differs depending on the gun type registered in the settings for the painting system.
• When “UNUSED” is selected
The setting does not affect the manipulator’s motion.
• When “FGP” is selected
The maximum allowable amount of discharge of FGP is set in units of cc.
(3) SPY ON ADVANCE TIME
Sets the shifting time of the advanced signal output for when the spray signal is turned ON.
The advance time for outputting spray is set in the register corresponding to the number of
the gun when the SPYON instruction is carried out.
(4) SPY OFF ADVANCE TIME
Sets the shifting time of the advanced signal output for when the spray signal is turned OFF.
The advance time for outputting spray is set in the register corresponding to the gun number when the SPYOF instruction is carried out.
(5) ATOM ON DELAY TIME
Sets the timing of the advanced signal output for turning ON the atomization pressure signal
for when the spray signal is turned ON.
When the SPYON instruction is carried out, the delay time of the atomization pressure signal is set in the register corresponding to the number of the gun.
9-47
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
(6) ATOM OFF DELAY TIME
Sets the timing of the delayed signal output for turning OFF the atomization pressure signal
for when the spray signal is turned OFF.
When the SPYOF instruction is carried out, the delay time of the atomization pressure signal is set in the register corresponding to the number of gun.
(7) PAINT CONDITION OUTPUT DESTINATION
Sets the output destination of the painting conditions and also the number of output bits.
(8) PAINT VOLUME OUTPUT DESTINATION
Sets the output destination of the amount of discharge and also the number of output bits.
(9) TURBINE
Sets the output destination of the number of rotations (turbine) and also the number of output bits.
• When “I/O OUTPUT” is selected
Sets the output destination of the number of bell rotations and also the number of output
bits.
• When “LEVEL” is selected
Sets the output destination of the level of the number of bell rotations and also the number of output bits.
(10) SHAPING
Sets the output destination of the shape (pattern) and also the number of output bits.
• When “I/O OUTPUT” is selected
Sets the output destination of the shaping and also the number of output bits.
• When “LEVEL” is selected
Sets the destination of the shaping level and also the number of output bits.
(11) HIGH VOLTAGE
Sets the output destination of high voltage and also the number of output bits.
If the gun type setting is BELL in a painting system setting file, "ATOM ON DELAY TIME"
NOTE and "ATOM OFF DELAY TIME" in a painting system characteristics setting file is not displayed in the window.
9-48
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
9.10.1
SUPPLE
-MENT
Editing Painting System Characteristics Setting Files
Be sure to edit the painting system characteristics setting file in management mode.
Operation
1
Select {PAINTING} under the
main menu.
Explanation
DATA
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
PARAMETER
SETUP
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
2
Select {PAINTING SPECIAL}.
Short Cut
The PAINTING SPECIAL window appears.
DATA
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
PAINT SYSTEM CONFIG.
SETUP SPECIAL
PAINTING
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
PAINT CONDITION
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
MANUAL SPRAY
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
Main Menu
9-49
Short Cut
UTILITY
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
Operation
3
Move the cursor to the
address area.
Explanation
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
PAINTING SPECIAL
GUN1
PAINT VOL-FGP
0.001 cc
MAX PAINT VOL
0.1 cc
SPY ON ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
SPY OFF ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
ATOM ON DELAY TIME
0.0 s
ATOM OFF DELAY TIME
0.0 s
PAINT CONDITION
OG# 000 16 bit
PAINT VOLUME
OG# 000 16 bit
TURBINE
OG# 000 16 bit
SHAPING
OG# 000 16 bit
HIGH VOLTAGE
OG# 000 16 bit
ROT. PERMIT IN
IN# 0000
ROT. DURING OUT
OT# 0000
PAGE
Main Menu
4
Set each item in the PAINTING SPECIAL window.
Short Cut
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
PAINTING SPECIAL
GUN1
PAINT VOL-FGP
0.001
MAX PAINT VOL
0.1 cc
SPY ON ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
SPY OFF ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
ATOM ON DELAY TIME
0.0 s
ATOM OFF DELAY TIME
0.0 s
PAINT CONDITION
OG# 000 16 bit
PAINT VOLUME
OG# 000 16 bit
TURBINE
OG# 000 16 bit
SHAPING
OG# 000 16 bit
HIGH VOLTAGE
OG# 000 16 bit
ROT. PERMIT IN
IN# 0000
ROT. DURING OUT
OT# 0000
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
Use character input keys and the Numeric keys to input the setting and press [ENTER].
5
Press [ENTER].
When [ENTER] is pressed, the setting is registered in the painting
system characteristics setting file.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
FD/CF
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
PAINTING
VARIABLE
PARAMETER
SETUP
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFOR
UTILITY
PAINTING SPECIAL
GUN1
PAINT VOL-FGP
0.123 cc
MAX PAINT VOL
0.1 cc
SPY ON ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
SPY OFF ADVANCE TIME
0.01 s
ATOM ON DELAY TIME
0.0 s
ATOM OFF DELAY TIME
0.0 s
PAINT CONDITION
OG# 000 16 bit
PAINT VOLUME
OG# 000 16 bit
TURBINE
OG# 000 16 bit
SHAPING
OG# 000 16 bit
HIGH VOLTAGE
OG# 000 16 bit
ROT. PERMIT IN
IN# 0000
ROT. DURING OUT
OT# 0000
PAGE
Main Menu
Short Cut
To cancel the setting, press [CANCEL]. The window returns to the
JOB CONTENT window.
9-50
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
9.10.2
ON Timing of the Work Start Instruction for the
SPYON Instruction
The graph shows the ON timing of the work start instruction of the Specific Output Signals
when the SPYON instruction is carried out. The ON timing depends on the relationship
between the anticipation time of the SPYON instruction, the advance time for turning ON the
spray, and the delay time for turning ON the atomizing.
n-1
T1
Ta Ts Ant
n
T2
n+1
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
Work start instruction
Ant: Anticipation time for the SPYON instruction
Ts: Advance time for turning ON the spray
Ta: Delay time for turning ON the atomizing
9.10.3
OFF Timing of the Work Start Instruction for the
SPYOF Instruction
The graph shows the OFF timing of the work start instruction of the Specific Output Signals
when the SPYOF instruction is carried out. The OFF timing depends on the relationship
between the anticipation time of the SPYOF instruction, the advance time for turning OFF the
spray, and the delay time for turning OFF the atomizing.
n-1
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
T1
n
T2
Ant
Ts
n+1
Ta
Work start instruction
Ant: Anticipation time for the SPYOF instruction
Ts: Advance time for turning OFF the spray
Ta: Delay time for turning OFF the atomizing
9.10.4
Notes on the ON/OFF Timing of the Work Start
Instruction
When Executing the SPYON Instruction
• If the total of the anticipation time, the advance time for turning ON the spray, and the
delay time for turning ON the atomizing of the SPYON instruction that has been set is longer than the time required by the manipulator to reach step n from step n-1, the timing of
when the work start instruction turns ON can be explained by the following graph.
9-51
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
n-1
Ta
T1
Ts Ant
n
n+1
T2
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
Work start instruction
• If the total of the anticipation time, the advance time for turning ON the spray, and the
delay time for turning ON the atomizing of the SPYON instruction that has been set is longer than the time required by the manipulator to reach step n+1 from step n, the timing of
when the work start instruction turns ON can be explained by the following graph.
n-1
T1
n
T2
n+1
Ant
Spray signal
Ta
Atomization pressure signal
Ta
Ts
Work start instruction
When Executing the SPYOF Instruction
• If the total of the anticipation time, the advance time for turning OFF the spray, and the
delay time for turning OFF the atomizing of the SPYOF instruction that has been set is
longer than the time required by the manipulator to reach step n from step n-1, the timing
of when the work start instruction turns OFF can be explained by the following graph.
n-1
Ts
Spray signal
Atomization pressure signal
n
T1
Ant
n+1
T2
Ta
Work start instruction
• If the total of the anticipation time, the advance time for turning OFF the spray, and the
delay time for turning OFF the atomizing of the SPYOF instruction that has been set is
longer than the time required by the manipulator to reach step n+1 from step n, the timing
of when the work start instruction turns OFF can be explained by the following graph.
n-1
T1
n
T2
Ant
n+1
Spray signal
Ts
Atomization pressure signal
Ta
Work start instruction
9-52
9.10 Painting System Characteristics Setting File
If NWAIT is not set to the move instruction before the SPYON/SPYOFF instruction, the
NOTE execution timing of SPYON/SPYOF becomes the same as the normal DOUT instruction,
and the anticipation cannot be executed.
When executing the anticipation, be sure to set NWAIT to the move instruction before the
SPYON/SPYOF instruction.
9-53
9.11 Work Instruction List
9.11 Work Instruction List
The following table lists the instructions related to the painting application.
• The parentheses indicate data such as alphanumeric characters.
• For instructions which have more than one item in one frame, select only one.
Painting Instruction
SPYON
(Spray ON)
SPYOF
(Spray OFF)
Function
Turns ON the work start instruction of the Specific Output
Signals for the specified painting gun.
Item
GUNNO = (Gun No.)
1 to 4
Applied when several
guns are provided.
ANT = (Anticipation time)
-327.68 to 327.67 seconds
Example of
Use
SPYON
SPYON
SPYON
SPYON
Function
Turns OFF the work start instruction of the Specific Output
Signals for the specified painting gun.
Item
GUNNO = (Gun No.)
1 to 4
Applied when several
guns are provided
ANT = (Anticipation time)
-327.68 to 327.67 seconds
Example of
Use
SPYOF
SPYOF
SPYOF
SPYOF
GUNNO=2
ANT=1.00
GUN=1 ANT=-2.00
GUNNO=2
ANT=1.00
GUN=1 ANT=-2.00
9-54
9.11 Work Instruction List
PAINTSET
(Paint Set)
Function
Sets the painting conditions for the paint control panel.
Item
GUNNO = (Gun No.)
1 to 4
Applied when several
guns are provided.
PCF# ((Painting condition file No.))
1 to 128
PF = (Amount of discharge)
0 to 999 cc/min
PFL = (Level for the amount of discharge)
1 to 128
BR = (Number of bell rotations)
0 to 999 krpm
BRL = (Level of number of bell
rotations)
1 to 128
SH = (Shaping air pressure)
0 to 999 kPa
SHL = (Level of shaping air pressure)
1 to 128
HVL = (Level of high voltage)
0 to 3
PV = (Painting operation speed)
0.1 to 1500.0 mm/s
Example of
Use
PAINTSET
PAINTSET
PAINTSET
PCF#(1)
PF=200 BR=500 SH=500
PCF#(100) PV=1000
9-55
10.1 Move Instructions
10 Table of Basic Instructions
• <> indicates numerical or alphabetical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one section, select one of the items.
10.1 Move Instructions
Function
MOVJ
Additional
Item
Moves to a taught point with joint interpolation type.
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do
not appear on
the screen.
VJ=<play speed>
VJ:
0.01 to
100.00%
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
Example
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to
100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to
100%
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=2 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
10-1
10.1 Move Instructions
Function
MOVL
Additional
Item
Moves to a taught point with linear interpolation type.
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do
not appear on
the screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
V:0.1 to 1500.0
mm/s
1 to 9000.0
cm/min
VR:0.1 to 180.0
deg/s
VE:0.01 to
100.00%
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
CR=(corner radius)
CR: 1.0 to
6553.5mm
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
MOVC
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to
100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to
100%
Example
MOVL V=138 PL=0 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
Function
Moves to a taught point with circular interpolation type.
Additional
Item
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do
not appear on
the screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as
MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
Example
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to
100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to
100%
MOVC V=138 PL=0 NWAIT
10-2
10.1 Move Instructions
Function
MOVS
Additional
Item
Moves to a taught point with spline interpolation type.
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do
not appear on
the screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as
MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to
100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to
100%
Example
MOVS V=120 PL=0
Function
Moves the specified increment from the current position with linear
interpolation type.
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as
MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>)
IMOV
Additional
Item
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
UNTIL statement
Example
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to
100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to
100%
IMOV P000 V=138 PL=1 RF
10-3
10.1 Move Instructions
Function
REFP
SPEED
Additional
Item
Defines a reference point (e.g. wall point for weaving).
<reference point number>
wall point 1 for
weaving :1
wall point 2 for
weaving :2
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do
not appear on
the screen.
Example
REFP 1
Function
Sets play speed.
Additional
Item
Example
VJ=<joint speed>,
V=<TCP speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
SPEED VJ=50.00
10-4
VJ:Same as
MOVJ.
V,VR,VE:
Same as
MOVL.
10.2 I/O Instructions
10.2 I/O Instructions
Function
Turns the external output signals ON and OFF.
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
DOUT
Additional
Item
Number of addressed output signals:
OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
OGH#(xx) is not subject to parity check; only the
binary specification is allowed.
FINE
With a high
degree of accuracy
Example
DOUT OT#(12) ON
Function
Outputs a pulse signal as an external output signal.
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
PULSE
Additional
Item
T=<time (seconds)>
Example
PULSE OT# (10) T=0.60
10-5
0.01 to
655.35 s
0.30 s unless
otherwise specified
10.2 I/O Instructions
Function
Sets input signals in variables.
B<variable number>
DIN
Additional
Item
IN# (<input number>),
IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
Number of addressed input signals:
IN#(xx)=1;IGH#(xx)=4(per group);
IG#(xx)=8(per group)
Number of addressed output signals:
OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
IGH#(xx) and OGH#(xx) are not subject to parity
check; only the binary specification is allowed.
WAIT
Example
DIN B016 IN#(16)
DIN B002 IG#(2)
Function
Waits until the external input signal status matches the specified
status.
Additional
Item
IN# (<input number>),
IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OT# (<user output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
<status>,B<variable number>
T=<time (seconds)>
AOUT
0.01 to
655.35 s
Example
WAIT IN# (12)=ON T=10.00
WAIT IN# (12)=B002
Function
Outputs the specified voltage to the general-purpose analog output
port.
Additional
Item
Example
AO# (<output port number>)
1 to 40
<output voltage(V)>
-14.0 to 14.0
AOUT AO# (2) 12.7
10-6
10.2 I/O Instructions
Function
ARATION
ARATIOF
Additional
Item
Starts the analog output corresponding to the speed.
AO#(<output port number>)
1 to 40
BV = <basic voltage>
-14.00 to 14.00
V = <basic speed>
0.1 to
150.0 mm/s
1 to 9000 cm/
min
OFV = <offset voltage>
-14.00 to 14.00
Example
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00
Function
Ends the analog output corresponding to the speed.
Additional
Item
AO#(<output port number>)
Example
ARATIOF AO#(1)
10-7
1 to 40
10.3 Control Instructions
10.3 Control Instructions
Function
JUMP
Additional
Item
Jumps to the specified label or job.
* <label character string>,JOB:<job name>,
IG# (<input group number>),
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,D<variable number>
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
*
(label)
CALL
Example
JUMP JOB:TEST1 IF IN#(14)=OFF
Function
Indicates a jump destination.
Additional
Item
<jump destination>
Example
*123
Function
Calls the specified job.
Additional
Item
8 characters or
less
JOB:<job name>,IG# (<input group number>),
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
RET
END
Example
CALL JOB:TEST1 IF IN# (24)=ON
CALL IG#(2)
(The job is called by the patterns of input signal. In this example,
Job 0 cannot be called.)
Function
Returns to the call source job.
Additional
Item
IF statement
Example
RET IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function
Declares the end of a job.
Additional
Item
Example
END
10-8
10.3 Control Instructions
Function
NOP
TIMER
IF
statement
UNTIL
statement
PAUSE
’
(comment)
No operation.
Additional
Item
Example
NOP
Function
Stops for the specified time.
Additional
Item
T=<time (seconds)>
Example
TIMER T=12.50
Function
Evaluates the specified condition and makes a judgment accordingly. Described after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
Format:<Item1>=,<>,<=,>=,<,><Item2>
Additional
Item
0.01 to
655.35 s
<Item1>
<Item2>
Example
JUMP *12 IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function
Monitors the specified input signal during an action and stops the
action when the specified signal status is observed. Described
after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
Additional
Item
IN# (<input number>)
<status>
Example
MOVL V=300 UNTIL IN#(10)=ON
Function
Instructs a pause.
Additional
Item
IF statement
Example
PAUSE IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function
Dispalys a comment.
Additional
Item
<comment>
Example
’Draws 100mm size square.
32 characters
or less
10-9
10.3 Control Instructions
Function
CWAIT
ADVINIT
ADVSTOP
Waits for execution of the instruction on the next line.
Used with the NWAIT tag which is an additional item of a move
instruction.
Additional
Item
Example
MOVL V=100 NWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) ON
CWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
MOVL V=100
Function
Initializes the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
Example
ADVINIT
Function
Stops the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
Example
ADVINIT
10-10
10.4 Shift Instructions
10.4 Shift Instructions
Function
Starts a shift operation.
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>,
BF,RF,TF,
UF#(<user coordinate number>)
SFTON
SFTOF
MSHIFT
Additional
Item
Example
SFTON P001 UF#(1)
Function
Stops a shift operation.
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
Additional
Item
Example
SFTOF
Function
Obtains the shift value in the specified coordinate system from
Data 2 and 3, and stores the obtained element values in Data 1.
Format:MSHIFT <Data1><Coordinate><Data2><Data3>
Data1
PX<variable number>
Coordinate
BF,RF,TF,
UF# (<user coordinate number>),
MTF
Data2
PX<variable number>
Data3
PX<variable number>
Additional
Item
Example
MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
10-11
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:
tool coordinates for the
master
10.5 Operating Instructions
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
ADD
SUB
Adds Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ADD<Data1><Data2>
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
Data1
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example
ADD I012 I013
Function
Subtracts Data2 from Data1, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SUB<Data1><Data2>
Data1
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example
SUB I012 I013
10-12
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
10.5 Operating Instructions
Multiplies Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:MUL<Data1><Data2>
Function
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
MUL
Additional
Item
Example
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
MUL I012 I013
MUL P000 (3) 2 (Multiply the Z-axis data by 2.)
Divides Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:DIV<Data1><Data2>
Function
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
DIV
Additional
Item
Example
DIV I012 I013
DIV P000 (3) 2 (Divide the Z-axis data by 2.)
10-13
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
10.5 Operating Instructions
INC
DEC
AND
OR
NOT
XOR
Function
Increments the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
Example
INC I043
Function
Decrements the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
Example
DEC I043
Function
Obtains the AND of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format:AND<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
AND B012 B020
Function
Obtains the OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:OR<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
OR B012 B020
Function
Obtains the NOT of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:NOT<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
NOT B012 B020
Function
Obtains the exclusive OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result
in Data1.
Format:XOR<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Example
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
XOR B012 B020
10-14
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
SET
SETE
Additional
Item
Sets Data2 to Data1.
Format:SET<Data1><Data2>
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
EXPRESS
Example
SET I012 I020
Function
Sets data to an element in a position variable.
Data 1
P<variable number>
(<element number>),
BP<variable number>
(<element number>),
EX<variable number>
(<element number>)
Data 2
D<variable number>,
<double-precision integer type
constant>
Additional
Item
Example
SETE P012 (3) D005
Function
Extracts an element in a position variable.
D<variable number>
GETE
Additional
Item
P<variable number> (<element number>),
BP<variable number> (<element number>),
EX<variable number> (<element number>)
Example
GETE D006 P012 (4)
10-15
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
GETS
Additional
Item
Sets a system variable to the specified variable.
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,R<variable number>,
PX<variable number>
$B<variable number>,$I<variable number>,
$D<variable number>,$R<variable number>,
$PX<variable number>, $ERRNO, Constant,
B<variable number>
System variable
Example
GETS B000 $B000
GETS I001 $I[1]
GETS PX003 $PX001
Function
Converts the position variable (Data2) into a position variable of the
specified coordinate system, and stores the converted variable in
Data1.
Format:CNVRT<Data1><Data2><coordinate>
Data1
PX<variable number>
Data2
PX<variable number>
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>),MTF
CNVRT
Additional
Item
Example
CNVRT PX000 PX001 BF
10-16
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:tool coordinates for the
master
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
CLEAR
SIN
COS
Additional
Item
Starting with the variable number in Data1, clears (sets to zero) as
many variables as specified by a number in Data2.
Format:CLEAR<Data1><Data2>
Data1
B<variable number>,I<variable
number>,
D<variable number>,R<variable
number>,
$B<variable number>,$I<variable
number>,
$D<variable number>,$R<variable
number>,
Data2
<number of variables>,
ALL,STACK
ALL:Clears
variables of the
variable number in Data1
and of all the
variable numbers that follow.
STACK:Clears
all variables in
the job call
stack.
Example
CLEAR B000 ALL
CLEAR STACK
Function
Obtains the sine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SIN<Data1><Data2>
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,R<variable number>
Additional
Item
Data1 must
always be a
real type variable.
Example
SIN R000 R001 (Sets the sine of R001 to R000.)
Function
Obtains the cosine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:COS<Data1><Data2>
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,R<variable number>
Additional
Item
Example
Data1 must
always be a
real type variable.
COS R000 R001 (Sets the cosine of R001 to R000.)
10-17
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
ATAN
SQRT
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,R<variable number>
Additional
Item
Data1 must
always be a
real type variable.
Example
ATAN R000 R001 (Sets the arc tangent of R001 to R000.)
Function
Obtains the square root of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SQRT<Data1><Data2>
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,R<variable number>
Additional
Item
Data1 must
always be a
real type variable.
Example
SQRT R000 R001 (Sets the square root of R001 to R000.)
Function
Creates a user coordinate using the position data for the given
three points as definition points. <Data1> indicates the definition
point ORG position data, <Data2> the definition point XX position
data, and <Data3> the definition point XY position data.
Format: MFRAME <user coordinate> <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
UF#(<user coordinate number>)
MFRAME
Additional
Item
MULMAT
Obtains the arc tangent of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ATAN<Data1><Data2>
Data1
PX <variable number>
Data2
PX <variable number>
Data3
PX <variable number>
1 to 24
Example
MFRAME UF#(1) PX000 PX001 PX002
Function
Obtains the matrix product of Data2 and Data3, and stores the
result in Data1.
Format: MULMAT <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Additional
Item
Example
Data1
P <variable number>
Data2
P <variable number>
Data3
P <variable number>
MULMAT P000 P001 P002
10-18
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
INVMAT
SETFILE
GETFILE
GETPOS
VAL
Additional
Item
Obtains the inverse matrix of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: INVMAT <Data1> <Data2>
Data1
P <variable number>
Data2
P <variable number>
Example
INVMAT P000 P001
Function
Changes the contents data of a condition file into the numeric data
of Data1. The contents data of a condition file to be changed is
specified by the element number.
Additional
Item
Contents
data of a
condition
file
WEV#(<condition file number>)(<element number>)
Data1
Constant, D<variable number>
Example
SETFILE WEV#(1)(1) D000
Function
Stores the contents data of a condition file in Data1. The contents
data of a condition file to be obtained is specified by the element
number.
Data1
D <variable number>
Additional
Item
Contents
data of a
condition
file
WEV#(<condition file number>)(<element number>)
Example
GETFILE D000 WEV#(1)(1)
Function
Stores the position data of Data2 (step number) in Data1.
Additional
Item
Data1
PX <variable number>
Data2
STEP# (<step number>)
Example
GETPOS PX000 STEP#(1)
Function
Converts the numeric value of the character string (ASCII) of Data2
into the real number, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: VAL <Data1> <Data2>
Additional
Item
Example
Data1
B <variable number>, I <variable
number>, D <variable number>, R
<variable number>
Data2
Character string, S <variable number>
VAL B000 “123”
10-19
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
ASC
CHR$
Obtains the character code of the first letter of the character string
(ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ASC<Data1><Data2>
Data1
Additional
Item
B <variable number>, I <variable
number>, D <variable number>
Data2
Character string, S <variable number>
Example
ASC B000 “ABC”
Function
Obtains the character (ASCII) with the character code of Data2,
and stores the result in Data1.
Format:CHR$<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Constant, B <variable number>
Example
CHR$ S000 65
Function
Obtains the character string (ASCII) of any length (Data 3, 4) from
the character string (ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format:MID$<Data1><Data2><Data3><Data4>
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Character string, S <variable number>
Data3
Constant, B <variable number>, I
<variable number>, D <variable
number>
Data4
Constant, B <variable number>, I
<variable number>, D <variable
number>
MID$
Additional
Item
LEN
Example
MID$ S000 “123ABC456” 4 3
Function
Obtains the total number of bytes of the character string (ASCII) of
Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:LEN<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Example
Data1
B <variable number>, I <variable
number>, D <variable number>
Data2
Character string, S <variable number>
LEN B000 “ABCDEF”
10-20
10.5 Operating Instructions
Function
CAT$
Additional
Item
Example
Combines the character string (ASCII) of Data2 and Data3, and
stores the result in Data1.
Format:CAT$<Data1><Data2><Data3>
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Character string, S <variable number>
Data3
Character string, S <variable number>
CAT$ S000 “ABC” “DEF”
10-21
11.1 Error Message List
11 Error
11.1 Error Message List
Error warns the operator not to advance to the next operation caused by a wrong operation or
the access method when using the programming pendant or an external equipment (computer, PLC, etc.).
When an error occurs, confirm the content of the error then release the error.
To release the error, perform either of the following operations:
• Press [CANCEL] on programming pendant.
• Input alarm/error reset signal (system input).
NOTE An error is different from an alarm because it does not stop the robot even if it occurred
while the robot was operated (during playback).
Main Menu
ShortCut
Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
11-1
11.1 Error Message List
11.1.1
System and General Operation
Error No.
Data
Error Message
Contents
10
-
Turn off servo power and perform corrective action
It cannot be operated while servo
power supply is ON.
20
-
Depress TEACH
Out of specified operation mode
30
-
Illegal setting for number of variables
Parameter setting error
40
-
Undefined robot position variables
Position variable cannot be used.
60
-
Undefined points (ORG, XX, XY)
Not registered user coordinates
basic 3 points (ORG, XX, XY)
Program and current tool different
The tool number registered with
teaching position data does not
match the tool number selected at
the programing pendant.
70
-
80
-
Same position in the 3 points
100
-
On overrun recovery status
110
-
Turn ON servo power
120
-
Set to PLAY mode
130
-
No start using external signal
140
-
No start using P.P.
180
-
TEACH mode select signal ON
190
-
Set variable number
200
-
Defined group axis
210
-
Undefined coordinated robots
212
Cannot register group combination
230
-
While releasing soft limit
240
-
Undefined robot
270
-
Undefined gun condition file
280
-
Lack of number of I/O points
290
-
Cannot set same No.
300
-
Undefined user frame
310
-
Cannot register Master JOB
320
-
Cannot operate CHECK-RUN
330
-
Cannot operate MACHINE LOCK
11-2
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
Error Message
340
-
Cannot operate Master JOB
350
-
Cannot initialize
380
-
390
-
410
-
420
-
430
-
Register start reserved JOB
460
-
Excess time for measuring
500
-
Undefined robot calibration data
510
-
Undefined axis
520
-
Cannot select two coordinated combination
530
-
Start reservation mode
550
-
Start reserved JOB change prohibit is
set
560
-
Cannot teach position while soft limit
released
590
-
600
-
Out of setting data range
610
-
Cannot use the user coordinate
620
-
Select JOB (robot)
650
-
Incorrect measured data
660
-
Wrong data type of position variable
-
Defined data
Position not checked
Second home position was not
checked.
Can specify servo off by safety relay
Time could not be measured
Time could not be measured for
TRT function.
Incorrect number of taught points
The number of the taught points
for tool calibration is incorrect.
Register group axis combination
680
Contents
XXX
[SYNCHRO] was pressed for
coordinated job which was not
registered as group.
File No.
700
-
Wrong CMOS memory board type
760
-
Error in start condition set
770
-
During robot operation
800
-
The gun of designation is not connected
11-3
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
Error Message
801
-
The group axis of designation is not connection
810
-
Servo power supply is limited
820
-
Modification range over
930
-
Undefined conveyor calibration data
940
-
Forced pressure signal ON
950
-
Negative correction distance
960
-
I/O axis mode requesting
970
-
ERRSVCPU signal error
11-4
Contents
11.1 Error Message List
11.1.2
Editing
Error No.
Data
1010
-
EDIT LOCK mode
1020
-
Enter correct value
1030
-
Unauthorized ID No.
1050
-
Enter correct date
1060
-
Enter correct clock
1070
-
Enter an ID number in 4-8 figures
1080
-
Negative value can’t be set
11.1.3
Error Message
Contents
Job Defined Data
Error No.
Data
Error Message
2010
-
Incorrect character
2020
-
Name not entered
2030
-
Undefined JOB name
2040
-
Defined JOB name
2050
-
Address not found
2070
-
Set robot exactly to taught position
2080
-
Press INSERT or MODIFY
2090
-
Only modifying move instruction possible
2100
-
JOB cannot be edited.
2110
-
Over soft limit
2120
-
Cannot insert/alter/delete with servo off
2150
-
Inserting is not possible from this point
2160
-
Cannot modify or delete this position
2170
-
Press INSERT to record same step as
previous step
2180
-
Cannot insert data
2210
-
Illegal data setting
2220
-
Display edit instruction
2240
-
Excessive instruction equation
11-5
Contents
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
Error Message
2250
-
Unmatched number of parentheses in
equation
2260
-
Wrong group axis selection
2270
-
Cannot insert any more instruction in
JOB
*
JOB memory is full
2280
2290
2291
2292
2293
Contents
1
Lack of position file memories
2
Lack of JOB registering memories
3
Lack of instruction file memories
4
Lack of memory pool
5
Lack of pass condition file for multilayer
-
Undefined master JOB
*
Undefined SUB Master JOB
1
Sub-master 1
2
Sub-master 2
3
Sub-master 3
4
Sub-master 4
5
Sub-master 5
6
Sub-master 6
7
Sub-master 7
8
Sub-master 8
-
Undefined MASTER START JOB
*
Undefined SUB START JOB
1
Sub-master 1
2
Sub-master 2
3
Sub-master 3
4
Sub-master 4
5
Sub-master 5
6
Sub-master 6
7
Sub-master 7
8
Sub-master 8
11-6
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
Error Message
2300
-
Cannot teach JOB without group-axis
specification
*
Same label exists
2310
XXX
Contents
Line No.
2340
-
Pasted data not found
2360
-
Cannot create editing area
2370
-
Cannot cut/copy NOP and END
instructions
2390
-
Wrong group axis selection
2400
-
Cannot move in cut & paste editing
2430
-
Reverse data not found
2440
-
Move C-and W-axis to basic position
2450
-
Relative JOB not permitted
2470
-
Wrong JOB type
2480
-
Wrong JOB coordinates setting
2500
-
Cannot convert the JOB
2510
-
Cannot correct position in the JOB
2520
-
Enter JOB name
2530
-
Illegal step number
2540
-
Enter step number
2550
-
Duplicated step number
2551
-
Duplicated line number
2560
-
Cannot correct steps of position variables and REFP
2570
-
The step does not contain speed
2580
-
The step dose not contain PL/CONT
2590
-
Soft limit range over
2600
-
Cannot teach position in concurrent
JOB
2610
-
Wrong JOB kind
2620
-
Cannot correct play speed in the JOB
2630
-
Conveyor position not reset
11-7
Laser cutting
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
Error Message
2640
-
Incorrect JOB name
2670
-
Undefined target JOB
2710
-
Relative job can’t be shifted with pulse
type
2730
-
Cannot use robot macro JOB
2740
-
Cannot use concurrent macro JOB
2750
-
Cannot use JOB with group-axis specification
2760
-
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group
axis detachment
2761
-
Axis is separated.
Cannot add, modify, or delete.
2770
-
Cannot reverse data of SVSPOTMOV
instruction
2780
-
Arithmetic error
11-8
Contents
11.1 Error Message List
11.1.4
External Memory Equipment
Error No.
Data
Error Message
3010
-
Floppy disk drive cable not connected
3020
-
Floppy disk not inserted into floppy
disk drive
3030
-
Floppy disk protection is ON
3040
-
File not saved on floppy disk or Compact Flash
3050
-
File saved on floppy disk or Compact
Flash
3060
-
Out of memory on floppy disk or Compact Flash
3070
-
Number of files on floppy disk or Compact Flash is full
3080
-
I/O error on floppy disk or Compact
Flash
*
Transmission error with floppy disk or
Compact Flash
3090
3110
3120
3130
Contents
1
Framing error
2
Overrun error
3
Parity error
4
Data code error
5
Data read error
6
Data write error
7
Data time out
8
Serial I/O error
9
Error other than described above
-
Syntax error
*
HEX code error
1
Specification error of data decode
2
Specification error of EOF record
3
Record type error
4
Total check error of record
-
Verify error
11-9
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
3140
-
Wrong pseudo instruction
*
Concurrent I/O record error
3150
3160
3170
Error Message
Contents
1
Format error
2
Ladder program is too long.
3
Exceed the range of the data
4
Specification error of channel No.
5
Specification error of relay No.
6
Timer value error
7
Specification error of timer No.
-
Cannot load illegal system data
*
Condition file data error
1
Format error
2
Specified file No. is omitted.
3
Specified tool No. is omitted.
4
User file is not registered.
11-10
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
*
Error Message
Error in JOB data record
1
Record on the number of position
data (NPOS) is wrong for the format.
2
Record on the user coordinate No.
(USER) is wrong for the format.
3
Record on the tool No. (TOOL) is
wrong for the format.
4
Record on the position data section
is wrong for the format.
5
Record on the robot type of XYZ
data (RCONF) is wrong for the format.
6
Date (DATE) record is wrong for the
format.
7
Comment (COMM) record is wrong
for the format.
8
Record on the JOB attribute data
(ATTR) is wrong for the format.
9
Control group (GROUP) record is
wrong for the format.
10
Local variable (LVARS) record is
wrong for the format.
11
JOB argument (JARGS) record is
wrong for the format.
12
Record on the teaching coordinates
for relative job (FRAME) is wrong
for the format.
13
Position data coordinates do not
match relative job coordinates.
3190
3200
-
NOP or END instruction not found
3210
-
Position No. storage area not found
*
Syntax error in instruction data
3220
Contents
2
Interior control error
3
Undefined instruction/tag
4
Instruction/tag shortage
5
Disuse instruction/tag
6
Sub instruction
11-11
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
3220
Data
Error Message
Contents
7
No instruction
8
Invalid instruction
9
Invalid tag
10
Invalid character
11
Undefined intermediate code
12
Intermediate code shortage
13
Syntax stack overflow
14
Syntax stack underflow
15
Array type tag incomplete
Tag [ARRAY]
16
Element type tag incomplete
Tag [ELEMENT]
17
Macro JOB unregistered
18
Input format error
19
Data size over
20
MIN value over
21
MAX value over
22
Operation expression error
23
Job call argument setting error
24
Macro job call argument setting
error
25
Position vector setting error
26
System error
27
Soft key designate error
28
Numerical input buffer overflow
29
Real type data precision error
30
Element format error
35
BOOL TYPE data error
36
CHAR data error
37
BYTETYPE, BINARY / HEXADECIMAL BYTE TYPE data error
38
INTEGER TYPE, DECIMAL WORD
TYPE data error
11-12
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
3220
Data
Error Message
Contents
39
BINARY/HEXADECIMAL WORD
TYPE data error
40
DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGER
TYPE, DECIMAL DWORD TYPE
data error
41
BINARY/HEXADECIMAL WORD
TYPE data error
42
REAL TYPE data error
43
LADDER SPECIAL TYPE data
error
44
JCL text
45
Invalid text
46
LABEL NAME data error
47
JOB NAME data error
48
STRING data error
49
COMMENT data error
58
Invalid instruction/tag detection
3230
-
Syntax not matched
3240
-
Undefined application
3250
-
Cannot load this file
3260
-
Excess input data
3270
-
Cannot verify this file
3280
-
Wrong welding condition (STANDARD/
ENHANCED)
3290
-
Serial port not defined
3300
-
Serial port being used
3310
-
Protocol being used
3350
-
Not enough memory
3360
-
Invalid folder
3370
-
Incorrect folder name
3450
-
Cannot load macro JOB at current
security mode
11-13
Load in management mode.
11.1 Error Message List
Error No.
Data
*
3460
Error Message
Contents
Cannot backup Compact Flash
1
Insufficient Compact Flash memory.
2
Not accessible to Compact Flash.
3470
-
Database not found
3480
-
Database access error
3490
-
Same database exists
3500
-
Check Compact Flash insertion
3510
-
Cannot delete folder. Check attribute
and inside file
3520
-
Same folder exists
3530
-
Cannot load at current security mode
11-14
11.1 Error Message List
11.1.5
Error No.
4010
4030
4040
Concurrent I/O
Data
*
Error Message
Illegal relay No.
XXX
*
Line No.
Illegal instruction
XXX
*
Line No.
Relay/register No. duplicated in OUT/
GOUT or arithmetic instruction
XXX
4050
4060
4070
4080
4090
*
Line No.
Excess STR-[-NOT] instructions
Line No.
Excess AND [OR] STR instructions
XXX
*
Line No.
Syntax error in CNT instructions
XXX
*
Line No.
Enter STR [-NOT] at head of block
XXX
4120
-
4130
-
4140
-
4150
The relay is not used
XXX
*
*
Multiple outputs are instructed to
the relay or register.
Line No.
XXX
*
Contents
Need STR [-NOT]
Line No.
Concurrent I/O memory is full
Exceeds memory capacity
(10000 steps)
END instruction not found
END instruction not found
Wrong ladder program
Position and number of PART
instruction are wrong.
Wrong use of GSTR, GOUT commands
GSTR and GOUT is not used
together.
XXX
Line No.
4220
-
Excess TMR/CNT or arithmetic instructions
4230
-
Syntax error in TMR/CNT instructions
11-15
More than 100 TMR, CNT or
arithmetic instruction used
11.1 Error Message List
11.1.6
Maintenance Mode
Error No.
Data
Error Message
8010
-
Too many axes
8020
-
Too many I/O points
8030
-
Too many boards (XFB01B (MASTER))
8031
-
Too many boards (MSC01B)
8040
-
Memory error (ControlNet output condition)
8041
-
Memory error (UNIWIRE CONNECT DAT
8050
-
Robot model is not registered
8060
-
Cannot get UNIWIRE connection data
11-16
Contents
Symbols
comments .................................................... 3-4
concurrent I/O program .................................. 7-7
Continuous (operation cycle) ........................ 1-13
continuous circular arcs ................................. 3-7
continuous spline curves ................................ 3-8
Control ....................................................... 1-12
Control Group ............................................. 1-12
control groups ............................................... 3-3
control instructions ...................................... 3-40
Converter parameter ..................................... 7-7
COORD key ................................................. 1-5
coordinate home position parameter ............... 7-7
coordinate system ....................................... 1-12
copy ................................................... 3-51, 3-54
copying jobs ................................................. 5-2
COS ........................................................ 10-17
CREATE NEW JOB .................................... 1-20
CURRENT POSITION ................................. 1-21
cursor .......................................................... 3-4
cursor key .............................................. 1-2, 1-4
cut ..................................................... 3-51, 3-54
Cycle (operation cycle) ................................ 1-13
cycle time ..................................................... 4-5
cylindrical coordinates .................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-7
* (label) ...................................................... 10-8
A
ADD ..................................... 10-10, 10-12, 10-19
additional items ............................................. 3-4
ALARM HISTORY ....................................... 1-21
alarm history data .......................................... 7-7
ALL CMOS AREA ......................................... 7-6
alphanumeric input ...................................... 1-17
ANALOG MONITOR .................................... 1-21
AND ......................................................... 10-14
AOUT ......................................................... 10-6
application parameter .................................... 7-7
ARATIOF.................................................... 10-7
ARATION ................................................... 10-7
arc end condition data.................................... 7-6
arc start condition data ................................... 7-6
AREA key ..................................................... 1-5
ARM CONTROL.......................................... 1-21
ASSIST key .................................................. 1-9
ATAN ....................................................... 10-18
AUTO BACKUP SET ................................... 1-22
axis keys ............................................... 1-2, 1-6
D
DATE/TIME ................................................ 1-22
DEC ............................................... 10-14, 10-21
DELETE ..................................................... 1-21
DELETE key ................................................. 1-7
deleting a file .............................................. 7-42
deleting a job ........................................ 5-6, 7-41
deleting additional items .............................. 3-50
deleting instructions ..................................... 3-44
DEVICE ..................................................... 1-21
DIN ............................................................ 10-6
direct open ................................................... 6-1
DIRECT OPEN key ....................................... 1-5
DIV ................................................ 10-13, 10-20
double precision integer type ........................ 3-64
DOUT ........................................................ 10-5
DROP AMOUNT ......................................... 1-21
dry-run speed operations ............................. 4-11
B
BACK SPACE key ......................................... 1-9
base axis .................................................... 1-12
base reverse paste ...................................... 3-51
basic axis .............................................. 2-6, 2-7
BATCH CMOS .............................................. 7-6
batch selection ............................................ 7-43
BATCH USER MEMORY ............................... 7-6
B-axis ........................................................... 2-5
BWD key .............................................. 1-7, 3-19
byte type .................................................... 3-64
C
CALL.................................................. 9-27, 10-8
CANCEL key ................................................ 1-7
cartesian coordinates ...................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-6
character input ............................................ 1-15
character string type .................................... 3-64
check mode operation.................................. 4-12
circular interpolation ...................................... 3-7
CLEAR ..................................................... 10-17
ClO parameter .............................................. 7-7
CNVRT .................................................... 10-16
COMMAND POSITION ................................ 1-21
COMMAND POSITION window .................... 3-37
E
Index-1
edit lock on individual job units ..................... 5-12
edit mode ........................................... 1-13, 1-19
editing comments ........................................ 5-11
editing condition files ................................... 3-63
editing interpolation type .............................. 3-62
editing play speed ....................................... 3-58
emergency stop .......................................... 4-14
emergency stop button ............................ 1-4, 3-1
Enable switch ......................................... 1-2, 1-4
END ........................................................... 10-8
ENTER key ............................................ 1-2, 1-7
error message list ....................................... 11-1
EX.AXIS key ................................................. 1-6
External Axis .............................................. 2-13
external memory devices ............................... 7-1
INSERT key ................................................. 1-7
inserting additional items .............................. 3-49
inserting instructions .................................... 3-41
insertion slot for compact flash ....................... 1-2
instruction group .......................................... 3-39
instruction search......................................... 3-86
integer type ................................................. 3-64
INTERFERENCE ......................................... 1-21
INTERLOCK key........................................... 1-8
interpolation type .................................. 3-5, 3-11
INVMAT .................................................... 10-19
F
FD/PC CARD ............................................. 1-21
file management ......................................... 7-10
FILE/ GENERAL DATA ................................. 7-6
flip/no flip.................................................... 3-76
FOLDER .................................................... 1-21
FORMAT.................................................... 1-21
function definition parameter .......................... 7-7
Function Keys ............................................... 9-1
function keys ................................................ 1-2
FWD key .............................................. 1-7, 3-19
J
JOB ..................................................... 1-20, 7-6
JOB CAPACITY........................................... 1-20
JOB CAPACITY window ............................... 3-38
JOB CONTENT window ............................... 3-36
JOB HEADER window.................................. 3-34
job stack ..................................................... 4-32
joint coordinates ............................. 1-12, 2-2, 2-5
joint interpolation .......................................... 3-5
JUMP ......................................................... 10-8
G
general-purpose display area ................. 1-2, 1-10
GETE ....................................................... 10-15
GETS ....................................................... 10-16
group operation axis .................................... 1-12
GRP COMBINATION .................................. 1-22
K
KEY ALLOCATION ...................................... 1-22
keypads ...................................................... 1-15
H
high speed ................................................. 1-13
HIGH SPEED key ......................................... 1-5
hold at the station........................................ 4-31
hold by external input signal (system input) ... 4-30
hold by HOLD key ....................................... 4-30
HOLD key .................................................... 1-8
hold operation ............................................. 4-13
HOME POSITION ....................................... 1-21
home position calibrating data ........................ 7-7
human interface display area ............... 1-10, 1-14
L
I
I/O DATA ..................................................... 7-7
I/O instructions............................................ 3-40
I/O MSG HISTORY ..................................... 1-21
I/O name data ............................................... 7-7
IF............................................................... 10-9
IMOV ......................................................... 10-3
IN/OUT ...................................................... 1-20
INC ................................................. 10-14, 10-20
inching ....................................................... 1-13
individual selection ...................................... 7-43
INFORM LIST key ......................................... 1-7
Index-2
label search................................................. 3-85
L-axis........................................................... 2-5
LIMIT RELEASE .......................................... 1-21
limited speed operations ............................... 4-10
line number .................................................. 3-4
line search .................................................. 3-84
linear interpolation ........................................ 3-6
LOAD ......................................................... 1-21
loading a condition file or generel data ........... 7-29
loading a job ................................................ 7-27
loading a parameter ..................................... 7-31
loading all CMOS data ................................. 7-37
loading all data in CMOS area....................... 7-38
loading all user?s programs .......................... 7-36
loading I/O data ........................................... 7-33
loading system data ..................................... 7-34
local variables.............................................. 3-80
low speed.................................................... 1-13
low speed operation ..................................... 4-10
M
machine lock operation ................................ 4-11
main menu area .................................. 1-10, 1-12
MAIN MENU key .................................... 1-4, 1-9
major alarms ............................................... 4-16
major axes .................................................... 2-5
management mode.............................. 1-13, 1-19
manipulator coordinate systems...................... 2-1
MANIPULATOR TYPE ................................. 1-21
manipulator type.......................................... 3-76
manual speed ..................................... 1-13, 3-21
MANUAL SPEED keys ........................... 1-2, 1-5
MASTER JOB ............................................. 1-20
master job .................................................... 4-2
medium speed ............................................ 1-13
menu area ................................... 1-2, 1-10, 1-14
MFRAME.................................................. 10-18
minor alarms ............................................... 4-16
mirror shift function ...................................... 6-43
Mode.......................................................... 1-13
mode switch.................................................. 1-8
modification of speed type ............................ 3-58
MODIFY key ................................................. 1-7
modifying additional items ............................ 3-48
modifying additional numeric data ................. 3-47
modifying instructions .................................. 3-44
modifying job names ...................................... 5-8
MONITORING TIME .................................... 1-21
motion function parameter .............................. 7-7
motion time ................................................... 4-5
MOTION TYPE key ................................ 1-2, 1-6
motor gun dry spot pressure data.................... 7-6
motor gun pressure power data ...................... 7-6
MOVC ........................................................ 10-2
move instructions .................................. 3-9, 3-40
MOVJ ......................................................... 10-1
MOVL ........................................................ 10-2
MOVS ........................................................ 10-3
MSHIFT.................................................... 10-11
MUL ........................... 10-10, 10-13, 10-19, 10-20
MULMAT .................................................. 10-18
OR ........................................................... 10-14
override speed settings .................................. 4-5
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR .............................. 1-21
P
Page .......................................................... 1-13
page .......................................................... 1-13
PAGE key .............................................. 1-2, 1-5
Painting Application ....................................... 9-1
PAINTSET.................................................. 9-21
PAM function .............................................. 6-35
parallel shift function ...................................... 6-3
parallel shift job conversion function .............. 6-16
PARAMETER ....................................... 1-22, 7-7
PARAMETER BATCH ................................... 7-7
paste.................................................. 3-51, 3-55
PAUSE ...................................................... 10-9
play mode .................................................. 1-18
play speed ............................................ 3-5, 3-12
playback ....................................................... 4-1
playback time................................................ 4-5
position level ............................................... 3-12
position type ............................................... 3-64
POWER ON/OFF POS ................................ 1-21
Power Source characteristic data.................... 7-6
Power Source characteristic difinition data ....... 7-6
programming pendant.................................... 1-2
programming pendant display ...................... 1-10
PULSE ....................................................... 10-5
pulse mirror-shift function ............................. 6-43
R
N
NOP ........................................................... 10-9
NOT ......................................................... 10-14
Numeric keys ......................................... 1-2, 1-8
O
OPE ORIGIN POS ...................................... 1-21
OPERATE COND................................ 1-22, 4-23
operating instructions ................................... 3-40
operation control parameter............................ 7-7
operation cycle ...................................... 1-13, 4-6
operation mode ................................... 1-13, 1-19
Index-3
R-axis .......................................................... 2-5
r-axis............................................................ 2-7
real type ..................................................... 3-64
reference point instructions .......................... 3-15
REFP ......................................................... 10-4
registering a job ............................................ 3-2
related job (job+condition) .............................. 7-6
relative modification ..................................... 3-58
remote mode .............................................. 1-18
RES. START(CNCT) ........................... 1-22, 4-24
RES. START(JOB) ...................................... 1-20
RES. STATUS .................................... 1-20, 4-28
RESERVE JOB NAME ................................ 1-22
reserved start.............................................. 4-22
RESET RESERVATION .............................. 4-29
restart ........................................................ 4-13
RET ........................................................... 10-8
reverse paste ...................................... 3-51, 3-56
ROBOT ...................................................... 1-21
robot axis ................................................... 1-12
ROBOT CALIB............................................ 1-21
ROBOT key .................................................. 1-6
robot matching parameter .............................. 7-7
robot-coordinates mirror-shift funciton ........... 6-43
S
SAVE ......................................................... 1-21
saving a condition file or general data ........... 7-17
saving a job ........................ 7-11, 7-12, 7-13, 7-15
saving a parameter ..................................... 7-19
saving all CMOS data .................................. 7-25
saving all data in CMOS area ....................... 7-26
saving all user?s programs .......................... 7-24
saving I/O data ........................................... 7-21
saving system data ..................................... 7-22
S-axis .......................................................... 2-5
SECOND HOME POS ................................. 1-21
second home position.................................... 7-7
security mode ..................................... 1-13, 1-19
SELECT JOB ............................................. 1-20
SELECT key ........................................... 1-2, 1-4
selecting the range ...................................... 3-53
sensor parameter .......................................... 7-7
SERVO MONITOR...................................... 1-21
SERVO ON READY key ................................ 1-9
servo parameter............................................ 7-7
servo power block parameter ......................... 7-7
servomotor parameter ................................... 7-7
SERVOPACK parameter ............................... 7-7
SET .......................................................... 10-15
SET SPEED ............................................... 1-22
SETE ........................................................ 10-15
SETUP....................................................... 1-22
SFTOF ...................................................... 10-11
SFTON ..................................................... 10-11
shift instructions .................................... 3-40, 6-7
SHIFT key .................................................... 1-8
shift value ..................................................... 6-5
shock detection level data .............................. 7-6
short/full open position data ........................... 7-6
SIN ........................................................... 10-17
single circular arc .......................................... 3-7
single job...................................................... 7-6
single spline curve ........................................ 3-8
special playback operations ........................... 4-9
SPEED ...................................................... 10-4
speed override ............................................ 4-18
spline interpolation ........................................ 3-8
spot gun characteristic data ........................... 7-6
spot welding Power Source characteristic data 7-6
SPYOF ...................................................... 9-15
SPYON ........................................................ 9-9
SQRT ....................................................... 10-18
START key ............................................. 1-8, 3-1
start No. ....................................................... 4-5
state under execution .................................. 1-13
station axis ................................................. 1-12
status display area .............................. 1-10, 1-12
Step (operation cycle).................................. 1-13
step search ................................................ 3-84
stop ........................................................... 4-13
stop by alarm .............................................. 4-16
SUB ............................ 10-10, 10-12, 10-19, 10-20
SV monitor signals ........................................ 7-7
symbol input ............................................... 1-17
SYSTEM DATA ............................................ 7-7
system definition parameter ........................... 7-7
SYSTEM INFO ............................................ 1-21
system information ........................................ 7-7
system matching parameter ........................... 7-7
T
tag search ................................................... 3-87
T-axis .......................................................... 2-5
teach lock..................................................... 3-1
teach mode ................................................. 1-18
teaching ....................................................... 3-1
TEACHING COND ....................................... 1-22
test operations .................................... 3-22, 3-57
TEST START key ......................................... 1-6
theta(q)-axis ................................................. 2-7
TIMER ........................................................ 10-9
timer instruction ........................................... 3-16
TOOL ......................................................... 1-21
tool coordinates .............................. 1-12, 2-2, 2-8
tool data ....................................................... 7-6
tool number .......................................... 2-9, 3-11
transmission(general) parameter .................... 7-7
TRT ............................................................ 3-60
U
U-axis .......................................................... 2-5
undo ........................................................... 3-31
UNTIL ......................................................... 10-9
USER COORDINATE .................................. 1-21
user coordinate data ..................................... 7-6
user coordinate number ................................ 2-12
user coordinates ........................... 1-12, 2-2, 2-10
USER ID ..................................................... 1-22
User Variables ............................................. 3-64
user variables .............................................. 3-64
user word registration .................................... 7-7
user-coordinates mirror-shift function ............. 6-43
V
Index-4
VARIABLE .................................................. 1-20
variable data ................................................ 7-6
variable name ............................................... 7-7
VERIFY ...................................................... 1-21
verifying a file .............................................. 7-40
verifying a job .............................................. 7-38
verifying data ............................................... 7-38
VERSION.................................................... 1-21
W
WAIT.......................................................... 10-6
Weak Battery of Memory .............................. 1-13
weaving data ................................................ 7-6
weaving prohibit .......................................... 4-12
work instructions ......................................... 3-40
wrist axis ......................................... 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
WRONG DATA LOG ................................... 1-22
X
X-axis ........................................................... 2-6
XOR ......................................................... 10-14
Y
Y-axis ........................................................... 2-6
Z
Z-axis .................................................... 2-6, 2-7
? (comment) ............................................... 10-9
Index-5
NX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR PAINTING
For inquiries or after-sales service on this product, contact
your local YASKAWA representative as shown below.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
2-1 Kurosakishiroishi, Yahatanishi-ku, Kitakyushu, 806-0004, Japan
Phone: +81-93-645-7703 Fax: +81-93-645-7802
www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. (MOTOMAN ROBOTICS DIVISION)
100 Automation Way, Miamisburg, OH 45342, U.S.A.
Phone: +1-937-847-6200 Fax: +1-937-847-6277
www.motoman.com
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH (ROBOTICS DIVISION)
Yaskawastrasse 1, 85391, Allershausen, Germany
Phone: +49-8166-90-0 Fax: +49-8166-90-103
www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA NORDIC AB
Verkstadsgatan 2, Box 504, SE-385 25 Torsas, Sweden
Phone: +46-480-417-800 Fax: +46-486-414-10
www.yaskawa.se
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.
22F, One Corporate Avenue, No.222 Hubin Road, Huangpu District, Shanghai 200021, China
Phone: +86-21-5385-2200 Fax: +86-21-5385-3299
www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA SHOUGANG ROBOT CO., LTD.
No.2 Building, No.6 Rongchang East Street, Beijing E&T Development Area, Beijing 100176, China
Phone: +86-10-6788-2858 Fax: +86-10-6788-2878
www.ysr-motoman.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
6F, 112, LS-ro, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do, 14118, Korea
Phone: +82-31-8015-4224 Fax: +82-31-8015-5034
www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
12F, No.207, Sec. 3, Beishin Rd., Shindian District, New Taipei City 23143, Taiwan
Phone: +886-2-8913-1333 Fax: +886-2-8913-1513
www.yaskawa.com.tw
YASKAWA ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
30A Kallang Place, #06-01, 339213, Singapore
Phone: +65-6282-3003 Fax: +65-6289-3003
www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.
59, 1st-5th Floor, Flourish Building, Soi Ratchadapisek 18, Ratchadapisek Road, Huaykwang,
Bangkok 10310, Thailand
Phone: +66-2-017-0099 Fax: +66-2-017-0199
www.yaskawa.co.th
PT. YASKAWA ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Secure Building-Gedung B Lantai Dasar & Lantai 1 Jl. Raya Protokol Halim Perdanakusuma,
Jakarta 13610, Indonesia
Phone: +62-21-2982-6470 Fax: +62-21-2982-6471
www.yaskawa.co.id
YASKAWA INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED (ROBOTICS DIVISION)
No.136, Sector-8, Industrial Estate, IMT Manesar, Gurugram, Haryana 122050, India
Phone: +91-124-475-8500
www.yaskawaindia.in
Specifications are subject to change without notice
for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A036 7
C Printed in Japan April 2024 03-10
">